Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing
Protocols
NN47200-503 (217465-C)
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
reasonable means to determine Customer’s Software activation or usage levels. If suppliers of third party software
included in Software require Nortel Networks to include additional or different terms, Customer agrees to abide by
such terms provided by Nortel Networks with respect to such third party software.
2. Warranty. Except as may be otherwise expressly agreed to in writing between Nortel Networks and Customer,
Software is provided "AS IS" without any warranties (conditions) of any kind. NORTEL NETWORKS DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES (CONDITIONS) FOR THE SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND ANY WARRANTY OF NON-INFRINGEMENT. Nortel Networks is not obligated to provide support of
any kind for the Software. Some jurisdictions do not allow exclusion of implied warranties, and, in such event, the
above exclusions may not apply.
3. Limitation of Remedies. IN NO EVENT SHALL NORTEL NETWORKS OR ITS AGENTS OR SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING: a) DAMAGES BASED ON ANY THIRD PARTY CLAIM; b) LOSS OF, OR
DAMAGE TO, CUSTOMER’S RECORDS, FILES OR DATA; OR c) DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS), WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF NORTEL NETWORKS, ITS AGENTS OR SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THEIR
POSSIBILITY. The forgoing limitations of remedies also apply to any developer and/or supplier of the Software. Such
developer and/or supplier is an intended beneficiary of this Section. Some jurisdictions do not allow these limitations
or exclusions and, in such event, they may not apply.
4. General
a) If Customer is the United States Government, the following paragraph shall apply: All Nortel Networks Software
available under this License Agreement is commercial computer software and commercial computer software
documentation and, in the event Software is licensed for or on behalf of the United States Government, the respective
rights to the software and software documentation are governed by Nortel Networks standard commercial license
in accordance with U.S. Federal Regulations at 48 C.F.R. Sections 12.212 (for non-DoD entities) and 48 C.F.R.
227.7202 (for DoD entities).
b) Customer may terminate the license at any time. Nortel Networks may terminate the license if Customer fails to
comply with the terms and conditions of this license. In either event, upon termination, Customer must either return
the Software to Nortel Networks or certify its destruction.
c) Customer is responsible for payment of any taxes, including personal property taxes, resulting from Customer’s
use of the Software. Customer agrees to comply with all applicable laws including all applicable export and import
laws and regulations.
d) Neither party may bring an action, regardless of form, more than two years after the cause of the action arose.
e) The terms and conditions of this License Agreement form the complete and exclusive agreement between
Customer and Nortel Networks.
f) This License Agreement is governed by the laws of the country in which Customer acquires the Software. If
the Software is acquired in the United States, then this License Agreement is governed by the laws of the state
of New York.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Revision History
Date Revised
July 2005
Version
1.00
Reason for revision
New document for Software Release 4.2.
Document updated for Software Release 5.0.
2.00
July 2006
.01
3
u
pdated for Software Release 5.1
August 2007
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Revision History
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Contents
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Contents
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Preface
This document provides information and instructions on the configuration
of IP Routing on the 5500 Series Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch. Consult
any documentation included with the switch and the product release notes
configuration process.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
"5500 Series Switch Platforms" (page 9)outlines the switches that are part
of the 5500 Series of Nortel Ethernet Routing Switches
5500 Series Switch Platforms
5500 Series Switch Model
Key Features
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch A 24 port, 10/100/1GBase-T, Layer 4,
5510-24T
diffserv-capable, stackable Ethernet switch.
This switch contains two shared SFP ports.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch A 48 port, 10/100/1GBase-T, Layer 4,
5510-48T
diffserv-capable, stackable Ethernet switch.
This switch contains two shared SFP ports.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch A 24 port, 10/100/1GBase-T, Layer 4,
5520-24T-PWR
diffserv-capable, stackable Ethernet switch with
full Power over Ethernet (PoE) capability on all
copper ports. This switch contains four shared
SFP ports.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch A 48 port, 10/100/1GBase-T, Layer 4,
5520-48T-PWR
diffserv-capable, stackable Ethernet switch with
full Power over Ethernet (PoE) capability on all
copper ports. This switch contains four shared
SFP ports.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch A 24 port, 10/100/1GBase-T, Layer 4,
5530-24TFD
diffserv-capable, stackable Ethernet switch.
This switch contains twelve shared SFP ports
and two XFP ports.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 Preface
Related publications
For more information about the management, configuration, and use of the
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series, refer to the publications listed
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Documentation
Title
Description
Part Number
Nortel Ethernet
Routing Switch 5500
Series Release 5.1
Installation
Instructions for the installation of
a switch in the Nortel Ethernet
Routing Switch 5500 Series. It also
provides an overview of hardware
key to the installation, configuration,
and maintenance of the switch.
NN47200-300
Nortel Ethernet
Routing Switch 5500
Release 5.1 Series
Instructions for the general
configuration of switches in the 5500
Series that are not covered by the
NN47200-500
NN47200-501
Configuration - System other documentation.
Nortel Ethernet
Routing Switch
5500 Release 5.1
Series Configuration -
Security
Instructions for the configuration
and management of security for
switches in the 5500 Series.
Nortel Ethernet
Instructions for the configuration of
spanning and trunking protocols on
5500 Series switches
NN47200-502
NN47200-503
Routing Switch 5500
Series Release 5.1
Configuration - VLANs,
Spanning Tree, and
Link Aggregation
Nortel Ethernet
Routing Switch
5500 Release 5.1
Configuration - IP
Routing Protocols
Instructions for the configuration of
IP routing protocols on 5500 Series
switches.
Nortel Ethernet
Instructions for the configuration and NN47200-504
implementation of QoS and filtering
on 5500 Series switches.
Routing Switch 5500
Series Release 5.1
Configuration - Quality
of Service
Nortel Ethernet
Routing Switch
5500 Release 5.1
Configuration - System
Monitoring
Instructions for the configuration,
implementation, and use of system
monitoring on 5500 Series switches.
NN47200-505
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding the latest updates on the Nortel web site 11
Title
Description
Part Number
Nortel Ethernet
Provides an overview of new
NN47200-400
Routing Switch 5500
features, fixes, and limitations of
Series Release Notes the 5500 Series switches. Also
- Release 5.1
included are any supplementary
documentation and document
errata.
Installing the Nortel
Ethernet Redundant
Power Supply 15
Instructions for the installation and
use of the Nortel Ethernet RPS 15.
217070-A
215081-A
DC-DC Converter
Module for the
Baystack 5000 Series
Switch
Instructions for the installation and
use of the DC-DC power converter.
Nortel Ethernet
Instructions for the installation and
use of SFP transceivers.
NN47200-302
Routing Switch 5500
Series Release 5.1
Installation - SFP
You can access technical documentation online at the Nortel Technical
Support web site, located at http://www.nortel.com/support. Use the
following procedure to access documents on the Technical Support web site:
•
•
If it is not already selected, click the Browse product support tab.
From the list provided in the product family box, select Nortel Ethernet
Routing Switch.
•
•
•
From the product list, select the desired 5500 Series Switch.
From the content list, select Documentation.
Click Go.
You can view documents online, download them for future reference, or
printed them. All documents available on the Technical Support web site are
in Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) format.
Finding the latest updates on the Nortel web site
The content of this documentation was current at the time of release. To
check for updates to the documentation and software for the Nortel Ethernet
Routing Switch 5500 Series, use the links provided in the following table.
Software
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Software
Documentation
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12 Preface
How to get help
If a service contract for the Nortel product has been purchased from a
distributor or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that
distributor or reseller for assistance.
If a Nortel service program was purchased, contact Nortel Technical
Support.
The following information is available online:
•
•
•
contact information for Nortel Technical Support
information about the Nortel Technical Solutions Centers
information about the Express Routing Code (ERC) for your product
An ERC is available for many Nortel products and services. When an ERC
is used, the call is routed to technical support personnel who specialize
in supporting the service or product. The ERC for a particular product or
service is available online.
The main Nortel support portal is available at http://www.nortel.com/support.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols
This chapter provides an introduction to IP routing and IP routing protocols
used in the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series. Subsequent
chapters will provide a more detailed description of switch capabilities and
configuration procedures.
IP routing
To configure IP routing on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series,
use virtual local area networks (VLAN) to create virtual router interfaces by
assigning an IP address to the VLAN. This section discusses this concept
in depth.
For a more detailed description about VLANs and their use, consult Nortel
Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Release 5.1 Configuration - VLANs,
Spanning Tree, and Link Aggregation.
IP addressing
An IP version 4 (IPv4) address consists of 32 bits expressed in a
dotted-decimal format (XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX). The IPv4 address space is
divided into classes, with classes A, B, and C reserved for unicast addresses
and accounting for 87.5 percent of the 32-bit IP address space. Class D
IP address classifications
Number of
Networks
Nodes per
Network
Class
Address Range
Mask
A
1.0.0.0 - 127.0.0.0
255.0.0.0
127
16,777,214
Note: Although technically part of Class A addressing, network 127 is reserved
for loopback.
128.0.0.0 -
191.255.0.0
B
C
255.255.0.0
16,384
65,534
255
192.0.0.0 -
223.255.255.0
255.255.255.0 2,097,152
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols
Number of
Networks
Nodes per
Network
Address Range
Mask
Class
224.0.0.0 -
239.255.255.254
D
Note: Class D addresses are primarily reserved for multicast operations although
the addresses 224.0.0.5 and 224.0.0.6 are used by OSPF and 224.0.0.9 is used
by RIP.
240.0.0.0 -
E
240.255.255.255
Note: Class E addresses are reserved for research purposes.
To express an IP address in dotted-decimal notation, each octet of the
IP address is converted to a decimal number and separated by decimal
points. For example, the 32-bit IP address 10000000 00100000 00001010
10100111 is expressed in dotted-decimal notation as 128.32.10.167.
Each IP address class, when expressed in binary notation, has a different
boundary point between the network and host portions of the address, as
illustrated in "Network and host boundaries in IP address classes" (page
The remaining 8 through 24 bits identify a specific host on the network.
Network and host boundaries in IP address classes
Subnet addressing
Subnetworks (or subnets) are an extension of the IP addressing scheme.
Subnets allow an organization to use one IP address range for multiple
networks. Subnets are two or more physical networks that share a common
network-identification field (the network portion of the 32-bit IP address).
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing 15
A subnet address is created by increasing the network portion to include
a subnet address, thus decreasing the host portion of the IP address. For
example, in the address 128.32.10.0, the network portion is 128.32, while
the subnet is found in the first octet of the host portion (10). A subnet mask
is applied to the IP address and identifies the network and host portions
of the address.
how subnet masks used with Class B and Class C addresses can create
differing numbers of subnets and hosts. This example shows the use of the
zero subnet, which is permitted on a Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5510.
Subnet masks for Class B and Class C IP addresses
Number
of bits
Number of Subnets
(Recommended)
Number of Hosts
per Subnet
Subnet Mask
Class B
2
3
255.255.192.0
255.255.224.0
255.255.240.0
255.255.248.0
255.255.252.0
255.255.254.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.128
255.255.255.192
255.255.255.224
255.255.255.240
255.255.255.248
255.255.255.252
2
6
16 382
8 190
4 094
2 046
1 022
510
254
126
62
4
14
30
5
6
62
7
126
8
254
9
510
10
11
12
13
14
1 022
2 046
4 094
8 190
16 382
30
14
6
2
Class C
1
2
3
4
5
6
255.255.255.128
255.255.255.192
255.255.255.224
255.255.255.240
255.255.255.248
255.255.255.252
0
2
126
62
30
14
6
6
14
30
62
2
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols
Variable-length subnet masking (VLSM) is the ability to divide an intranet
into pieces that match network requirements. Routing is based on the
longest subnet mask or network that matches.
IP routing using VLANs
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series supports wire-speed IP
routing between virtual LANs (VLAN). This type of routing is also referred to
as virtual routing. When a virtual router interface is created for a specified
VLAN, a specific IP address is associated with the specific VLAN. In this
release, the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series supports static
routing, in which the identifiers of the devices being routed between are
entered manually.
This virtual router interface does not have an association with any specified
port or set of ports (it is called a virtual router interface because it is not
associated with any particular port). The VLAN IP address can be reached
through any of the ports in the VLAN specified as a virtual router interface,
and the assigned IP address is the gateway through which packets are
routed out of that VLAN. Routed traffic can be forwarded to another VLAN
within the switch or stack of Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series.
Once routing is enabled on two VLANs by assigning IP addresses, routing
can be performed between those two VLANs (refer to "IP routing with
IP routing with VLANs
IP routing is enabled or disabled globally on the Nortel Ethernet Routing
Switch 5500 Series. By default, IP routing is disabled.
Note: All IP routing parameters can be configured on the Nortel
Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series before routing is actually enabled
on the switch.
There is no longer a one-to-one correspondence between the physical
port and the router interface, because a given port can belong to multiple
VLANs. The VLANs may be configured for routing on the switch.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing 17
As with any IP address, virtual router interface addresses are also used for
device management. For management over IP, any virtual router interface
IP address can be used to access the switch as long as routing is enabled.
When the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series switch or stack is
used without routing enabled, the Management VLAN is reachable only
through the switch or stack IP address. With IP routing enabled on the
switch or stack, any of the virtual router IP interfaces can be used for
management over IP.
Once routing is enabled on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
switches, the Management VLAN behaves like all other routable VLANs.
The IP address is reachable through any virtual router interface, as long as
a route is available. Actually, all virtual router interfaces can be used as the
Management VLAN over IP.
Multinetting
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series supports the definition
and configuration of up to eight secondary interfaces on each VLAN
(multinetting). With IP multinetting, you can associate multiple IP subnets
with one VLAN. That is, connected hosts can belong to different IP subnets
on the same VLAN.
Multinetting can be configured using the CLI or the Device Manager.
The following diagram illustrates a network with configured IP multinetting.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols
Network with Multinetting
You can configure a static route with the next hop on the secondary
interface. You can also add static ARP for a given IP address in the same
subnet of a secondary interface.
Here are some limitations when you are working with secondary interfaces:
•
•
you can have a maximum of eight secondary interfaces on each VLAN
you can have a total maximum of 256 IP interfaces (including primary
and secondary)
•
all of the secondary interfaces on a VLAN are enabled or disabled
together. There is no provision for configuring the administrative state of
the secondary IP interfaces individually.
•
•
•
dynamic routing is not available for secondary IP interfaces
secondary interfaces are not supported on brouters
a primary IP interface must be in place before secondary IP interfaces
can be added; secondary interfaces must be deleted before you can
delete the primary
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing 19
If secondary interfaces are configured on the management VLAN, routing
cannot be disabled globally or on the management VLAN. Secondary IP
interfaces on the management VLAN are purged from NVRAM when
•
a unit leaves the stack and the switch does not have a manually
configured IP
•
the switch fails to get the IP address through the BootP mode
The following are not supported on secondary interfaces:
•
•
•
•
•
DHCRP
Proxy ARP
UDP broadcast
IPFIX
VRRP, OSPF, RIP
For information about configuring secondary interfaces on VLANs, see "IP
Brouter port
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series supports the concept
of brouter ports. A brouter port is a single-port VLAN that can route IP
packets as well as bridge all non-routable traffic. The difference between
a brouter port and a standard IP protocol-based VLAN configured to do
routing is that the routing interface of the brouter port is not subject to
the spanning tree state of the port. A brouter port can be in the blocking
state for non-routable traffic and still be able to route IP traffic. This feature
removes any interruptions caused by Spanning Tree Protocol recalculations
in routed traffic. A brouter port is actually a one-port VLAN; therefore, each
brouter port decreases the number of available VLANs by one and uses
one VLAN ID.
When a brouter port is created, the following actions are also taking place
on the switch:
•
•
•
A port-based VLAN is created.
The brouter port is added to the new port-based VLAN.
The PVID of the brouter port is changed to the VLAN ID of the new
VLAN.
•
•
The STP participation of the brouter port is disabled.
An IP address is assigned to the brouter VLAN.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols
Management VLAN
Prior to Software Release 4.0, the Management VLAN was the only VLAN
that was used to carry the management traffic, including Telnet, Web,
SNMP, BootP and TFTP for the switch. The Management VLAN always
exists on the switch and cannot be removed. All IP settings, including switch
IP address, stack IP address, subnet mask and default gateway, apply only
to the Management VLAN.
In this release of Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series, a regular
Layer 2 (L2) VLAN behaves like a routable L3 VLAN if a pair of IP addresses
and a MAC address are attached to the VLAN. When routing is enabled in
L3 mode, every L3 VLAN is capable of doing routing as well as carrying the
management traffic. Any L3 VLAN can be used instead of the Management
VLAN to manage the switch.
Layer 2 versus Layer 3 mode
When the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series is configured to route
IP traffic between different VLANs, the switch is considered to be running in
L3 mode; otherwise, the switch runs in L2 mode.
The L3 manager determines in which mode a switch or a stack should be
run. The mode is determined based on the user settings and events. But
the general rule is to select:
•
•
L3 mode: if routing is turned on globally for the switch or stack.
L2 mode: if routing is turned off globally for the switch or stack.
Routing and management
In L3 mode, the Management VLAN, as well as all other L3 VLANs, has the
capability to route and carry the management traffic. In this release of the
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series, the settings apply to all L3
all possible settings and default settings for each type of VLAN.
VLAN settings
Routing
(default)
Management
(Routing)
VLAN/Feature
Default Route
Management VLAN
(L2 mode)
Off
On
Yes (Management
VLAN only)
Management VLAN
(L3 mode)
On/off (on)
On/off (on)
On
No
L3 VLAN
On/off (on)
Yes (global)
Setting IP routing
To set IP routing (or L3 VLANs), take the following steps:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing 21
Step Action
1
2
3
Enable IP routing globally.
Assign an IP address to the specific VLAN or brouter port.
Enable IP routing on the interface.
—End—
Refer to subsequent chapters in this document for detailed instructions on
configuring IP routes.
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
Network stations using the IP protocol need both a physical address and an
IP address to transmit a packet. If a network station knows only a network
host’s IP address, the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) enables the
network station to determine a network host’s physical address and bind
the 32-bit IP address to a 48-bit MAC address. A network station can use
ARP across a single network only, and the network hardware must support
physical broadcasts.
If a network station wants to send a packet to a host but knows only the
host’s IP address, the network station uses ARP to determine the host’s
physical address as follows:
1. The network station broadcasts a special packet, called an ARP request,
that asks the host at the specified IP address to respond with its physical
address.
2. All network hosts receive the broadcast message.
3. Only the specified host responds with its hardware address.
4. The network station then maps the host’s IP address to its physical
address and saves the results in an address resolution table for future
use.
5. The network station’s ARP table displays the association of the known
MAC addresses to IP addresses.
Note: The default timeout value for ARP entries is 6 hours.
Static ARP entries can be created and individual ARP entries deleted.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols
Proxy Address Resolution Protocol (Proxy ARP)
Proxy ARP allows a network station to respond to an ARP request from a
locally attached host or end station for a remote destination. It does so by
sending an ARP response back to the local host with its own MAC address
of the network station interface for the subnet on which the ARP request
was received. The reply is generated only if the switch has an active route
to the destination network.
The figure below is an example of proxy ARP operation. In this example,
host C with a 24-bit mask appears to be locally attached to host B with a
16-bit mask, so host B sends an ARP request for host C. However, the 5500
Series switch is between the two hosts. To enable communication between
the two hosts, the 5500 Series switch would respond to the ARP request
with host C’s IP address but with its own MAC address.
Proxy ARP Operation
Static routes
Once routable VLANs are created though IP address assignment, static
routes can be created. Static routes allow for the manual creation of specific
routes to a destination IP address. Static routes can also be used to specify
a route to all networks for which there are no explicit routes in the Forwarding
Information Base or the routing table. This static default route is a route to
the network address 0.0.0.0 as defined by the IEEE RFC 1812 standard.
Because of their static nature, this type of solution is not scalable. Thus,
in a large or growing network this type of route management may not be
desirable. Also, static routes do not have the capacity to determine the
failure of paths. Thus, a router can still attempt to use a path after it has
failed.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing 23
Non-local static routes
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series supports the usage of
non-local static routes. A non-local static route is almost identical to a
static route with the exception that the next hop of the route is not directly
connected to the network entity. Non-local static routes are useful in
situations where there are multiple paths to a network and the number
of static routes could be reduced by using only one route with a remote
gateway.
Because of their static nature, this type of solution is not scalable. Thus,
in a large or growing network this type of route management may not
be desirable. Also, non-local static routes do not have the capacity to
determine the failure of paths. Thus, a router can still attempt to use a path
after it has failed.
Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is a standard, dynamic routing protocol
based on the Bellman-Ford (or distance vector) algorithm. It is used as an
Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP). RIP allows routers to exchange information
to compute routes through an IPv4-based network. The hop count, or
distance, is used as a metric to determine the best path to a remote network
or host. The hop count cannot exceed 15 hops (assuming a cost of one
hop for each network).
RIP is defined in RFC 1058 for RIP version 1 and RFC 2453 for RIP version
2. The most significant difference between the two versions is that RIP
version 2 supports subnet masks and next hop information in the RIP
packet.
RIP operation
RIP uses User Datagram Protocol (UDP) data packets to exchange
routing information. Each router maintains a routing table, which lists the
optimal route to every destination in the system. Each router advertises
its routing information by sending a routing information update at regular
intervals. Neighboring routers use this information to recalculate their
routing tables and retransmit the routing information. For RIP version 1,
no mask information is exchanged; the natural mask is always applied by
the router receiving the update. For RIP version 2, mask information is
always included.
The sequence of processes governed by the routing algorithm is as follows:
1. When a router starts, it initializes the RIP data structures and then waits
for indications from lower-level protocols that its interfaces are functional.
2. RIP advertisements are send on all the interfaces that are configured to
send routing information.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols
3. The neighbors will send their routing tables and the new router will
update its routing table based on the advertisements received.
4. From now on periodic updates are send by each router in the network to
ensure a correct routing database.
If a router does not receive an update from another router within a timeout
period, it deletes the routes served by the nonupdating router from its
routing table. However, it keeps these routes temporarily in a garbage list
and continues to advertise them with a metric of 16 for a holddown period,
so that neighbors know that the routes are unreachable. If a valid update
for a garbage route is received within the holddown period, the router adds
the route back into its routing table. If no update is received, the router
completely deletes all garbage list entries for the nonupdating router.
To prevent routing loops and to promote fast convergence, RIP uses
the mechanisms of split horizon, with or without poisoned reverse, and
triggered updates. Simple split horizon means that IP routes learned from a
neighbor are not advertised back in updates to that neighbor. Split horizon
with poisoned reverse means that these routes are advertised back to the
neighbor, but they are “poisoned” with a metric of 16, which represents
infinite hops in the network. The receiver neighbor therefore ignores this
route. Triggered updates means that a router is required to send update
messages whenever it changes the metric for a route, even if it is not yet
time for a regular update message.
RIP sends routing information updates every 30 seconds. These updates
contain information about known networks and the distances (hop count)
associated with each. For RIP version 1, no mask information is exchanged;
the natural mask is always applied by the router receiving the update. Mask
information is always included for RIP version 2.
If information about a network is not received for within the allotted timeout
period (180 seconds by default), it is removed from the routing table and the
route is moved to the garbage list . From the garbage list it will be advertised
for the allotted holdown period (120 seconds by default) with metric set to
infinity (16). These timers can be changed by configuring the RIP Interface
Timeout Timer and Holddown Timer parameters.
RIP supports the following standard behavior:
•
•
•
•
•
•
periodic RIP updates about effective best routes
garbage collection
split horizon with or without poisoned reverse
triggered update for changed RIP routes
unicast to the specific query requestor
broadcast/multicast of regular and triggered updates
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing 25
•
•
•
•
•
subnet mask (RIP version 2)
routing table update based on the received RIP message
global update timer
holddown timer and timeout timer per device and per interface
cost per device and per interface
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series implementation of RIP
also supports the following features:
•
•
in and out routing policies
auto-aggregation (also known as auto-summarization) of groups of
adjacent routes into single entries
Many RIP features are configurable. The actual behavior of the protocol
depends on the feature configurations.
RIP metrics
RIP is known as a distance vector protocol. The vector is the network
number and next hop, and the distance is the cost associated with the
network number. RIP identifies network reachability based on cost, and
cost is defined as hop count. The distance from one router to the next is
considered to be one hop. This cost or hop count is known as the metric The
illustration below depicts the hop counts between various units in a network.
RIP hop counts
A directly connected network has a metric of zero. An unreachable network
has a metric of 16. Therefore, 15 hops or 15 routers is the highest possible
metric between any two networks.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols
RIP Send and Receive Modes
RIP can be configured to use a number of different send and receive modes
depending on the specifics of the network configuration. The following table
lists the send and receive modes supported.
RIP send and receive modes
Description
Result
Send Mode
•
Destination MAC is a broadcast,
ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff
rip1comp
This mode is used to
broadcast RIP version
2 updates using RFC
1058 route consumption
rules. This is the default
send mode for the Nortel
Ethernet Routing Switch
5500 Series.
•
Destination IP is a broadcast
for the network (for example,
192.1.2.255)
•
RIP Update is formed as a
RIP version 2 update, including
network mask
•
•
RIP version = 2
Destination MAC is a broadcast,
ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff
rip1
This mode is used to
broadcast RIP updates
that are compliant with
RFC 1058.
•
•
•
Destination IP is a broadcast
for the network (for example,
192.1.2.255)
RIP Update is formed as a RIP
version 1 update, no network
mask included
RIP version = 1
•
•
•
Destination MAC is a multicast,
01-00-5e-00-00-09
rip2
This mode is used to
broadcast multicast RIP
version 2 updates.
Destination IP is the RIP version
2 multicast address, 224.0.0.9
RIP Update is formed as a
RIP version 2 update including
network mask
•
RIP version = 2
nosend
No RIP updates are sent None
on the interface.
Receive
Mode
Result
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing 27
rip1OrRip2
rip1
RIP version 1 or RIP version 2 updates are accepted.
RIP version 1 and RIP version 1 compatible updates only are
accepted.
rip2
RIP version 2 updates only are accepted.
Limitations
RIP has the following limitations:
•
•
The protocol is limited to networks whose longest path is 15 hops.
The protocol depends on counting to infinity to resolve certain unusual
situations.
•
•
The protocol uses fixed metrics (the hop number) to compare alternative
routes, as opposed to real-time parameters such as measured delay,
reliability, or load.
RIP does not support address-less links.
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol
The Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Protocol is an Interior Gateway
Protocol (IGP) that distributes routing information between routers belonging
to a single autonomous system (AS). Intended for use in large networks,
OSPF is a link-state protocol which supports IP subnetting and the tagging
of externally-derived routing information.
Note: The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series implementation
of OSPF only supports broadcast and passive interfaces. Point-to-point
and NBMA interfaces are not supported.
Overview
In an OSPF network, each router maintains a link-state database that
describes the topology of the autonomous system (AS). The database
contains the local state for each router in the AS, including the router’s
usable interfaces and reachable neighbors.
Each router periodically checks for changes in its local state and shares any
changes detected by flooding link-state advertisements (LSAs) throughout
the AS. Routers synchronize their topological databases based on the
sharing of information from LSAs.
From the topological database, each router constructs a shortest-path tree,
with itself as the root. The shortest-path tree gives the optimal route to each
destination in the AS. Routing information from outside the AS appears on
the tree as leaves.
OSPF routes IP traffic based solely on the destination IP address and
subnet mask contained in the IP packet header.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols
Benefits
Benefits in large networks OSPF offers the following benefits:
•
Fast convergence
In the event of topological changes, OSPF recalculates routes quickly.
Minimal routing protocol traffic
•
•
Unlike distance vector routing protocols such as RIP, OSPF generates a
minimum of routing protocol traffic.
Load sharing
OSPF provides support for equal-cost multipath routing. If several
equal-cost routes to a destination exist, traffic is distributed equally
among them.
•
Because OSPF does not use hop count in its calculation, the routing
domain is scalable.
OSPF routing algorithm
A separate copy of the OSPF routing algorithm runs in each area. Routers
which are connected to multiple areas run multiple copies of the algorithm.
The sequence of processes governed by the routing algorithm is as follows:
1. When a router starts, it initializes the OSPF data structures and then
waits for indications from lower-level protocols that its interfaces are
functional.
2. A router then uses the Hello Protocol to discover neighbors. On
point-to-point and broadcast networks the router dynamically detects
its neighbors by sending hello packets to the multicast address
AllSPFRouters. On non-broadcast multiaccess networks, some
configuration information is required in order to discover neighbors.
3. On all multiaccess networks (broadcast or non-broadcast), the Hello
Protocol also elects a DR for the network.
4. The router attempts to form adjacencies with some of its neighbors.
On multiaccess networks, the DR determines which routers become
adjacent. This behavior does not occur if a router is configured as a
passive interface, because passive interfaces do not form adjacencies.
5. Adjacent neighbors synchronize their topological databases.
6. The router periodically advertises its link-state, and also does so when
its local state changes. LSAs include information about adjacencies
enabling quick detection of dead routers on the network.
7. LSAs are flooded throughout the area, ensuring that all routers in an
area have exactly the same topological database.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing 29
8. From this database each router calculates a shortest-path tree, with
itself as root. This shortest-path tree in turn yields a routing table for
the protocol.
OSPF router types
Routers in an OSPF network can take on different roles depending their
configuration. The following table describes the router types in an OSPF
network.
OSPF router types
Router Type
Description
Autonomous System A router attached at the edge of an OSPF network
Boundary Router
(ASBR)
is called an AS boundary router (ASBR). An ASBR
generally has one or more interfaces that run an
inter-domain routing protocol. In addition, any router
distributing static routes or RIP routes into OSPF is
considered an ASBR. The ASBR forwards external
routes into the OSPF domain. In this way, routers inside
the OSPF network learn about destinations outside their
domain.
Area Border Router
(ABR)
A router attached to two or more areas inside an OSPF
network is considered an area border router (ABR). ABRs
play an important role in OSPF networks by condensing
the amount of OSPF information that is disseminated.
Internal Router (IR)
A router that has interfaces only within a single area
inside an OSPF network is considered an internal router
(IR). Unlike ABRs, IRs have topological information only
about the area in which they are contained.
Designated Router
(DR)
In a broadcast network a single router is elected to
be the designated router (DR) for that network. A DR
assumes the responsibility of making sure all routers on
the network are synchronized with one another and also
advertises that network to the rest of the AS.
Backup Designated
Router (BDR)
A backup designated router (BDR) is elected in addition
to the designated router (DR) and, in the event of failure
of the DR, will assume its role quickly.
OSPF host route
An OSPF router with hosts directly attached to its interfaces can use host
routes to advertise the attached hosts to its neighbors. You can configure
up to 32 host routes.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols
Host routes are managed with Nortel Networks Command Line Interface
(NNCLI) commands and SNMP MIBs and are identified by the host IP
address and the configured route type of service (TOS). For each host
directly connected to the router, configure the cost of the link to the host
during host creation. You cannot modify this cost.
Note: Always set TOS to 0 because TOS-based routing is not
supported.
When a host is added to, or deleted from, a host route, the router updates
the router LSAs and floods them to neighbors in each area where that
router has an interface.
Following is an example of parameters for a host route advertised in the LSA.
Host route in LSA
•
•
•
•
Type: 3 (stub network)
LinkID: IP address of host directly connected to router
Link Data: 0xFFFFFFFF
Metric: configured cost of host
OSPF Enhancements
•
Host route - Allows a router to advertise to its neighbors all hosts that
are directly attached to that router’s interfaces. Up to 32 host routes
can be configured.
•
Virtual links - The OSPF network can be partitioned into multiple
areas. However, a backbone area must exist and be contiguous, and
every non-backbone area must be connected to the backbone area
using either a physical or a logical link. In a network where a physical
connection between the non-backbone area and backbone area is
impossible, use of a virtual link provides the logical connection through
another non-backbone area, called the transit area. Virtual links can be
created manually or automatically. The 5500 Series switch supports
up to 16 virtual links.
When 5500 Series switches are stacked, and a unit leaves the stack and
becomes standalone, the router ID is automatically changed to its default
value if IP blocking is turned off and OSPF is globally enabled. This
prevents duplication of a router ID in the OSPF routing domain. The new
router ID value is temporary, that is, it is not saved to NVRAM. Therefore,
upon reset, the old router ID is restored. Configurable using NNCLI, ACG,
and Device Manager.
Example configurations The following is an example for creating a host
route:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing 31
Creating Host Route
Example : 1
R3(config)#router ospf
R3(config-router)#host-route 11.11.11.111 metric 10
R3(config-router)#show ip ospf host-route
Host IP
11.11.11.111
Metric
10
R3(config-router)#
The following is an example for deleting a host route:
Deleting Host Route
Example : 1
R3(config-router)#no host-route 11.11.11.111
R3(config-router)#show ip ospf host-route
Host IP
Metric
R3(config-router)#
OSPF virtual link
On an OSPF network, a router acting as an area boundary router (ABR)
must be directly connected to the backbone. If no physical connection is
available, you can create a virtual link.
A virtual link is established between two endpoint ABRs and is a logical
connection to the backbone area through a non-backbone area called a
transit area. In the following diagram, non-backbone ABR 2 establishes a
virtual link with backbone ABR1 across transition area, area 1. The virtual
link connects area 2 to area 0.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols
Virtual link diagram
Note: Stub or NSSA areas cannot be transit areas.
A virtual link can be created manually or automatically.
Manual virtual link creation can conserve resources and provide specific
control of virtual link placement in the OSPF configuration.
To add a virtual link manually, configure both endpoint ABRs with a neighbor
router ID and transit area ID. You can configure up to 16 virtual links.
Note: You can modify parameters for manually added virtual links.
To accept automatic virtual link creation, enable automatic virtual link on
both endpoint ABRs (the default value is disabled). Automatic virtual links
are removed when the transit area is deleted, auto virtual link is disabled,
or the router is no longer an ABR.
Note: Auto-created virtual links use default settings that cannot be
modified.
Example Configuration
Consider the following situation:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing 33
In this case, R4 in Area2 cannot be physically connected to Area0 (for some
reason) and it will be connected to R3 which is NOT a backbone ABR (like
R1 is for instance). As Area2 is not directly connected to backbone Area0 or
directly connected to a backbone ABR router, clients from Area2 will not be
able to access anything outside Area2. Also, router R3 is an ABR router
connected to two non-backbone areas.
In order to solve these problems, virtual-link must be configured between
router R3 and R1 which are both ABRs. Virtual-link cannot be configured
on non-ABR routers.
Consider the following Router IDs:
•
•
•
R1 : 1.0.0.0
R3 : 3.0.1.0
R4 : 4.0.2.0
Virtual-link can be configured in two ways on ABR routers :
•
•
Configuring virtual link manually
Configuring virtual link automatically
The following is an example for creating an auto virtual link:
Creating auto virtual link
R1 (config-router)#auto-vlink
Example : 1
R1(config)#show ip ospf
Router ID: 1.0.0.0
Admin Status: Enabled
Version Number:
2
Area Border Router Oper Status: True
AS Boundary Router Config Status: False
External Link-State Advertisements:
External Link-State Checksum: 0(0x0)
0
Type-of-Service (TOS) Routing Supported: False
Originated Link-State Advertisements: 67
New Link-State Advertisements Received: 722
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols
OSPF Traps: Disabled
Auto Virtual Link Creation: Enabled
SPF Hold-Down Time: 10
RFC 1583 Compatibility: Enabled
R3 (config-router)#auto-vlink
Example : 2
R3(config)#show ip ospf
Router ID: 3.0.1.0
Admin Status: Enabled
Version Number:
2
Area Border Router Oper Status: True
AS Boundary Router Config Status: False
External Link-State Advertisements:
External Link-State Checksum: 0(0x0)
0
Type-of-Service (TOS) Routing Supported: False
Originated Link-State Advertisements: 67
New Link-State Advertisements Received: 722
OSPF Traps: Disabled
Auto Virtual Link Creation: Enabled
SPF Hold-Down Time: 10
RFC 1583 Compatibility: Enabled
The following is an example for deleting an auto virtual link:
Deleting auto virtual link
R1 (config-router)#no auto-vlink
Example : 1
R1(config)#show ip ospf
Router ID: 1.0.0.0
Admin Status: Enabled
Version Number:
2
Area Border Router Oper Status: True
AS Boundary Router Config Status: False
External Link-State Advertisements:
External Link-State Checksum: 0(0x0)
0
Type-of-Service (TOS) Routing Supported: False
Originated Link-State Advertisements: 67
New Link-State Advertisements Received: 722
OSPF Traps: Disabled
Auto Virtual Link Creation: Disabled
SPF Hold-Down Time: 10
RFC 1583 Compatibility: Enabled
R3 (config-router)#no auto-vlink
Example : 2
R3(config)#show ip ospf
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing 35
Router ID: 3.0.1.0
Admin Status: Enabled
Version Number:
2
Area Border Router Oper Status: True
AS Boundary Router Config Status: False
External Link-State Advertisements:
External Link-State Checksum: 0(0x0)
0
Type-of-Service (TOS) Routing Supported: False
Originated Link-State Advertisements: 67
New Link-State Advertisements Received: 722
OSPF Traps: Disabled
Auto Virtual Link Creation: Disabled
SPF Hold-Down Time: 10
RFC 1583 Compatibility: Enabled
Virtual-Link can also be configured using the Java Device Manager (JDM).
Just go under IP Routing > OSPF menu. There you can find : ‘General’ tab
for Auto-Vlink creation, ‘Virtual If’ tab, and ‘Virtual Neighbors’ tab.
Route policies
Route policies are a Nortel proprietary improvement on existing routing
schemes. Using existing routing schemes, packets are forwarded based
on routes that have been learned by the router through routing protocols
such as RIP and OSPF or through the introduction of static routes. Route
policies introduce the ability to forward packets based on rule sets created
by the network administrator. These rule sets, or policies, are then applied
to the learned or static routes.
Route policies on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series supports
the Routing Information Protocol (RIP) and Open Shortest Path First
(OSPF) protocol. When used in conjunction with these protocols, route
policies can be used to perform the following tasks that are not possible
using traditional routing methods:
•
•
•
Listen for routing updates from specific gateways.
Listen for routing updates from specific networks.
Assign a specific subnet mask to be included with a network in the
routing table.
•
•
•
Advertise routing updates from specific gateways.
Advertise routing updates to specific networks.
Assign a specific subnet mask to be included in the route summary
packets.
•
Advertise routes learned by one protocol to another.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols
Route policies supports the following types of policies:
Accept (In) Policies
•
Accept polices are applied to incoming routing updates before they are
applied to the routing table. In the case of RIP, accept policies can be
applied to all incoming packets and only one policy can be created
for each RIP interface. In the case of OSPF, accept policies are only
applied to Type 5 External routes based on the advertising router ID.
There can only be one OSPF accept policy per switch and the policy
is applied before updates are added to the routing table from the link
state database.
•
•
Announce (Out) Policies
Announce policies are applied to outgoing routing updates before
the routing update packets are actually transmitted from the switch.
In the case of RIP, announce policies can be applied to all outgoing
packets and only one policy can be created for each RIP interface.
Announce policies are not supported for OSPF as OSPF requires
routing information to be consistent throughout the OSPF domain.
Redistribution Policies
Redistribution policies are used to provide notification of addition or
deletion of a route in the routing table by one protocol to another
protocol. OSPF redistribution policies send redistributed routes as Type
5 External routes. There can be only one OSPF redistribution route per
switch and it must be configured as a ASBR with redistribution enabled.
Route policies consist of the following items:
•
Prefix Lists
— List of IP addresses with subnet masks.
— Identified by a prefix list name and unique identifier.
— Prefix lists support the comparison of ranges of incoming masks.
•
Route Maps
— Contain a set of match and set parameters.
— Match and set parameters can contain several prefix lists.
— A set of match and set parameters are identified by a sequence
number.
— Accept and deny actions are associated with each sequenced
parameter set.
— Sequence numbers act as a preference setting. Sets with a lower
sequence number are preferred over those with a higher sequence
number.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing 37
To configure routing policies, create the appropriate prefix lists and then
assign those prefix lists to route maps. Once all route maps have been
created, assign them to the appropriate type of policy.
In a stacked environment, the following rules are applied to routing policies:
•
•
The policy database is stored in all stack units.
Policy configuration is supported from only the base unit. The base
unit sends updates to non-base units to update the policy database in
each stack unit.
•
•
During database updates, only the database in the base unit is
synchronized with the non-base unit. The database in the non-base
units are deleted during the exchange.
Only the policies stored in the base unit are used by RIP and OSPF
for policy application.
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)
The Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) is designed to eliminate
the single point of failure that can occur when the single static default
gateway router for an end station is lost. VRRP introduces the concept of
a virtual IP address (transparent to users) shared between two or more
routers connecting a common subnet to the enterprise network. With the
virtual IP address as the default gateway on end hosts, VRRP provides
dynamic default gateway redundancy in the event of failure.
VRRP uses the following terms:
•
•
VRRP router - a router running the VRRP protocol.
Virtual router - the abstract object managed by VRRP that is assigned
the virtual IP address and that acts as the default router for a set of IP
addresses across a common network. Each virtual router is assigned a
virtual router ID.
•
•
•
Virtual router master - the VRRP router that assumes responsibility
for forwarding packets sent to the IP address associated with the virtual
router. The master router also responds to packets sent to the virtual
router IP address and answers ARP requests for this IP address.
Virtual router backup - the router or routers that can serve as the
failover router if the master router becomes unavailable. If the master
router fails, an election process provides a dynamic transition of
forwarding responsibility to a new master router.
Priority - an 8-bit value assigned to all VRRP routers. A higher value
represents a higher priority for election to the master router. The priority
can be a value from 1 to 255. When a master router fails, an election
process takes place among the backup routers to dynamically reassign
the role of the master router.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols
Equal Cost MultiPath (ECMP)
The Equal Cost MultiPath (ECMP) feature allows routers to determine equal
cost paths to the same destination prefix. The multiple paths can be used
for load sharing of traffic and allows faster convergence to other active paths
in case of network failure. By maximizing load sharing among equal-cost
paths, links between routers can be used more efficiently when sending
IP traffic. The ECMP feature supports and complements the following
protocols types:
•
•
•
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)
Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
Static Routes
ECMP is only supported on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5520 and
5530. ECMP will work in a mixed stack but will not run on any Nortel
Ethernet Routing Switch 5510 units in the stack.
UDP broadcast forwarding
Some network applications, such as the NetBIOS name service, rely
on User Datagram Protocol (UDP) broadcasts to request a service or
locate a application. If a host is on a network, subnet segment, or VLAN
that includes a server for the service, UDP broadcasts are by default not
forwarded to the server located on a different network segment or VLAN.
This is resolved by forwarding the broadcasts to the server through physical
or virtual interfaces.
UDP broadcast forwarding is a general mechanism for selectively forwarding
limited UDP broadcasts received on an IP interface to a configured IP
address. The packet is sent as a unicast packet to the server.
The following are the basic steps for UDP broadcast forwarding
configuration:
1. Enter the UDP protocols to be forwarded.
2. Create forwarding policies by defining UDP protocol and server pairs.
3. Assemble these policies into lists.
4. Apply these lists to the appropriate interfaces.
When a UDP broadcast is received on a router interface, it must meet the
following criteria if it is to be considered for forwarding:
•
•
•
•
It must be a MAC-level broadcast.
It must be an IP-limited broadcast.
It must be for a configured UDP protocol.
It must have a TTL value of at least 2.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing 39
For each ingress interface and protocol, the UDP broadcast packets are
forwarded only to a unicast host address (the unicast IP address of the
server for example).
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) / Bootstrap Protocol
(BootP)
DHCP-BootP relay
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is an extension of the
Bootstrap protocol (BootP) and provides host configuration information to
workstations on a dynamic basis. To lower administrative overhead, network
managers prefer to configure a small number of DHCP servers in a central
location. It is necessary for routers to support the BootP/DHCP relay
function so that hosts can access configuration information from servers
several router hops away.
Differences between DHCP and BootP
The following differences between DHCP and BootP are specified in RFC
2131 and include functions that BootP does not address:
•
•
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series supports the Bootstrap
protocol (BootP). BootP enables the retrieval of an ASCII configuration
file name and configuration server address.
A properly configured BootP server enables the switch to automatically
learn its assigned IP address, subnet mask and the IP address of the
default router (default gateway).
•
•
DHCP defines mechanisms through which clients can be assigned a
network address for a finite lease (allowing for reuse of IP addresses).
DHCP provides the mechanism for clients to acquire all of the IP
configuration parameters needed to operate.
DHCP uses the BootP message format defined in RFC 951. The remainder
of the options field consists of a list of tagged parameters that are called
"options" (RFC 2131).
Summary of DHCP relay operation
BootP/DHCP clients (workstations) generally use UDP/IP broadcasts to
determine their IP addresses and configuration information. If such a host
is on a network or a subnet segment (or VLAN) that does not include a
DHCP server, the UDP broadcasts are by default not forwarded to the
server located on a different network segment or VLAN. The Nortel Ethernet
Routing Switch 5500 Series can be configured to resolve this issue by
forwarding the broadcasts to the server. The router interfaces can be
configured to forward DHCP broadcasts to other locally connected network
segments or directly to the server’s IP address. DHCP must be enabled
on a per-VLAN basis.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols
"DHCP operation" (page 40)Figure DHCP operation shows an end station
connected to subnet 1, corresponding to VLAN 1. The Nortel Ethernet
Routing Switch 5500 Series connects two subnets by means of the virtual
routing function. When the end station generates a DHCP request as a
limited UDP broadcast to the IP address of all 1s (that is, 255.255.255.255)
with the DHCP relay function configured, the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch
5500 Series forwards DHCP requests to subnet 2 or to the host address of
the DHCP server, depending on the configuration.
DHCP operation
Forwarding DHCP packets
address is 10.10.1.254. To configure the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch
5500 Series to forward DHCP packets from the end station to the server,
use 10.10.2.1 as the server address.
Forwarding DHCP packets
All BootP broadcast packets, including DHCP packets that appear on the
VLAN 1 router interface (10.10.1.254), will be forwarded to the DHCP
server. In this case, the DHCP packets are forwarded as unicast to the
DHCP server’s IP address.
Multiple BootP-DHCP servers
Most enterprise networks use multiple BootP/DHCP servers for fault
tolerance. The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series allows switch
configuration to forward BootP/DHCP requests to multiple servers. Up to 10
servers can be configured to receive copies of the forwarded BootP/DHCP
messages.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing 41
If a DHCP client is connected to a routable interface, to configure DHCP
requests to be sent to up to 512 different routable interfaces or 512 different
server IP addresses, enable DHCP on the client (agent address) and then
enable DHCP from the client to each of the interfaces or IP addresses
(server addresses).
DHCP servers are located on two different subnets. To configure the
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series to forward the copies of the
BootP/DHCP packets from the end station to both servers, specify the switch
(10.10.1.254) as the agent address. Then enable DHCP to each of the
DHCP servers by entering 10.10.2.1 and 10.10.3.1 as the server addresses.
Multiple BootP/DHCP servers
Setting DHCP
To set DHCP, take the following steps:
Step Action
1
2
Enable IP routing on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
and on the target VLAN interface.
Enable DHCP globally.
Note: DHCP is enabled by default.
3
Set the DHCP forwarding paths, using the VLAN IP as the starting
point, or agent IP.
4
5
6
Set the mode for each DHCP forwarding path.
Enable DHCP for the specific VLAN.
Enable the DHCP broadcast message for the specific VLAN.
—End—
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols
Any of the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series switch management
systems can be used to set DHCP.
DHCP relay
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is a mechanism to assign
network IP addresses to clients who request an address. It is built on top
of the existing BOOTP protocol and can be specified for DHCP, BOOTP,
or both.
The DHCP relay feature relays client requests to DHCP servers on different
L3 VLANs. It also relays server replies back to the clients.
DHCP relay can be configured through Command Line Interface or Java
Device Manager. DHCP can only be configured on the base unit from
CLI, like all L3 commands. There are three parts in the DHCP relay
configurations. They are:
•
•
•
global DHCP enable/disable
interface configurations
forward path configurations
To relay DHCP messages, two VLANs must be created and IP addresses
assigned to them. The client and server must reside on different L3 VLANS
to use DHCP relay. IP routing and global DHCP relay must be enabled
on both the client as well as server.
Note: The DHCP Relay feature shares resources with QoS. If the
DHCP Relay feature is enabled, a QoS policy with a precedence of 11
cannot be installed.
For further information on QoS policies refer to Nortel Ethernet Routing
Switch 5500 Series Configuration - Quality of Service (Part Number
NN47200-504).
Global DHCP relay configuration This configuration enables or disables
DHCP relay for the entire unit or stack. Once DHCP relay is disabled, the
switch/stack will not relay DHCP/BOOTP " Global DHCP relay commands"
(page 42)across L3 VLANs. However, the settings will still be configurable.
describes the global DHCP relay commands.
Global DHCP relay commands
Command
Description
show ip dhcp-relay
no ip dhcp-relay
ip dhcp-relay
shows global DHCP relay state
disables DHCP relay globally
enables DHCP relay globally
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing 43
These commands must be executed in the Global Configuration command
mode.
Interface DHCP relay configurations These configurations are
associated with the L3 VLAN that the client or server resides on. IP routing
must be enabled and a valid IP address must be assigned to the L3 VLAN
before it generates the default settings for DHCP relay.
"Interface DHCP relay commands" (page 43)describes the interface DHCP
relay commands. To change the interface DHCP relay configurations, switch
to the Interface Configuration command mode.
Interface DHCP relay commands
Command
Description
show vlan dhcp-relay
ip dhcp-relay min-sec 30
ip dhcp-relay mode dhcp
no ip dhcp-relay
shows vlan dhcp relay state
sets min-sec to 30
sets mode to dhcp
disables ip dhcp-relay
enables broadcast for this interface
ip dhcp-relay broadcast
DHCP Relay forward path configurations These configurations are
made per interface IP address and server IP address. " DHCP relay forward
path commands" (page 43)DHCP relay forward path commands table
describes the ip dhcp relay fwd-path commands.
DHCP relay forward path commands
Command
Description
show ip dhcp-relay fwd-path
Shows ip dhcp-relay fwd-path.
ip dhcp-relay fwd-path
<agent IP> <server IP>
mode bootp-dhcp
Creates interface IP and server IP path with
modes DHCP & BootP.
ip dhcp-relay fwd-path
<agent IP> <server IP>
disable
Disables the interface/server pair, enable =
false.
no dhcp-relay fwd-path
<agent IP> <server IP>
Deletes the interface/server pair.
no ip dhcp-relay
Disables ip dhcp-relay.
ip dhcp-relay broadcast
Enables broadcast for this interface.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols
DHCP relay uses a hardware resource that is shared by switch Quality of
Service applications. When DHCP relay is enabled globally, the Quality
of Service filter manager will not be able to use precedence 11 for
configurations. For the filter manager to be able to use this resource, DHCP
relay must be disabled for the entire unit or stack.
Avoiding duplicate IP addresses
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series has built-in safeguards to
avoid issuing duplicate IP addresses, because the switch functions as a
stack as well as a stand-alone system. These safeguards apply to stack
configuration changes (for example, when a stack is forming or after a unit
is removed from a stack).
The system allows the use of an existing IP address under the following
conditions:
•
When a unit leaves a stack:
— If the unit was the acting Base Unit (BU) of the stack and the stack
consisted of only two units.
— If the IP blocking mode in the stack was set to none.
•
When a unit boots up:
— If the unit was never in a stack.
— If IP blocking was manually turned off prior to the current boot.
— If the unit was the designated Base Unit (BU); that is, selected by
hardware switch on the unit, either on the back or on the UI button
on the front; and the stack consisted of only two units.
— If the IP blocking mode was set to none.
If the desired switch IP address is blocked by the system, then the address
must be configured manually in the command line interface.
Automatic router ID change
If a unit leaves the stack and becomes standalone (when the stack disjoins),
the router ID is automatically changed to its default value. This prevents
router ID duplication in the OSPF routing domain.
Prerequisites: IP blocking must be turned off (set to none) and OSPF
must be globally enabled.
TIP: The change in router ID is temporary (not saved in non-volatile random
access memory) and, upon reset, the router ID is restored.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing 45
IP blocking
IP Blocking is a Layer 3 feature of the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch
5500 Series that provides built-in safeguards for the usage of duplicate IP
addresses in a stacked environment. IP Blocking is used whenever a unit
leaves a stack or is rebooting inside the context of a stack. Depending on
the setting in use, Layer 3 functionality is either continued or blocked by
this feature.
IP Blocking can exist in either a none or full condition. When IP Blocking
is set to none, duplicate IP addresses are permitted in the stack
unconditionally. When the full condition is set, duplicate IP addresses are
blocked in the stack unconditionally.
In a stack environment, Nortel recommends that IP blocking mode none be
used in a stack of 2 units. In such a stack environment and IP blocking
mode combination, the following functional characteristics can be expected:
•
•
If the stack base unit becomes non-operational the following will occur:
— Layer 3 functionality will continue to run on the non-base unit.
— Dynamic routing protocols still run on the non-base unit.
If the stack non-base unit becomes non-operational the following will
occur:
— Layer 3 functionality will continue to run on the base unit.
— Dynamic routing protocols run on the base unit.
A disadvantage of this configuration is that if the non-operational unit does
not rejoin the stack, address duplication will occur.
In stack environments of more than 2 units, Nortel recommends using IP
blocking mode full. In such a stack environment and IP blocking mode
combination, the following functional characteristics can be expected:
•
If the stack base unit becomes non-operational the following will occur:
— The temporary base unit takes over base unit duties.
— The temporary base unit runs the Layer 3 and DRP functionality.
— The takeover of the temporary base unit will cause the MAC
addresses of the Layer 3 interfaces to change and the MAC
addresses from the temporary base unit MAC address pool are
used. This may cause a minor disruption in routing traffic. To
facilitate quick failover in this instance, gratuitous ARP messages are
sent out for each interface for 5 minutes at 15 second intervals.
•
If a stack non-base unit becomes non-operational the following will
occur:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols
— The stack will continue to run normally with the base unit controlling
Layer 3 and DRP functionality.
— If the non-operational non-base unit does not rejoin the stack, no
Layer 3 or DRP functionality will run on it.
IGMP snooping
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series can sense Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) host membership reports from attached
stations and use this information to set up a dedicated path between the
requesting station and a local IP Multicast router. After the pathway is
established, the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series switch blocks
the IP Multicast stream from exiting any other port that does not connect to
another host member, thus conserving bandwidth. The following section
describes how Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series switches provide
the same benefit as IP Multicast routers, but in the local area.
IGMP is used by IP Multicast routers to learn about the existence of host
group members on their directly attached subnets (see RFC 2236). The IP
Multicast routers get this information by broadcasting IGMP queries and
listening for IP hosts reporting their host group memberships. This process
is used to set up a client/server relationship between an IP Multicast source
that provides the data streams and the clients that want to receive the data.
By default, unknown multicast traffic is flooded to all ports in a VLAN. In
situations in which there is a multicast transmitter that is not doing IGMP
and there are no multicast receivers, the traffic transmitted by the transmitter
is flooded.
The CLI commands for IGMP allow the sending of all unknown multicast
traffic to IGMP static router ports only. This traffic will not be forwarded to
dynamically discovered m-router ports. If it is desirable to forward unknown
unicast traffic to certain ports only, those ports can be set as static m-router
ports.
•
When disabled, the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series switch
treats unknown multicast traffic as it does broadcast traffic (flood). This
is the default behavior.
•
User settings for the Unknown Multicast No Flood feature is stored in
NVRAM. In a stack, if settings on different units differ, the Base Unit
setting will take precedence. This feature can be enabled or disabled
at any time.
•
Nortel Networks recommends this feature be enabled when IGMP
snooping is enabled.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IGMP snooping 47
"IP multicast propagation with IGMP routing" (page 47)shows how IGMP
is used to set up the path between the client and server. As shown in this
example, the IGMP host provides an IP Multicast stream to designated
routers that forward the IP Multicast stream on their local network only
if there is a recipient.
The client/server path is set up as follows:
1. The designated router sends out a host membership query to the subnet
and receives host membership reports from end stations on the subnet.
2. The designated routers then set up a path between the IP Multicast
stream source and the end stations.
3. Periodically, the router continues to query end stations about whether
to continue participation.
4. As long as any client continues to participate, all clients, including
non-participating end stations on that subnet, receive the IP Multicast
stream.
Note: Although the non-participating end stations can filter the IP
Multicast traffic, the IP Multicast traffic still exists on the subnet and
consumes bandwidth.
IP Multicast can be optimized in a LAN by using IP Multicast filtering
switches, such as the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series.
non-IP Multicast filtering switch causes IP Multicast traffic to be sent to
all segments on the local subnet.
IP multicast propagation with IGMP routing
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series can automatically set up IP
Multicast filters so the IP Multicast traffic is only directed to the participating
end nodes (see ).
The router periodically sends Host Membership Queries to the LAN and
listens for a response from end stations. All of the clients connected to
switches S1 to S4 are aware of the queries from the router.
One client, connected to S2, responds with a host membership report.
Switch S2 intercepts the report from that port, and generates a proxy report
to its upstream neighbor, S1. Also, two clients connected to S4 respond
with host membership reports, causing S4 to intercept the reports and to
generate a consolidated proxy report to its upstream neighbor, S1.
5500 Series switch filtering IP multicast streams (1 of 2)
Switch S1 treats the consolidated proxy reports from S2 and S4 as if
they were reports from any client connected to its ports, and generates a
consolidated proxy report to the designated router. In this way, the router
receives a single consolidated report from that entire subnet.
After the switches learn which ports are requesting access to the IP
Multicast stream, all other ports not responding to the queries are blocked
from receiving the IP Multicast ("5500 Series switch filtering IP multicast
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IGMP snooping 49
5500 Series switch filtering IP multicast streams (2 of 2)
The consolidated proxy report generated by the switch remains transparent
to Layer 3 of the International Standardization Organization, Open Systems
Interconnection (ISO/OSI) model. (The switch IP address and MAC address
are not part of proxy report generation.) The last reporting IGMP group
member in each VLAN represents all of the hosts in that VLAN and IGMP
group.
IGMP snooping configuration rules
The IGMP snooping feature operates according to specific configuration
rules. When configuring the switch for IGMP snooping, consider the
following rules that determine how the configuration reacts in any network
topology:
•
•
•
There is a maximum of 240 groups on the Nortel Ethernet Routing
Switch 5500 Series.
A port that is configured for port mirroring cannot be configured as
a static router port.
If a MultiLink Trunk member is configured as a static router port, all of
the MultiLink trunk members are configured as static router ports. Also,
if a static router port is removed, and it is a MultiLink Trunk member, all
MultiLink trunk members are removed as static router port members,
automatically.
•
•
•
Static router ports must be port members of at least one VLAN.
The IGMP snooping feature is not STP dependent.
The IGMP snooping feature is not Rate Limiting dependent.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols
•
•
The snooping field must be enabled for the proxy field to have any
valid meaning.
Static router ports are configured per VLAN and per IGMP Version.
Note: Because IGMP snooping is set up per VLAN, all IGMP changes
are implemented according to the VLAN configuration for the specified
ports.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
51
IP Routing Configuration and
Management
This chapter describes the configuration and management of IP routing in
the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series. IP Routing configuration
is accomplished through the Command Line Interface (CLI), Web-based
Management Interface, or the Java Device Manager (JDM).
This chapter contains the following topics:
•
•
•
IP routing initial configuration
This section provides step by step instructions for the initial configuration of
the IP routing protocols supported by the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch
5500 Series. For conceptual information about IP routing topics covered
This section contains the following topics:
•
•
This chapter also contains in-depth configuration examples that can aid in
the advanced configuration of the switch. Refer to "IP routing configuration
examples" (page 120)for these advanced examples.
Global IP routing configuration
Before IP routing configuration can take place, IP routing must be globally
enabled on the switch. Use the set of commands outlined below to enter the
Global Configuration mode of the switch and enable IP routing.
5530-24TFD# enable
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# ip routing
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) initial configuration
This section contains the steps necessary for the initial configuration of
OSPF on the switch. More advanced configuration examples can be found
Basic OSPF configuration
A basic OSPF configuration will learn OSPF routes from other OSPF
devices and propagate routes to other OSPF devices. The following
procedure outlines the creation of a basic OSPF configuration:
Step Action
1
Log into User EXEC mode.
5530-24TFD> enable
2
Log into Global Configuration mode.
5530-24TFD# config terminal
The switch will respond with the following line:
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with
CNTL/Z.
3
4
5
Enable IP routing globally.
5530-24TFD(config)# ip routing
Enable OSPF globally.
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf en
Log into the OSPF router configuration mode. It is not necessary to
make any changes at this time but entering the router configuration
mode is a good way to verify that the mode has been activated.
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf
Note: The remainder of this procedure refers to VLAN 35.
Although VLAN 35 is used for this example, any port type VLAN
could be used.
6
Create a port type VLAN as VLAN number 35 in spanning tree
protocol group 1.
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan create 35 type port 1
7
8
Log into the Interface Configuration mode for VLAN 35.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 35
Enable IP routing on VLAN 35.
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip routing
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing initial configuration 53
9
Assign an IP address to VLAN 35.
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip address 1.1.2.25
255.255.255.0
10
11
12
Enable OSPF in VLAN 35.
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip ospf en
Return to Global Configuration mode.
5530-24TFD(config-if)# exit
By default all ports belong to a newly created VLAN. This command
removes all of the ports from VLAN 35 .
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan members remove 35 all
13
Add ports 1 through 10 to VLAN 35.
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan members add 35 1-10
—End—
Basic ASBR configuration
The Autonomous System Boundary Router (ASBR) is used in OSPF to
import routes that come from non-OSPF sources such as:
•
•
•
•
Local interfaces that are not part of OSPF.
RIP interfaces.
RIP learned routes.
Static routes.
This quick reference will help in the configuration of OSPF to import these
types of routes. This will allow the rest of the OSPF network to learn them as
OSPF routes. To create a basic ASBR configuration, follow this procedure:
Step Action
1
Log into User EXEC mode.
5530-24TFD> enable
2
Log into Global Configuration mode.
5530-24TFD# config terminal
The switch will respond with the following line:
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with
CNTL/Z.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54 IP Routing Configuration and Management
3
4
5
Log into the OSPF router configuration mode.
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf
Enable ASBR functionality.
5530-24TFD(config-router)# as-boundary-router en
Use the following commands to select the type of routes that OSPF
will distribute to other OSPF devices. RIP, direct, and static routes
are supported.
5530-24TFD(config-router)# redistribute rip en
5530-24TFD(config-router)# redistribute direct en
5530-24TFD(config-router)# redistribute static en
6
7
Return to Global Configuration mode.
5530-24TFD(config-router)# exit
Once the commands in step 5 have be used to select the types of
routes to redistribute, apply the changes globally with the following
commands.
5530-24TFD(config)#ip ospf apply redistribute rip
5530-24TFD(config)#ip ospf apply redistribute direct
5530-24TFD(config)#ip ospf apply redistribute static
—End—
Configuring ECMP for OSPF
Usage of ECMP with OSPF is supported on the 5520 and 5530 models
only. To configure ECMP with OSPF, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Log into User EXEC mode.
5530-24TFD> enable
2
Log into Global Configuration mode.
5530-24TFD# config terminal
The switch will respond with the following line:
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with
CNTL/Z.
3
Set the number of ECMP paths to use with OSPF. Up to four paths
can be used.
5530-24TFD(config)# ospf maximum-path 2
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 55
This command tells the router to use up to two paths to get to any
OSPF network destination.
4
The configuration can be verified using the following command.
5530-24TFD(config)# show ecmp
—End—
IP routing configuration using the CLI
This section describes the various Command Line Interface commands
available for the configuration and management of IP routing. Depending
on the type of command and the context in which it is being used, these
commands are executed in the various CLI command modes.
IP configuration commands
This section describes the commands for the global IP configuration at
the switch level.
ip routing command
The ip routing command enables global routing at the switch level.
The syntax for the ip routing command is:
ip routing
The ip routing command is executed in the Global Configuration
command mode.
no ip routing command
The no ip routing command disables IP routing.
The syntax for the no ip routing command is:
no ip routing
The no ip routing command is executed in the Global Configuration
command mode.
ip blocking-mode command
Use this command to set the level of IP blocking to perform in the stack. The
syntax for this command is:
ip blocking-mode {full | none}
The following table outlines the parameters for this command.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56 IP Routing Configuration and Management
ip blocking-mode parameters
Parameter
Description
full
Select this parameter to set IP blocking to full. This
never allows a duplicate IP address in a stack.
none
Select this parameter to set IP blocking to none.
This allows duplicate IP addresses unconditionally.
This command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode.
Layer 3 routable VLANs
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series are Layer 3 (L3) switches.
This means that a regular L2 VLAN becomes a routable L3 VLAN if an
IP address and MAC address are attached to the VLAN. When routing is
enabled in L3 mode, every L3 VLAN is capable of routing as well as carrying
the management traffic. The user can use any L3 VLAN instead of the
Management VLAN to manage the switch.
This section covers the commands that are used to set up and configure
routable VLANs.
interface vlan command
The interface vlan command only takes to the interface config mode.
The ip routing command in the interface-config mode enables routing
on a specific vlan.
The syntax for the interface VLAN command is:
interface vlan <1 - 4094>
The interface VLAN command is executed in the Global Configuration
command mode.
ip address command
The ip address command enables routing on a VLAN.
The syntax for the ip address command is:
ip address <A.B.C.D> <W.X.Y.Z> [<1 - 256>] [secondary]
The ip address command is executed in the Interface Configuration
command mode.
The following table describes the parameters for this command.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 57
ip address parameters
Parameter
Description
<A.B.C.D>
The IP address to attach to the VLAN.
The subnet mask to attach to the VLAN
<W.X.Y.Z>
<1 - 256>
The MAC offset value. Specify the value 1 for the
Management VLAN only.
secondary
Use this option to set up a secondary IP interface
on a VLAN. You can have a maximum of eight
secondary IP interfaces for every primary and
the primary must be set up before any secondary
interfaces are configured.
no ip address command
The no ip address command disables routing on a VLAN.
The syntax for the no ip address command is:
no ip address <A.B.C.D> <W.X.Y.Z >
The following table describes the parameters for this command.
no ip address parameters
Parameter
<A.B.C.D>
<W.X.Y.Z >
Description
The IP address to disable routing on.
The subnet mask to disable routing on.
The no ip address command is executed in the Interface Configuration
command mode.
Multinetting
To add a secondary IP interface to a VLAN, known as Multinetting, use the
following procedure:
Adding secondary IP interfaces
Step Action
1
Put the switch into interface mode for the specific VLAN.
interface vlan <vlan #>
2
Create a primary interface before adding secondary interfaces (if a
primary interface has not yet been created).
ip address <ip address> <mask> [<mac offset>]
3
Define a secondary IP interface on the VLAN.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58 IP Routing Configuration and Management
ip address <ip address> <mask> [<mac offset>] secondary
—End—
Example Adding secondary IP interfaces to a VLAN
Primary and secondary interfaces must reside on different subnets. In
the following example, 4.1.0.10 is the primary IP and 4.1.1.10 is the
secondary IP.
interface vlan 4
ip address 4.1.0.10 255.255.255.0 6
ip address 4.1.0.10 255.255.255.0 6
Removing primary IP interfaces from a VLAN when secondary
interfaces are configured
Step Action
1
2
3
Put the switch into interface mode for the VLAN.
interface vlan <vlan #>
Remove the secondary IP interface from the VLAN.
no ip address <ip address secondary> <mask>
Remove the primary IP interface from the VLAN.
no ip address <ip address primary> <mask> [<mac
offset>]
—End—
Example removing primary IP interface from a VLAN when secondary
interfaces are configured
In the following example, 4.1.0.10 is the primary IP and 4.1.1.10 is the
secondary IP.
interface vlan 4
no ip address 4.1.0.10 255.255.255.0
no ip address 4.1.1.10 255.255.255.0
Example removing secondary IP interface only from a VLAN
interface vlan 4
no ip address 4.1.0.10 255.255.255.0
show vlan ip command
The show vlan ip command shows routable VLAN configurations.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 59
The syntax for the show vlan ip command is:
show vlan ip [vid <1 - 4094>]
Substitute <1 - 4094> above with the VLAN ID of the VLAN to be
displayed.
Static route commands
This section discusses the commands used to display and configure static
routes on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series.
show ip route static command
The show ip route static command displays all static routes, whether
these routes are active or inactive.
The syntax for the show ip route static command is:
show ip route static [<A.B.C.D>] [-s <O.P.Q.R> <W.X.Y.Z>]
The following table outlines the parameters for this command.
ip route static parameters
Parameters
Description
< A.B.C.D>
Enter IP address to display the static route for the
specific IP address.
-s <O.P.Q.R>
< W.X.Y.Z>
Enter IP address for the subnet to display.
Enter subnet mask address for the subnet to display.
The show ip route static command is executed in the User EXEC
command mode.
show ip route command
The show ip route command displays all active routes in the routing
table.
Route entries appear in ascending order of the destination IP addresses.
The syntax for the show ip route command is:
show ip route [<A.B.C.D.|W.X.Y.Z.> <summary>]
show ip route command output
Ip Route
DST
MASK
0.0.0.0
NEXT
COST
VLAN
PORT
1/21
----
PROT
TYPE
IB
PRF
5
0
0.0.0.0
2.2.2.0
10.3.2.137
1
1
1
2
S
C
255.255.255.0 2.2.2.2
DB
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60 IP Routing Configuration and Management
----
10.3.2.0 255.255.255.0 10.3.2.199
Total Routes: 3
1
1
0
C
DB
TYPE Legend: I=Indirect Route, D=Direct Route, A=Alternative Route, B=Best Route, E=Ecmp
Route, U=Unresolved Route, N=Not in HW
The following table outlines the parameters for this command.
show ip route parameters
Parameter
Description
<A.B.C.D>
Enter IP address to display the route for the specific
IP address.
<W.X.Y.Z>
summary
Enter subnet mask address for the subnet to display.
Display a summary of IP route information.
The show ip route command is executed in the User EXEC command
mode.
show ip route summary command
The show ip route summary command displays the software IP routing
table.
The syntax for the show ip route summary command is:
show ip route summary
show ip route summary command output
------------------------
Connected routes :
65
Static routes
RIP routes
OSPF routes
:
:
:
2
512
512
------------------------
Total routes 1091
:
------------------------
The show ip route summary command is executed in the User EXEC
command mode.
ip route command
The ip route command creates and configures a static route.
The syntax for the ip route command is:
ip route <A.B.C.D> <W.X.Y.Z> <O.P.Q.R> <1-65535>
The following table outlines the parameters for this command.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 61
ip route parameters
Parameter
Description
<A.B.C.D>
Enter IP address of the destination point of the route
being added.
<W.X.Y.Z>
<O.P.Q.R>
<1 - 65535>
Enter subnet mask address of the destination node
for the route being added.
Enter the IP address of the next hop of the route
being added.
Enter the weight, or cost, of the route being added.
The ip route command is executed in the Global Configuration command
mode.
no ip route command
The no ip route command removes a static route.
The syntax for the no ip route command is:
no ip route <A.B.C.D> <W.X.Y.Z> <O.P.Q.R>
The following table outlines the parameters for this command.
no ip route parameters
Parameters
Description
<A.B.C.D>
Enter IP address of the destination point of the route
being removed.
<W.X.Y.Z>
<O.P.Q.R>
Enter subnet mask address of the destination node
for the route being removed.
Enter the IP address of the next hop of the route
being removed.
The no ip route command is executed in the Global Configuration
command mode.
ip route enable command
The ip route enable command enables a static route.
The syntax for the ip route enable command is:
ip route <A.B.C.D> <W.X.Y.Z> <O.P.Q.R> enable
The following table describes the parameters for this command.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
62 IP Routing Configuration and Management
ip route enable parameters
Parameter
Description
<A.B.C.D>
Enter IP address of the destination point of the route
being enabled.
<W.X.Y.Z>
<O.P.Q.R>
Enter subnet mask address of the destination node
for the route being enabled.
Enter the IP address of the next hop of the route
being enabled.
The ip route enable command is executed in the Global Configuration
command mode.
ip route disable command
The ip route disable command disables a static route.
The syntax for the ip route disable command is:
ip route <A.B.C.D> <W.X.Y.Z> <O.P.Q.R> disable
The following table describes the parameters for this command.
ip route disable parameters
Parameter
Description
<A.B.C.D>
Enter IP address of the destination point of the route
being disabled.
<W.X.Y.Z>
<O.P.Q.R>
Enter subnet mask address of the destination node
for the route being disabled.
Enter the IP address of the next hop of the route
being disabled.
The ip route disable command is executed in the Global Configuration
command mode.
traceroute command
The traceroute command displays the route taken by IP packets to a
specified host.
Note: The traceroute command, when applied to a stack, can be
executed only on the base unit.
TIP: Type CTRL+C to interrupt the command.
The syntax for the traceroute command is:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 63
traceroute <Hostname|A.B.C.D.|ip> <-m> <-p> <-q> <-v> <-w>
<1-1464>
The following table describes the parameters for this command.
traceroute parameters
Parameter
Hostname
A.B.C.D.
ip
Description
Enter the name of the remote host.
Enter the A.B.C.D. name of the remote host.
Enter the IP address of the remote host.
-m
Specifies the maximum time to live (ttl). The value for this
parameter is in the rage from 1-255. The default value is 10.
Example: traceroute 10.3.2.134 -m 10
-p
-q
Specifies the base UDP port number. The value for this
parameter is in the range from 0-65535.
Example: traceroute 1.2.3.4 -p 87
Specifies the number of probes per time to live. The value for
this parameter is in the range from 1-255. The default value is 3.
Example: traceroute 10.3.2.134 -q 3
-v
Specifies verbose mode.
Example: traceroute 10.3.2.134 -v
-w
Specifies the wait time per probe. The value for this parameter
is in the range from 1-255. The default value is 5 seconds.
Example: traceroute 10.3.2.134 -w 15
<1-1464>
Specifies the UDP probe packet size.
TIP: probe packet size is 40 plus specified data length in bytes.
Example: traceroute 10.3.2.134 -w 60
ip route weight command
The ip route weight command changes the weight, or cost, of a static
route.
The syntax for the ip route weight command is:
ip route <A.B.C.D> <W.X.Y.Z> <O.P.Q.R> weight <1-65535>
The following table outlines the parameters for this command.
ip route weight parameters
Parameter
Description
<A.B.C.D>
Enter IP address of the destination point of the route
being modified.
<W.X.Y.Z>
Enter subnet mask address of the destination node
for the route being modified.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Parameter
Description
<O.P.Q.R>
Enter the IP address of the next hop of the route
being modified.
<1 - 65535>
Enter the new weight, or cost, of the static route.
The ip route weight command is executed in the Global Configuration
command mode.
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) commands
Use the CLI to display, create, configure, and remove ARP entries.
show arp command
The show arp-table command displays ARP entries.
The syntax for the show arp-table command is:
show arp-table [<A.B.C.D>]
Substitute <A.B.C.D> above with the IP address of the ARP table to be
displayed.
The show arp-table command is executed in the Global Configuration
command mode.
show ip arp command
The show ip arp command displays the IP addresses of ARP entries.
The syntax for the show ip arp command is:
show ip arp [<-s> <A.B.C.D.|W.X.Y.Z.>] [<static>]
The following table outlines the parameters for this command.
show ip arp parameters
Parameter
Description
-s
Specify the subnet of the ARP entries to be
displayed.
<A.B.C.D>
Specify the IP address of the ARP entry to be
displayed. This option is invalid if the switch is not in
Layer 3 mode.
<W.X.Y.Z>
static
Enter subnet mask address in dotted decimal
notation.
Display the software ARP table - all configured static
entries, including those without a valid route.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 65
The show ip arp command is executed in the Global Configuration
command mode.
show ip arp static command
The show ip arp static command displays all configured static entries
in an ARP table, including those without a valid route.
The syntax for the show ip arp static command is:
show ip arp static
The show ip arp static command can be executed in any command
mode.
show ip arp static command output
IP ARP
IP Address
Age (min) MAC Address
00:00:00:00:01:99
VLAN-Unit/Port/Trunk
VLAN#1-1/1
Flags
S
10.3.2.198
0
Total ARP entries: 1
Flags Legend: S=Static, D=Dynamic, L=Local, B=Broadcast
ip arp command
The ip arp command creates and enables a static ARP entry. The
requested information for connection to the device must be supplied.
The syntax for the ip arp command is:
ip arp <A.B.C.D> <aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff> <unit / port> [vid
<1-4094>]
The following table outlines the parameters for this command.
ip arp parameters
Parameters
Description
<A.B.C.D>
Enter the IP address of the device being set as a
static ARP entry.
<aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff>
<unit / port>
Enter the MAC address of the device being set as
a static ARP entry.
Enter the unit and port number of the device being
set as a static ARP entry.
vid <1 - 4094>
Enter the VLAN ID to which the static ARP entry
is being added to.
The ip arp command is executed in the Global Configuration command
mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66 IP Routing Configuration and Management
no ip arp command
The no ip arp command removes an ARP entry.
The syntax for the no ip arp command is:
no ip arp <A.B.C.D>
Substitute <A.B.C.D> above with the IP address of the static ARP entry to
remove.
The no ip arp command is executed in the Global Configuration
command mode.
ip arp timeout command
The ip arp timeout command configures an aging time for the ARP
entries.
The syntax for the ip arp timeout command is:
ip arp timeout <5-360>
Substitute <5-360> above with the amount of time in minutes before an
ARP entry ages out. The default value is 360 minutes.
The ip arp timeout command is executed in the Global Configuration
command mode.
Proxy ARP commands
This section outlines the commands used to configure and manage Proxy
ARP on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series.
ip arp-proxy command
The ip arp-proxy command is used to enable proxy ARP functionality
on the switch
The syntax of the ip arp-proxy command is:
ip arp-proxy enable
The ip arp-proxy command is executed in the Layer 3 IP VLAN Interface
Configuration mode.
no ip arp-proxy command
The no ip arp-proxy command is used to disable proxy ARP
functionality on the switch.
The syntax of the no ip arp-proxy command is:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 67
no ip arp-proxy [enable]
The no ip arp-proxy command is executed in the Layer 3 IP VLAN
Interface Configuration mode.
default ip arp-proxy command
The default ip arp-proxy command is used to return the switch to the
default proxy ARP settings.
The syntax of the default ip arp-proxy command is:
default ip arp-proxy [enable]
The default ip arp-proxy command is executed in the Layer 3 IP
VLAN Interface Configuration mode.
show ip arp-proxy interface command
The show ip arp-proxy interface command is used to display the
status of proxy ARP on an interface.
The syntax of the show ip arp-proxy interface command is:
show ip arp-proxy interface [vlan <vlan_id>]
The show ip arp-proxy interface command is executed in the User
EXEC mode.
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) commands
This section describes the CLI commands used to configure and manage
the Routing Information Protocol (RIP) on the Nortel Ethernet Routing
Switch 5500 Series. RIP is a distance vector protocol used to dynamically
discover network routes based on information passed between routers in
the network. RIP is useful in network environments where using static route
administration would be difficult.
router rip enable command
The router rip enable command is used to globally enable RIP on
the switch. RIP must be globally enabled on the switch before it becomes
operational.
The syntax of the router rip enable command is:
router rip enable
The router rip enable command is executed in the Global
Configuration command mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68 IP Routing Configuration and Management
router rip command
The router rip command is used to enter the Router Configuration
mode for RIP. Router Configuration mode is used to configure various
aspects of RIP, OSPF (router ospf command), and VRRP (router
vrrp command).
The syntax of the router rip command is:
router rip
The router rip command is executed in the Global Configuration
command mode.
network command
The network command is used to enable RIP on an IP interface.
The syntax of the network command is:
network <ip_address>
The <ip_address> parameter represents the IP address of the interface
to be configured.
The network command is executed in the Router Configuration mode.
no network command
The no network command is used to disable RIP on an IP interface.
The syntax of the no network command is:
no network <ip_address>
The <ip_address> parameter represents the IP address of the interface
to be disabled.
The no network command is executed in the Router Configuration mode.
timers basic holddown command
The timers basic holddown command is used to set the RIP holddown
timer.
The syntax of the timers basic holddown command is:
timers basic holddown <timer_value>
The <timer_value> parameter represents a value between 0 and 360
seconds.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 69
The timers basic holddown command is executed in the Router
Configuration mode.
timers basic timeout command
The timers basic timeout command is used to set the RIP timeout
timer.
The syntax of the timers basic timeout command is:
timers basic timeout <timer_value>
The <timer_value> parameter represents a value between 15 and
259200 seconds.
The timers basic timeout command is executed in the Router
Configuration mode.
timers basic update command
The timers basic update command is used to set the RIP update timer.
The syntax of the timers basic update command is:
timers basic update <timer_value>
The <timer_value> parameter represents a value between 0 and 360
seconds.
The default timers basic update command is executed in the
Router Configuration mode.
ip rip advertise-when-down command
The ip rip advertise-when-down command is used to enable RIP
advertisements on the interface being configured even when that interface
is not operational. The subnet on which the switch has a RIP enabled
interface is advertised even if that particular network is no longer connected
(no link in the connected VLAN is in the Link-Up state). This setting will
take effect whenever the value is changed by the user or after the first
Link-Down transition.
The syntax of the ip rip advertise-when-down command is:
ip rip advertise-when-down {enable}
Advertise when down functionality is disabled by default.
The ip rip advertise-when-down command is executed in the
Interface Configuration mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70 IP Routing Configuration and Management
no ip rip advertise-when-down command
The ip rip advertise-when-down command is used to disable RIP
advertisements on the interface being configured even when that interface
is not operational.
The syntax of the no ip rip advertise-when-down command is:
no ip rip advertise-when-down {enable}
The no ip rip advertise-when-down command is executed in the
Interface Configuration mode.
ip rip auto-aggregation command
The ip rip auto-aggregation command is used to enable auto
aggregation on the RIP interface. This allows for the automatic aggregation
of routes to their natural net mask when they are advertised on an interface
in a different class network.
The syntax of the ip rip auto-aggregation command is:
ip rip auto-aggregation {enable}
Auto aggregation is disabled by default.
The ip rip auto-aggregation command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
no ip rip auto-aggregation command
The no ip rip auto-aggregation command is used to disable
auto-aggregation on the RIP interface.
The syntax of the no ip rip auto-aggregation command is:
no ip rip auto-aggregation {enable}
The no ip rip auto-aggregation command is executed in the
Interface Configuration mode.
ip rip cost command
The ip rip cost command is used to set the administrative path cost
of the interface.
The syntax of the ip rip cost command is:
ip rip cost <path_cost>
The <path_cost> parameter represents a value between 1 and 15.
The default path cost is 1.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 71
The ip rip cost command is executed in the Interface Configuration
mode.
ip rip default-listen command
The ip rip default-listen command is used to enable the
acceptance of default route advertisements.
The syntax of the ip rip default-listen command is:
ip rip default-listen {enable}
The ip rip default-listen command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
no ip rip default-listen command
The no ip rip default-listen command is used to disable the
acceptance of default route advertisements.
The syntax of the no ip rip default-listen command is:
no ip rip default-listen {enable}
The no ip rip default-listen command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
ip rip default-supply command
The ip rip default-supply command is used to enable the
advertisement of default routes on the interface.
The syntax of the ip rip default-supply command is:
ip rip default-supply {enable}
The ip rip default-supply command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
no ip rip default-supply command
The no ip rip default-supply command is used to disable the
advertisement of default routes on the interface.
The syntax of the no ip rip default-supply command is:
no ip rip default-supply {enable}
The no ip rip default-supply command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72 IP Routing Configuration and Management
ip rip holddown command
The ip rip holddown command is used to set the value of the holddown
timer on the RIP interface.
The syntax of the ip rip holddown command is:
ip rip holddown <timer_value>
The <timer_value> parameter is an integer value between 0 and 360
seconds.
The ip rip holddown command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
ip rip in-policy command
The ip rip in-policy command is used to add an in policy to this RIP
interface.
The syntax of the ip rip in-policy command is:
ip rip in-policy <policy_name>
The <policy_name> parameter represents the name of a previously
configured switch policy.
The ip rip in-policy command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
no ip rip in-policy command
The no ip rip in-policy command is used to remove a in policy for
the RIP interface.
The syntax of the no ip rip in-policy command is:
no ip rip in-policy <policy_name>
The <policy_name> parameter represents the name of a previously
configured switch policy.
The no ip rip in-policy command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
ip rip listen command
The ip rip listen command is used to allow this interface to listen for
RIP advertisements.
The syntax of the ip rip listen command is:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 73
ip rip listen {enable}
The ip rip listen command is executed in the Interface Configuration
mode.
no ip rip listen command
The no ip rip listen command is used to prevent this interface from
listening for RIP advertisements.
The syntax of the no ip rip listen command is:
ip rip listen {enable}
The no ip rip listen command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
ip rip out-policy command
The ip rip out-policy command is used to add an out policy to this
RIP interface.
The syntax of the ip rip out-policy command is:
ip rip out-policy <policy_name>
The <policy_name> parameter represents the name of a previously
configured switch policy.
The ip rip out-policy command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
no ip rip out-policy command
The no ip rip out-policy command is used to remove an out policy
from the RIP interface.
The syntax of the no ip rip out-policy command is:
no ip rip out-policy <policy_name>
The <policy_name> parameter represents the name of a previously
configured switch policy.
The no ip rip out-policy command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
ip rip poison command
The ip rip poison command is used to enable poison reverse on this
RIP interface.
The syntax of the ip rip poison command is:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74 IP Routing Configuration and Management
ip rip poison {enable}
The ip rip poison command is executed in the Interface Configuration
mode.
no ip rip poison command
The no ip rip poison command is used to disable poison reverse on
this RIP interface.
The syntax of the no ip rip poison command is:
no ip rip poison {enable}
The no ip rip poison command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
ip rip proxy-announce command
The ip rip proxy-announce command is used to enable proxy
announcements on this RIP interface. When proxy announcements are
enabled, the source of a route and its next hop are treated as the same
when processing received updates. So, instead of the advertising router
being used as the source, the next hop is.
The syntax of the ip rip proxy-announce command is:
ip rip proxy-announce {enable}
Proxy announcements are disabled by default.
The ip rip proxy-announce command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
no ip rip proxy-announce command
The no ip rip proxy-announce command is used to disable proxy
announcements on this RIP interface.
The syntax of the no ip rip proxy-announce command is:
no ip rip proxy-announce {enable}
The no ip rip proxy-announce command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
ip rip receive command
The ip rip receive command is used to set the RIP version received
on this interface.
The syntax of the ip rip receive command is:
ip rip receive version <rip_version>
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 75
The <rip_version> parameter indicates the RIP version. The valid
values for this parameter are:
•
•
•
rip1
rip1orrip2
rip2
The ip rip receive command is executed in the Interface Configuration
mode.
ip rip send command
The ip rip send command is used to set the RIP version sent on this
interface.
The syntax of the ip rip send command is:
ip rip send version <rip_version>
The <rip_version> parameter indicates the RIP version. The valid
values for this parameter are:
•
•
•
•
notsend
rip1
rip1comp
rip2
The ip rip send command is executed in the Interface Configuration
mode.
ip rip supply command
The ip rip supply command is used to enable RIP route advertisement
on this interface.
The syntax of the ip rip supply command is:
ip rip supply {enable}
The ip rip supply command is executed in the Interface Configuration
mode.
no ip rip supply command
The no ip rip supply command is used to disable RIP route
advertisement on this interface.
The syntax of the no ip rip supply command is:
no ip rip supply {enable}
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76 IP Routing Configuration and Management
The no ip rip supply command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
ip rip timeout command
The ip rip timeout command is used to set the RIP timeout value
on this interface.
The syntax of the ip rip timeout command is:
ip rip timeout <timer_value>
The <timer_value> parameter is an integer value between 15 and
259200 seconds.
The default timeout value is 180 seconds.
The command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode.
ip rip triggered command
The ip rip triggered command is used to enable triggered updates
on this RIP interface.
The syntax of the ip rip triggered command is:
ip rip triggered {enable}
The ip rip triggered command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
no ip rip triggered command
The no ip rip triggered command is used to disable triggered
updates on this RIP interface.
The syntax of the no ip rip triggered command is:
no ip rip triggered {enable}
The no ip rip triggered command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
show ip rip command
The show ip rip command is used to display configuration and statistical
information about RIP.
The syntax of the show ip rip command is:
show ip rip [interface]
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 77
Use the interface key word to display RIP statistics by interface. Omission of
this key word displays general RIP information
The show ip rip command is executed in the Global Configuration mode.
default router rip command
The default router rip command is used to return the switch to the
default global RIP state (disabled).
The syntax of the default router rip command is:
default router rip enable
The default router rip command is executed in the Router
Configuration mode.
default default-metric command
The default default-metric command is used to return the switch
to the factory default RIP default import metric.
The syntax of the default default-metric command is:
default default-metric
The default default-metric command is executed in the Router
Configuration mode.
default timers basic holddown command
The default timers basic holddown command is used to return the
switch to the factory default RIP holddown timer.
The syntax of the default timers basic holddown command is:
default timers basic holddown
The default timers basic holddown command is executed in the
Router Configuration mode.
default timers basic timeout command
The default timers basic timeout command is used to return the
switch to the factory default RIP timeout timer.
The syntax of the default timers basic timeout command is:
default timers basic timeout
The default timers basic timeout command is executed in the
Router Configuration mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78 IP Routing Configuration and Management
default timers basic update command
The default timers basic update command is used to return the
switch to the factory default RIP update timer.
The syntax of the default timers basic update command is:
default timers basic update
The default timers basic update command is executed in the
Router Configuration mode.
default-metric command
The default-metric command is used to set the default RIP metric
value.
The syntax of the default-metric command is:
default-metric <metric_value>
The <metric_value> parameter is an integer value between 0 and 15.
The default-metric command is executed in the Router Configuration
mode.
default ip rip advertise-when-down command
The default ip rip advertise-when-down command is used to
restore the default RIP advertise when down setting for the interface
(disabled).
The syntax of the default ip rip advertise-when-down command
is:
default ip rip advertise-when-down enable
The default ip rip advertise-when-down command is executed in
the Interface Configuration mode.
default ip rip auto-aggregation command
The default ip rip auto-aggregation command is used to restore
the default RIP auto aggregation setting for the interface (disabled).
The syntax of the default ip rip auto-aggregation command is:
default ip rip auto-aggregation enable
The default ip rip auto-aggregation command is executed in
the Interface Configuration mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 79
default ip rip cost command
The default ip rip cost command is used to restore the default RIP
costing settings for the interface.
The syntax of the default ip rip cost command is:
default ip rip cost [[out-policy <policy_name>] | [poison
enable] | [proxy-announce enable] | [receive <rip_version>]
| [send <rip_version>] | [supply enable] | [timeout] |
[triggered enable]]
The default ip rip cost command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
default ip rip default-listen command
The default ip rip default-listen command is used to restore
the default RIP route listening setting for the interface (disabled).
The syntax of the default ip rip default-listen command is:
default ip rip default-listen enable
The default ip rip default-listen command is executed in the
Interface Configuration mode.
default ip rip default-supply command
The default ip rip default-supply command is used to restore
the default RIP route advertisement setting for the interface (disabled).
The syntax of the default ip rip default-supply command is:
default ip rip default-supply enable
The default ip rip default-supply command is executed in the
Interface Configuration mode.
default ip rip enable command
The default ip rip enable command is used to globally disable RIP
on the interface.
The syntax of the default ip rip enable command is:
default ip rip enable
The default ip rip enable command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80 IP Routing Configuration and Management
default ip rip holddown command
The default ip rip holddown command is used to restore the default
RIP holddown setting for the interface.
The syntax of the default ip rip holddown command is:
default ip rip holddown
The default ip rip holddown command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
default ip rip in-policy command
The default ip rip in-policy command is used to delete the in
policy associated with this interface.
The syntax of the default ip rip in-policy command is:
default ip rip in-policy <policy_name>
The default ip rip in-policy command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
default ip rip listen command
The default ip rip listen command is used to set the ip rip listen to
the default value which is enabled.
The syntax of the default ip rip listen command is:
default ip rip listen enable
The default ip rip listen command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
default ip rip out-policy command
The default ip rip out-policy command is used to delete the out
policy associated with this interface.
The syntax of the default ip rip out-policy command is:
default ip rip out-policy <policy_name>
The default ip rip out-policy command is executed in the
Interface Configuration mode.
default ip rip poison command
The default ip rip poison command is used to disable RIP poison
reverse on the interface.
The syntax of the default ip rip poison command is:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 81
default ip rip poison enable
The default ip rip poison command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
default ip rip proxy-announce command
The default ip rip proxy-announce command is used to disable
proxy announcement on the interface.
The syntax of the default ip rip proxy-announce command is:
default ip rip proxy-announce enable
The default ip rip proxy-announce command is executed in the
Interface Configuration mode.
default ip rip receive command
The default ip rip receive command is used to set the default RIP
version to listen to on this interface.
The syntax of the default ip rip receive command is:
default ip rip receive <rip_version>
The default ip rip receive command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
default ip rip send command
The default ip rip send command is used to set the default RIP
version to send on this interface.
The syntax of the default ip rip send command is:
default ip rip send <rip_version>
The default ip rip send command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
default ip rip supply command
The default ip rip supply command is used to set ip rip supply to
the default value which is enabled.
The syntax of the default ip rip supply command is:
default ip rip supply enable
The default ip rip supply command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82 IP Routing Configuration and Management
default ip rip timeout command
The default ip rip timeout command is used to restore the default
RIP timeout setting for the interface.
The syntax of the default ip rip timeout command is:
default ip rip timeout
The default ip rip timeout command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
default ip rip triggered command
The default ip rip triggered command is used disabled triggered
updates on this switch.
The syntax of the default ip rip triggered command is:
default ip rip triggered enable
The default ip rip triggered command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) commands
This section describes the CLI commands used to configure and manage
the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol on the Nortel Ethernet
Routing Switch 5500 Series. The Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Protocol
is an Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) that distributes routing information
between routers belonging to a single autonomous system (AS). Intended
for use in large networks, OSPF is a link-state protocol which supports IP
subnetting and the tagging of externally-derived routing information.
Note: OSPF commands used during the configuration and management
of VLANs in the Interface Configuration mode can be used to configure
any VLAN regardless of the one used to log into the command mode.
Insert the keyword vlan with the number of the VLAN to be configured
after the command keywords ip ospf. The current VLAN will remain at
the one used to log into the Interface Configuration command mode
after the command execution.
ip ospf apply accept command
The ip ospf apply accept command is used to apply OSPF accept
policies to the switch.
The syntax of the ip ospf apply accept command is:
ip ospf apply accept
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 83
The ip ospf apply accept command is executed in the Global
Configuration mode.
ip ospf apply redistribute direct command
The ip ospf apply redistribute direct command is used to
apply only direct OSPF redistribution configuration to the switch.
The syntax of the ip ospf apply redistribute direct command is:
ip ospf apply redistribute direct
The ip ospf apply redistribute direct command is executed
in the Global Configuration mode.
ip ospf apply redistribute rip command
The ip ospf apply redistribute rip command is used to apply
only RIP OSPF redistribution configuration on the switch.
The syntax of the ip ospf apply redistribute rip command is:
ip ospf apply redistribute rip
The ip ospf apply redistribute rip command is executed in the
Global Configuration mode.
ip ospf apply redistribute static command
The ip ospf apply redistribute static command is used to
apply only static OSPF redistribution configuration on the switch.
The syntax of the ip ospf apply redistribute static command is:
ip ospf apply redistribute static
The ip ospf apply redistribute static command is executed
in the Global Configuration mode.
ip ospf spf-run command
The ip ospf spf-run command is used to immediately initiate an SPF
run upon holddown timer expiration to update the link state database.
The syntax of the ip ospf spf-run command is:
ip ospf spf-run
The ip ospf spf-run command is executed in the Global Configuration
mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84 IP Routing Configuration and Management
router ospf enable command
The router ospf enable command is used to enable OSPF globally
on the switch.
The syntax of the router ospf enable command is:
router ospf enable
The router ospf enable command is executed in the Global
Configuration mode.
no router ospf enable command
The no router ospf enable command is used to disable OSPF
globally on the switch.
The syntax of the no router ospf enable command is:
no router ospf enable
The no router ospf enable command is executed in the Global
Configuration mode.
router ospf command
The router ospf command is used to place the switch into Router
Configuration mode for the purposes of OSPF configuration.
The syntax of the router ospf command is:
router ospf
The router ospf command is executed in the Global Configuration mode.
default router ospf command
The default router ospf command is used to return the switch to the
default OSPF setting; which is disabled.
The syntax of the default router ospf command is:
default router ospf enable
The default router ospf command is executed in the Global
Configuration mode.
accept adv-rtr command
The accept adv-rtr command is used to configure the router to accept
advertisements from another router in the system.
The syntax of the accept adv-rtr command is:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 85
accept adv-rtr <router_ip_address> [enable] [metric-type {any
| type1 | type2}] [route-policy {policy_name}]
The following table outlines the parameters for this command.
accept adv-rtr parameters
Parameter
Description
router_ip_address
This parameter represents the IP address of the router
advertisements will be accepted from. The value 0.0.0.0
denotes that advertisements from all routers will be
accepted.
enable
Enables the accept entry for the router specified in the
<ip_address> parameter.
Indicates the type of OSPF external routes that will be
accepted from this router.
metric-type {any |
type1 | type2}
route-policy
{policy_name}
Specifies the name of the route policy to be used for
filtering external routes advertised by the specified
advertising router before accepting them into the routing
table.
The accept adv-rtr command is executed in the Router Configuration
mode.
no accept adv-rtr command
The no accept adv-rtr command is used to configure the router to not
accept advertisements from another router in the system.
The syntax of the no accept adv-rtr command is:
no accept adv-rtr <router_ip_address> enable
The <router_ip_address> parameter represents the address of the router
from which advertisements will no longer be accepted. The value 0.0.0.0
denotes that advertisements from all routers will be blocked.
The no accept adv-rtr command is executed in the Router
Configuration mode.
area command
The area command is used to configure OSPF area parameters.
The syntax of the area command is:
area <ip_address> [default-cost {0-16777215}] [import
{external | noexternal | nssa}] [import-summaries {enable}]
[range {subnet_mask} [{nssa-entlink | summary-link}]
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86 IP Routing Configuration and Management
[advertise-mode {no-summarize | summarize | suppress}]
[advertise-metric {0-65535}]]
The following table outlines the parameters for this command.
area parameters
Parameter
ip_address
Description
Specifies the Area ID expressed as IP address (A.B.C.D).
The default cost associated with an OSPF stub area.
default-cost
{0-16777215}
The area’s support for importing Autonomous System
external link state advertisements.
import {external |
noexternal | nssa}
import-summaries
{enable}
Controls the import of summary link state advertisements
into stub areas. This setting has no effect on other areas.
range {subnet_mask} Used to specify range parameters for the OSPF area.
[{nssa-entlink |
summary-link}]
[advertise-mode
{ no-summarize
| summarize
| suppress}]
[advertise-metric
{0-65535}]
The area command is executed in the Router Configuration mode.
Note: The configuration of a totally stubby area (no summary
advertising) is a two step process. First, define an area with the
import flag set to noexternal. Second, disable import summaries
in the same area with the command no area <ip_address>
import-summaries enable.
no area command
The no area command is used to disable configured OSPF area
parameters.
The syntax of the no area command is:
no area <ip_address> [import-summaries {enable} | range
{subnet_mask} {nssa-entlink | summary-link}]
The following table outlines the parameters for this command.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 87
no area parameters
Parameter
Description
ip_address
Specifies the Area ID expressed as IP address (A.B.C.D).
import-summaries
{enable}
Controls the import of summary link state advertisements
into stub areas. This setting has no effect on other areas.
range {subnet_mask} Used to specify range parameters for the OSPF area.
{nssa-entlink |
summary-link}
The no area command is executed in the Router Configuration mode.
Note: The configuration of a totally stubby area (no summary
advertising) is a two step process. First, define an area with the
import flag set to noexternal. Second, disable import summaries
in the same area with the command no area <ip_address>
import-summaries enable.
as-boundary-router command
The as-boundary-router command is used to denote a router as an
Autonomous System Boundary Router.
The syntax of the as-boundary-router command is:
as-boundary-router {enable}
The as-boundary-router command is executed in the Router
Configuration mode.
no as-boundary-router command
The no as-boundary-router command is used to withdraw a router as
an Autonomous System Boundary Router.
The syntax of the no as-boundary-router command is:
no as-boundary-router {enable}
The no as-boundary-router command is executed in the Router
Configuration mode.
default-cost ethernet command
The default-cost ethernet command is used to define the default
cost metric of an ethernet (10 Mbps) port.
The syntax of the default-cost ethernet command is:
default-cost ethernet <metric_value>
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88 IP Routing Configuration and Management
The <metric_value> parameter represents the cost value to assign to
the port. This value is an integer between 1 and 65535.
The default-cost ethernet command is executed in the Router
Configuration mode.
default-cost fast-ethernet command
The default-cost fast-ethernet command is used to define the
default cost metric of a fast ethernet (100 Mbps) port.
The syntax of the default-cost fast-ethernet command is:
default-cost fast-ethernet <metric_value>
The <metric_value> parameter represents the cost value to assign to
the port. This value is an integer between 1 and 65535.
The default-cost fast-ethernet command is executed in the Router
Configuration mode.
default-cost gig-ethernet command
The default-cost gig-ethernet command is used to define the
default cost metric of a gig ethernet (1000 Mbps) port.
The syntax of the default-cost gig-ethernet command is:
default-cost gig-ethernet <metric_value>
The <metric_value> parameter represents the cost value to assign to
the port. This value is an integer between 1 and 65535.
The default-cost gig-ethernet command is executed in the Router
Configuration mode.
default-cost ten-gig-ethernet command
The default-cost ten-gig-ethernet command is used to define the
default cost metric of a ten gig ethernet (10000 Mbps) port.
The syntax of the default-cost ten-gig-ethernet command is:
default-cost ten-gig-ethernet <metric_value>
The <metric_value> parameter represents the cost value to assign to
the port. This value is an integer between 1 and 65535.
The default-cost ten-gig-ethernet command is executed in the
Router Configuration mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 89
host-route command
Use the host-route command to add a host to a router. For more
The syntax for the host-route command is:
host-route <A.B.C.D.> metric <0-65535>
where <A.B.C.D.> is the host IP address and metric is an integer between 0
and 65535 representing the configured cost of the host
The host-route command is executed in the Router Configuration mode.
no host-route command
Use the no host-route command to delete a host from a router.
The syntax for the no host-route command is:
no host-route <A.B.C.D.>
where <A.B.C.D.> is the host IP address
The no host-route command is executed in the Router Configuration
mode.
network command
The network command is used to enable OSPF routing on an interface
and assign an OSPF interface to an area.
The syntax of the network command is:
network <ip_address> [area <ip_address>]
The following table describes the parameters of this command.
network parameters
Field
Description
<ip_address>
area <area_Id>
The IP address of interface to be enabled for OSPF routing.
The area assigned to the interface.
The network command is executed in the Router Configuration mode.
no network command
The no network command is used to disable OSPF routing on an
interface.
The syntax of the no network command is:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90 IP Routing Configuration and Management
no network <ip_address>
The <ip_address> parameter represents the IP address of the interface to
be disabled.
The no network command is executed in the Router Configuration mode.
redistribute command
The redistribute command is used to configure OSPF route
redistribution. Direct, RIP, and static route redistribution is currently
supported.
The syntax of the redistribute command is:
redistribute <route_type> [enable] [metric <metric_value>]
[metric-type <metric_type>] [route-policy <policy_name>]
[subnets <subnet_setting>]
The parameters for this command are listed below.
redistribute parameters
Parameters
Description
<route_type>
The type of route to be configured. Valid options are
direct, rip, and static.
<metric_value>
<metric_type>
<policy_name>
<subnet_setting>
The metric value to associate with the route redistribution.
This is an integer value between 0 and 65535.
The metric type to associate with the route redistribution.
Valid options are type1 and type2.
The route policy to associate with route redistribution.
This is the name of an existing route policy.
The subnet advertisement setting of this route
redistribution. This determines whether individual subnets
are advertised. Valid options are allow and suppress.
The redistribute command is executed in the Router Configuration
mode.
no redistribute command
The no redistribute command is used to disable an OSPF route policy
or OSPF route redistribution completely.
The syntax of the no redistribute command is:
redistribute <route_type> [enable] [route-policy
<policy_name>]
The parameters for this command are listed below.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 91
no redistribute parameters
Parameters
Description
<route_type>
The type of route to be configured. Valid options are
direct, rip, and static.
<policy_name>
The route policy to remove from the route redistribution.
This is the name of an existing route policy.
The no redistribute command is executed in the Router Configuration
mode.
rfc1583-compatibility command
The rfc1583-compatibility command is used to enable compatibility
for RFC 1583 in the switch OSPF implementation.
The syntax of the rfc1583-compatibility command is:
rfc1583-compatibility enable
The rfc1583-compatibility command is executed in the Router
Configuration mode.
no rfc1583-compatibility command
The no rfc1583-compatibility command is used to disable
compatibility for RFC 1583 in the switch OSPF implementation.
The syntax of the no rfc1583-compatibility command is:
no rfc1583-compatibility enable
The no rfc1583-compatibility command is executed in the Router
Configuration mode.
router-id command
The router-id command is used to set the identifier to the user-configured
router ID, which is expressed in the form of an IP address.
The syntax of the router-id command is:
router-id <router_id>
The <router_id> parameter is used as the unique identifier for the router.
The router-id command is executed in the Router Configuration mode.
no router-id command
The no router-id command is used to reset the router ID to 0.0.0.0.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92 IP Routing Configuration and Management
The syntax of the no router-id command is:
no router-id
The no router-id command is executed in the Router Configuration
mode.
timers basic holddown command
The timers basic holddown command is used to configure the OSPF
holddown timer.
The syntax of the timers basic holddown command is:
timers basic holddown <timer_value>
The <timer_value> parameter represents a second value between 3
and 60 seconds.
The command is executed in the Router Configuration mode.
trap command
The trap command is used to enable OSPF system traps.
The syntax of the trap command is:
trap enable
The trap command is executed in the Router Configuration mode.
no trap command
The no trap command is used to disable OSPF system traps.
The syntax of the no trap command is:
no trap enable
The no trap command is executed in the Router Configuration mode.
area virtual-link command
Use the area virtual-link command to create a virtual interface.
The syntax for the area virtual-link command is:
area virtual-link <A.B.C.D.> <W.X.Y.Z> {[authentication-key
<WORD>] [authentication-type {none|simple|message-digest}]
[primary-md5-key <1-255>] [dead-interval <0-2147483647>]
[hello-interval <1-65535>] [retransmit-interval <0-3600>]
[transit-delay <0-3600>]
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 93
area virtual-link parameters
Parameter
Description
<A.B.C.D.>
Specifies the transit area ID expressed as an IP address.
<A.B.C.D./0-32>
Specifies the neighbor router ID expressed as an IP
address.
authentication-key
<WORD>
Specifies the unique identifier assigned to the
authentication key.
authentication-type
Specifies one of the following authentication types:
•
•
•
•
none
simple
password
message digest MD5
TIP: Up to 2 MD5 keys are allowed for message digest.
The default authentication type is none.
primary-md5-key
dead-interval
Specifies the user-selected key used to encrypt OSPF
protocol packets for transmission.
Specifies the time interval, in seconds, that a Hello
packet has not been transmitted from the virtual interface
before its neighbors declare it down. Expressed as an
integer from 0-2147483647, the default dead interval
value is 60 seconds.
hello-interval
Specifies the time interval, in seconds, between
transmission of Hello packets from the virtual interface.
Expressed as an integer from 1-65535, the hello-interval
default value is 10 seconds.
retransmit-interval
transit-delay
Specifies the time interval, in seconds, between link
stage advertisement retransmissions for adjacencies
belonging to the virtual interface. Expressed as an
integer from 0-3600, the default value is 5 seconds.
Specifies the estimated number of seconds required
to transmit a link state update packet over the virtual
interface. Expressed as an integer from 0-3600, the
default value is 1 second.
The area vitual-link command is executed in the Router Configuration
mode.
no area virtual-link command
Use the no area virtual-link command to delete a virtual interface.
The syntax for the no area virtual link command is:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94 IP Routing Configuration and Management
no area virtual-link <A.B.C.D.> <W.X.Y.Z> [authentication-
key]
no area virtual-link command parameters
Parameter
<A.B.C.D.>
<W.X.Y.Z>
Description
Specifies the transit area Id expressed as an IP address.
Specifies the neighbor router ID expressed as an IP
address.
authentication-key
Specifies the unique identifier assigned to the
authentication key
The no area virtual-link command is executed in the Router
Configuration mode.
area virtual-link message-digest-key command
Use the area virtual-link message-digest-key command to
create a virtual interface message digest key.
The syntax for the area virtual-link message-digest-key
command is:
area virtual-link message-digest-key <A.B.C.D.> <A.B.C.D./0-
32> <1-255> md5-key <WORD>
area virtual-link message-digest key command parameters
Parameter
<A.B.C.D.>
<W.X.Y.Z>
Description
Specifies the transit area Id expressed as an IP address.
Specifies the neighbor router ID expressed as an IP
address.
<1-255>
Specifies the primary MD5 key value, expressed as an
integer from 1-255.
md5-key <WORD>
Specifies the user-selected key used to encrypt OSPF
protocol packets for transmission.
The area virtual-link message-digest-key command is executed
in the Router Configuration mode.
no area virtual-link message-digest-key command
Use the no area virtual-link message-digest-key command to
delete a virtual interface message digest key.
The syntax for the no area virtual-link message-digest-key
command is:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 95
no area virtual-link message-digest-key <A.B.C.D.> <W.X.Y.Z>
<1-255>
no area virtual-link message-digest-key command parameters
Parameter
<A.B.C.D.>
<W.X.Y.Z>
Description
Specifies the transit area ID expressed as an IP address.
Specifies the neighbor router ID expressed as an IP
address.
<1-255>
Specifies the primary MD5 key value, expressed as an
integer from 1-255.
The no area virtual-link message-digest-key command is
executed in the Router Configuration mode.
auto-vlink command
Use the auto-vlink command to enable global automatic Virtual Link creation.
For more information about Virtual Link, see "OSPF virtual link" (page 31)
The syntax for the auto-vlink command is:
auto-vlink
The auto-vlink command is executed in the Router Configuration mode.
no auto-vlink command
Use the no auto-vlink command to disable global automatic Virtual
Link creation.
The syntax for the no auto-vlink command is:
no auto-vlink
The no auto-vlink command is executed in the Router Configuration
mode.
ip ospf advertise-when-down command
The ip ospf advertise-when-down command is used to enable
advertisement of the OSPF interface even when the interface is operationally
unavailable.
The syntax of the ip ospf advertise-when-down command is:
ip ospf advertise-when-down enable
The ip ospf advertise-when-down command is executed in the
Interface Configuration mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96 IP Routing Configuration and Management
ip ospf area command
The ip ospf area command is used to assign an interface to an OSPF
area.
The syntax of the ip ospf area command is:
ip ospf area <ip_address>
The <ip_address> parameter represents the unique ID of the area to
which the interface connects. An area ID of 0.0.0.0 indicates the OSPF area
backbone and is created automatically by the switch.
The ip ospf area command is executed in the Interface Configuration
mode.
ip ospf authentication-key command
The ip ospf authentication-key command is used to configure an
interface authentication password.
The syntax of the ip ospf authentication-key command is:
ip opsf authentication-key <password>
The <password> parameter is the password to be configured. This
password can be up to 8 characters in length.
The ip opsf authentication-key command is executed in the
Interface Configuration mode.
ip ospf authentication-type command
The ip ospf authentication-type command is used to configure the
interface authentication type.
The syntax of the ip ospf authentication-type command is:
ip ospf authentication-type {message-digest | simple | none}
The ip ospf authentication-type command is executed in the
Interface Configuration mode.
ip ospf cost command
The ip ospf cost command is used to assign a cost to an interface.
The syntax of the ip ospf cost command is:
ip ospf cost <interface_cost>
The <interface_cost> parameter is the cost assigned to the interface.
This is an integer value between 1 and 65535.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 97
The ip ospf cost command is executed in the Interface Configuration
mode.
ip ospf dead-interval command
The ip ospf dead-interval command is used to configure a dead
interval for the interface. This is the interval of time that a Hello packet has
not been transmitted from this interface before its neighbors declare it down.
The syntax of the ip ospf dead-interval command is:
ip ospf dead-interval <interval>
The <interval> parameter represents the amount of time in seconds to
set this interval at. This is an integer value between 0 and 2147483647.
The ip ospf dead-interval command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
ip ospf hello-interval command
The ip ospf hello-interval command is used to configure the
amount of time between transmission of hello packets from this interface.
The syntax of the ip ospf hello-interval command is:
ip ospf hello-interval <interval>
The <interval> parameter is the amount of time in seconds between
hello packets. This is an integer value between 1 and 65535.
The ip ospf hello-interval command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
ip ospf mtu-ignore command
The ip ospf mtu-ignore command is used to instruct the interface to
ignore the packet MTU size specified in Database Descriptors.
The syntax of the ip ospf mtu-ignore command is:
ip ospf mtu-ignore enable
The ip ospf mtu-ignore command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
ip ospf network command
The ip ospf network command is used to define the type of OSPF
interface this interface is.
The syntax of the ip ospf network command is:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98 IP Routing Configuration and Management
ip ospf network {broadcast | passive}
The ip ospf network command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
ip ospf primary-md5-key command
The ip ospf primary-md5-key command is used to configure the
primary MD5 key to use for authentication in instances where interface
authentication uses an MD5 key.
The syntax of the ip ospf primary-md5-key command is:
ip ospf primary-md5-key <key_value>
The <key_value> parameter is an integer value between 1 and 255.
The ip ospf primary-md5-key command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
ip ospf priority command
The ip ospf priority command is used to assign a priority to the
interface for the purposes of Designated Router election.
The syntax of the ip ospf priority command is:
ip ospf priority <priority_value>
The <priority_value> parameter is the priority value assigned to the
interface. This is an integer value between 0 and 255.
The ip ospf priority command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
ip ospf retransmit-interval command
The ip ospf retransmit-interval command is used to define the
number of seconds between link state advertisement retransmissions for
adjacencies belonging to this interface.
The syntax of the ip ospf retransmit-interval command is:
ip ospf retransmit-interval <interval>
The <interval> parameter is the number of seconds between
retransmissions. This is an integer value between 0 and 3600.
The ip ospf retransmit-interval command is executed in the
Interface Configuration mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 99
ip ospf transmit-delay command
The ip ospf transmit-delay command is used to define the transmit
delay for this OSPF interface.
The syntax of the ip ospf transmit-delay command is:
ip ospf transmit-delay <interval>
The <interval> parameter is the transmit delay in seconds. This is an
integer value between 0 and 3600.
The ip ospf transmit-delay command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
ip ospf message-digest-key command
The ip ospf message-digest-key command is used to define the
MD5 keys referenced in the ip ospf primary-md5-key command.
The syntax of the ip ospf message-digest-key command is:
ip ospf message-digest-key <key_number> md5 <key_value>
The <key_number> parameter represents the MD5 key to be configured.
This is an integer value between 1 and 255. The <key_value> parameter
represents the value of the key being configured. This is a string value of up
to 16 characters in length.
The ip ospf message-digest-key command is executed in the
Interface Configuration mode.
OSPF show commands
OSPF functionality provides a wide range of commands used to display
statistics and configured parameters for the router. These commands are
available for use in any command mode. OSPF Show commands are
outlined in the table below.
OSPF show commands
Description
Command
show ip ospf
Displays general information on OSPF
configuration.
show ip ospf accept
Displays information on OSPF advertising
routers.
show ip ospf area
<ip_address>
Displays configuration information about the
OSPF area specified in the <ip_address>
parameter. Omitting this parameter displays
information for all OSPF areas.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Description
Command
show ip ospf area-range
<ip_address>
Displays configuration information about the
OSPF area range specified in the <ip_address>
parameter. Omitting this parameter displays
information for all OSPF area ranges.
show ip ospf ase
Displays information about the OSPF
Autonomous System external links state
advertisements.
show ip ospf default
Displays OSPF default metrics associated with
various port types.
show ip ospf default-cost
Displays the default costs associated with
various port types.
show ip ospf ifstats
<ip_address> {detail |
mismatch}
Displays OSPF interface statistics. All
parameters for this command are optional. Not
specifying an address of an area will display
statistics for the backbone area.
show ip ospf int-auth
show ip ospf int-timers
Displays the authentication type and key for
each OSPF interface.
Displays the configured timers for each OSPF
interface.
show ip ospf lsdb {adv-rtr
<ip_address> | area
Displays the link state database for the selected
parameter.
<ip_address> | detail
<ip_address> | lsa-type
<type> | lsid <ip_address>}
show ip ospf neighbor
show ip ospf redistribute
show ip ospf stats
Displays information about the router’s OSPF
neighbors.
Displays information about OSPF redistribution
policies.
Displays OSPF statistics.
TIP: To clear OSPF statistics counters, execute
the clear ip ospf counters command.
show ip ospf timer interface
Displays configured OSPF timers.
show ip ospf authentication
interface
Displays interface MD5 authentication keys.
show ip ospf interface
Displays general OSPF interface information.
Displays OSPF virtual link information.
show ip ospf virtual-links
show ip ospf timer virtual-links Displays OSPF transit delay, retransmit interval,
hello interval and retransmit dead interval
information for the virtual interface.
show ip ospf authentication
virtual links
Displays virtual interface MD5 authentication
keys.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 101
Description
Command
show ip ospf virtual-neighbors Displays general information about virtual
neighbors.
show ip ospf host-route
Displays the host IP address and cost for a host
route.
clear ip ospf counters command
The clear ip ospf counters command clears OSPF statistics
counters, including mismatch counters.
TIP: If no VLAN is specified, the command clears OSPF global counters.
Note: The clear ip ospf counters command is applicable only
to the base unit in a stack.
The syntax for the clear ip ospf counters command is:
clear ip ospf counters <1-4094>
where the optional parameter <1-4094> is the VLAN ID.
The clear ip ospf counters command is executed in the
Configuration mode.
Route policy commands
Route policies are a Nortel proprietary improvement on existing routing
schemes. Using existing routing schemes, packets are forwarded based
on routes that have been learned by the router through routing protocols
such as RIP and OSPF or through the introduction of static routes. Route
policies introduce the ability to forward packets based on rule sets created
by the network administrator. These rule sets, or policies, are then applied
to the learned or static routes.
This section describes the configuration and management of route policies
using the Command Line Interface.
ip prefix-list command
The ip prefix-list command is used to configure up to four prefix
lists for use in route policies.
The syntax of the ip prefix-list command is:
ip prefix-list <prefix_name> {<ip_address/mask> [ge
<mask_from>] [le <mask_to>] | name <new_prefix_name>}
The following table describes the parameters for this command.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102 IP Routing Configuration and Management
ip prefix-list parameters
Parameter
Description
The name assigned to the prefix list.
<prefix_name>
<ip_address/mask> The IP address and subnet mask of the prefix list. The
subnet mask is expressed as a value between 0 and 32.
<mask_from>
The subnet range covered by the prefix list from the stated
IP address.
<mask_to>
The subnet range covered by the prefix list to the stated IP
address.
<new_prefix_name> Used to assign a new name to previously configured prefix
list.
The ip prefix-list command is executed in the Global Configuration
mode.
route-map command
The route-map command is used to define route maps used in the
configuration of route policies.
The syntax of the route-map command is:
route-map <map_name> [permit | deny] <sequence_number>
[enable] [match {interface <prefix_list> | next-hop
<prefix_list> | protocol <protocol_name> | route-
source <prefix_list> | route-type <route_type>}] [name
<new_map_name>] [set {injectlist <prefix_list> | mask
<ip_address> | metric <metric_value> | metric-type
<metric_type> | nssa-pbit enable}]
The following table outlines the parameters for this command.
route-map parameters
Field
Description
<map_name>
[permit | deny]
The name associated with this route map.
Specifies the action to be taken when this policy is selected
for a specific route. A value of permit indicates that the
route will be used while deny indicates that the route will
be ignored.
<sequence_numberT>he secondary index value assigned to individual policies
inside a larger policy group.
enable
Indicates whether the policy is enabled. Disabled policies
should not be used for routing.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 103
<prefix_list>
Indicates a previously defined prefix list to be used with the
command. This parameter is used with various options in
this command.
<protocol_name> The name of a protocol to be used. Options are direct, static,
rip, ospf, and any. Multiple protocols can be specified by
using a comma-separated list.
<route_type>
A route type to be used. Options are any, external, external-1,
external-2, internal, and local.
<new_map_name>
A new name to be assigned to a previously configured route
map.
<ip_address>
An IP address and subnet mask to be used.
<metric_value>
Indicates the value of the metric to be used while sending an
update for routes. This is an integer value between 0 and
65535.
<metric_type>
Indicates the metric type for routes to be imported into the
OSPF routing protocol. Options are type1 and type2.
The route-map command is executed in the Global Configuration mode.
ip rip in-policy command
The ip rip in-policy command is used to specify a RIP Accept (In)
policy for an interface. This policy takes the form of a previously configured
route map.
The syntax of the ip rip in-policy command is:
ip rip in-policy <rmap_name>
The <rmap_name> parameter represents the name of a previously
configured route map.
The ip rip in-policy command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
ip rip out-policy command
The ip rip out-policy command is used to specify a RIP Announce
(Out) policy for an interface. This policy takes the form of a previously
configured route map.
The syntax of the ip rip out-policy command is:
ip rip out-policy <rmap_name>
The <rmap_name> parameter represents the name of a previously
configured route map.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104 IP Routing Configuration and Management
The ip rip out-policy command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) commands
The Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) is designed to eliminate
the single point of failure that can occur when the single static default
gateway router for an end station is lost.
This section describes the CLI commands used to configure VRRP.
router vrrp enable command
The router vrrp enable command is used to globally enable VRRP
on a switch.
The syntax of the router vrrp enable command is:
router vrrp enable
The router vrrp enable command is executed in the Global
Configuration mode.
no router vrrp enable command
The no router vrrp enable command is used to globally disable
VRRP on a switch.
The syntax of the no router vrrp enable command is:
no router vrrp enable
The no router vrrp enable command is executed in the Global
Configuration mode.
router vrrp command
The router vrrp command is used to place the switch into Router
Configuration mode for the purposes of VRRP configuration.
The syntax of the router vrrp command is:
router vrrp
The router vrrp command is executed in the Global Configuration mode.
ping-virtual-address enable command
The ping-virtual-address enable command is used to enable ICMP
echo replies from VRRP associated addresses.
The syntax of the ping-virtual-address enable command is:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 105
ping-virtual-address enable
The ping-virtual-address enable command is executed in the
Router Configuration mode.
no ping-virtual-address enable command
The no ping-virtual-address enable command is used to disable
ICMP echo replies from VRRP associated addresses.
The syntax of the no ping-virtual-address enable command is:
no ping-virtual-address enable
The no ping-virtual-address enable command is executed in the
Router Configuration mode.
send-trap enable command
The send-trap enable command is used to enable the sending of
SNMP notifications after virtual router state changes.
The syntax of the send-trap enable command is:
send-trap enable
The send-trap enable command is executed in the Router Configuration
mode.
no send-trap enable command
The no send-trap enable command is used to disable the sending of
SNMP notifications after virtual router state changes.
The syntax of the no send-trap enable command is:
no send-trap enable
The no send-trap enable command is executed in the Router
Configuration mode.
ip vrrp address command
The ip vrrp address command is used to associated an IP address
with a virtual router ID.
The syntax of the ip vrrp address command is:
ip vrrp address <vr_id> <ip_address>
The <vr_id> parameter represents the virtual router being configured.
This is a value between 1 and 255. The <ip_address> parameter
represents the address to be used in the association.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106 IP Routing Configuration and Management
The ip vrrp address command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
no ip vrrp address command
The no ip vrrp address command is used to delete the association of
an IP address with a virtual router ID.
The syntax of the no ip vrrp address command is:
no ip vrrp address <vr_id> <ip_address>
The <vr_id> parameter represents the virtual router being configured.
This is a value between 1 and 255. The <ip_address> parameter
represents the address to be used in the association.
The no ip vrrp address command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
ip vrrp action command
The ip vrrp action command is used to define the action this interface
will take when a holddown timer threshold has been reached.
The syntax of the ip vrrp action command is:
ip vrrp action <vr_id> {none | preempt}
The <vr_id> parameter represents the virtual router being configured. If
none is selected as the action, no action is taken when a holddown timer
threshold is reached. If preempt is selected as the action, the holddown
timer is cancelled.
The ip vrrp action command is executed in the Interface Configuration
mode.
ip vrrp adver-int command
The ip vrrp adver-int command is used to set the VRRP
advertisement interval.
The syntax of the ip vrrp adver-int command is:
ip vrrp <vr_id> adver-int <interval>
The <vr_id> parameter represents the virtual router being configured. The
<interval> parameter represents the advertisement interval in seconds.
This is an integer value between 1 and 255.
The ip vrrp adver-int command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 107
ip vrrp backup-master command
The ip vrrp backup-master command is used to enable the VRRP
backup / master functionality.
The syntax of the ip vrrp backup-master command is:
ip vrrp <vr_id> backup-master enable
The <vr_id> parameter represents the virtual router being configured.
The ip vrrp backup-master command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
no ip vrrp backup-master command
The no ip vrrp backup-master command is used to disable the
VRRP backup / master functionality.
The syntax of the no ip vrrp backup-master command is:
no ip vrrp <vr_id> backup-master enable
The <vr_id> parameter represents the virtual router being configured.
The no ip vrrp backup-master command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
ip vrrp critical-ip command
The ip vrrp critical-ip command is used to enable the VRRP
critical IP functionality.
The syntax of the ip vrrp critical-ip command is:
ip vrrp <vr_id> critical-ip enable
The <vr_id> parameter represents the virtual router being configured.
The ip vrrp critical-ip command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
no ip vrrp critical-ip command
The no ip vrrp critical-ip command is used to disable the VRRP
critical IP functionality.
The syntax of the no ip vrrp critical-ip command is:
no ip vrrp <vr_id> critical-ip enable
The <vr_id> parameter represents the virtual router being configured.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108 IP Routing Configuration and Management
The no ip vrrp critical-ip command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
ip vrrp critical-ip-addr command
The ip vrrp critical-ip-addr command is used to set the IP
address used with the VRRP critical IP functionality.
The syntax of the ip vrrp critical-ip-addr command is:
ip vrrp <vr_id> critical-ip-addr <ip_address>
The <vr_id> parameter represents the virtual router being configured. The
<ip_address> parameter represents the IP address to be used.
The ip vrrp critical-ip-addr command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
ip vrrp enable command
The ip vrrp enable command is used to enable the virtual router.
The syntax of the ip vrrp enable command is:
ip vrrp <vr_id> enable
The <vr_id> parameter represents the virtual router being configured.
The ip vrrp enable command is executed in the Interface Configuration
mode.
no ip vrrp enable command
The no ip vrrp enable command is used to disable the virtual router.
The syntax of the no ip vrrp enable command is:
no ip vrrp <vr_id> enable
The <vr_id> parameter represents the virtual router being configured.
The no ip vrrp enable command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
ip vrrp fast-adv command
The ip vrrp fast-adv command is used to enable the VRRP fast
advertisement functionality.
The syntax of the ip vrrp fast-adv command is:
ip vrrp <vr_id> fast-adv enable
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 109
The <vr_id> parameter represents the virtual router being configured.
The ip vrrp fast-adv command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
no ip vrrp fast-adv command
The no ip vrrp fast-adv command is used to disable the VRRP fast
advertisement functionality.
The syntax of the no ip vrrp fast-adv command is:
no ip vrrp <vr_id> fast-adv enable
The <vr_id> parameter represents the virtual router being configured.
The no ip vrrp fast-adv command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
ip vrrp fast-adv-int command
The ip vrrp fast-adv-int command is used to set the interval used in
the VRRP fast advertisement functionality.
The syntax of the ip vrrp fast-adv-int command is:
ip vrrp <vr_id> fast-adv-int <interval>
The <vr_id> parameter represents the virtual router being configured. The
<interval> parameter represents the fast advertisement interval. This is
a value in milliseconds between 200 and 1000.
The ip vrrp fast-adv-int command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
ip vrrp holddown-timer command
The ip vrrp holddown-timer command is used to set the VRRP
holddown timer.
The syntax of the ip vrrp holddown timer command is:
ip vrrp <vr_id> holddown-timer <timer_value>
The <vr_id> parameter represents the virtual router being configured. The
<timer_value> parameter represents the holddown timer value. This is a
value in seconds between 0 and 21600.
The ip vrrp holddown-timer command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110 IP Routing Configuration and Management
ip vrrp priority command
The ip vrrp priority command is used to assign a priority to a virtual
router.
The syntax of the ip vrrp priority command is:
ip vrrp <vr_id> priority <priority_value>
The <vr_id> parameter represents the virtual router being configured.
The <priority_value> parameter represents the priority assigned to the
virtual router. This is a value between 1 and 255.
The ip vrrp priority command is executed in the Interface
Configuration mode.
show ip vrrp command
The show ip vrrp command is used to display VRRP configuration
information and statistics.
The syntax of the show ip vrrp command is:
show ip vrrp [address] [interface]
Use either the address key word to display address-related VRRP
information or interface to display interface-related VRRP information.
Using neither displays basic global configuration information.
The command is executed in the Global Configuration mode.
Equal Cost MultiPath (ECMP) commands
The Equal Cost MultiPath (ECMP) feature allows routers to determine equal
cost paths to the same destination prefix. The multiple paths can be used
for load sharing of traffic and allows faster convergence to other active paths
in case of network failure. This section describes the CLI commands used
to configure ECMP on the switch.
Note: ECMP is only supported on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch
5520 and 5530. ECMP will work in a mixed stack but will not run on any
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5510 units in the stack.
rip maximum-path command
The rip maximum-path command is used to configure the number of
ECMP paths allotted for the Routing Information Protocol (RIP).
The syntax of the rip maximum-path command is:
rip maximum-path <path_count>
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 111
The <path_count> parameter represents the number of ECMP paths
allotted. This is a value between 1 and 4. The default is 1.
The rip maximum-path command is executed in the Global Configuration
mode.
ospf maximum-path command
The ospf maximum-path command is used to configure the number of
ECMP paths allotted for the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol.
The syntax of the ospf maximum-path command is:
ospf maximum-path <path_count>
The <path_count> parameter represents the number of ECMP paths
allotted. This is a value between 1 and 4. The default is 1.
The ospf maximum-path command is executed in the Global
Configuration mode.
maximum-path command
The maximum-path command is used to configure the number of ECMP
paths allotted to static routes.
The syntax of the maximum-path command is:
maximum-path <path_count>
The <path_count> parameter represents the number of ECMP paths
allotted. This is a value between 1 and 4. The default is 1.
The maximum-path command is executed in the Global Configuration
mode.
show ecmp command
The show ecmp command is used to display ECMP path information.
The syntax of the show ecmp command is:
show ecmp
The show ecmp command is executed in the User EXEC Configuration
mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Brouter port commands
A brouter port is a single-port VLAN that can route IP packets as well as
bridge all non-routable traffic. The following section describes the CLI
commands used to configure and manage brouter ports on the Nortel
Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series.
brouter command
The brouter command is used to create and manage a brouter port on
the switch.
The syntax of the brouter command is:
brouter [port <brouter_port>] vlan <vid> subnet
<ip_address/mask> [routing enable]
The following table describes the parameters of this command.
brouter parameters
Parameter
Description
<brouter_port>
The brouter port. When creating a brouter this is the port
to be used for the new brouter. When modifying a brouter
this is the port of the existing brouter to modify.
<vid>
The VLAN ID of the brouter. When creating a new brouter
port, this is the VLAN ID assigned to the brouter port.
<ip_address/mask> The IP address and subnet mask of the brouter. When
creating a new brouter, this is the IP address and subnet
mask assigned. When modifying a brouter port, this is the
new IP address and subnet mask to assign to the port.
The subnet mask portion is expressed as a value between
0 and 32.
The brouter command is executed in the FastEthernet IEEE 802.3
Interface Configuration mode.
no brouter command
The no brouter command is used to disable or remove a brouter from
the switch.
The syntax of the no brouter command is:
no brouter [port <brouter_port>] [routing enable]
The <brouter_port> parameter represents the brouter port to disable
or remove from the switch.
The no brouter command is executed in the FastEthernet IEEE 802.3
Interface Configuration mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 113
show brouter command
The show brouter command is used to display information about the
brouter configuration on the switch.
The syntax of the show brouter command is:
show brouter [port <brouter_port>]
Usage of the optional port <brouter_port> port narrows the scope the
command to the specified port. Omission of this parameter displays all ports.
The show brouter command is executed in the User EXEC mode.
UDP broadcast forwarding commands
UDP broadcast forwarding is a general mechanism for selectively forwarding
limited UDP broadcasts received on an IP interface to a configured IP
address. This section outlines the CLI commands used to configure and
manage UDP broadcast forwarding on the switch.
ip forward-protocol udp command
The ip forward-protocol udp command is used to configure and
manage UDP broadcast forwarding on the switch.
The syntax of the ip forward-protocol udp command is:
ip forward-protocol udp [<forwarding_port>
<protocol_name>] [portfwdlist <forward_list> <udp_port>
<destination_ip_address> name <list_name>]
The following table outlines the parameters of this command.
ip forward-protocol udp parameters
Parameter
Description
<forwarding_port>
<protocol_name>
<forward_list>
<udp_port>
The port on which the UDP protocol operates.
The name of the UDP protocol to be forwarded.
A list of ports to which the UDP protocol will be forwarded.
The UDP port on which the forwarding originates.
<destination_ip_addressT>he destination IP address of the UDP forwarding.
<list_name> The name of the forwarding list being created.
The ip forward-protocol udp command is executed in the Global
Configuration mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114 IP Routing Configuration and Management
clear ip forward-protocol udp counters command
The clear ip forward-protocol udp counters command clears
the UDP broadcast counters on each interface.
TIP: Stacking - the clear ip forward-protocol udp counters
command is executed only on the base unit in a stack.
The syntax for the clear ip forward-protocol udp counters
command is:
clear ip forward-protocol udp counters <1-4094>
where the parameter <1-4094> specifies the VLAN ID.
The clear ip forward-protocol udp counters command is
executed in the Configuration mode.
ip forward-iprotocol udp command (interface mode)
The ip forward-protocol udp command command, in interface
mode, is used to attach and configure UDP broadcast forwarding lists on
VLAN interfaces (only one list can be attached to a VLAN interface at a time).
The syntax of the ip forward-protocol udp command (interface
mode) command is:
ip forward-protocol udp [vlan <vlan_id> portfwdlist
<forward_list> broadcastmask <bcast_mask> maxttl <max_ttl>]
The following table outlines the parameters of this command:
ip forward-protocol udp (interface mode) parameters
Parameter
Description
<vlan_id>
The VLAN ID of the interface on which the UDP
forwarding list will be attached.
<forward_list>
<bcast_mask>
The ID of the UDP forwarding list which will be attached
to the selected VLAN interface.
The 32 bit mask which will be used by the selected
VLAN interface to take forwarding decisions based on the
destination IP address of the incoming UDP broadcast
traffic.
<max_ttl>
The TTL value which will be inserted in the IP headers of
the forwarded UDP packets coming out of the selected
VLAN interface.
The ip forward-protocol udp command (interface mode)
command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 115
DHCP relay commands
This section covers the commands that are used to configure and manage
DHCP on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series, both globally
on the switch and on each VLAN.
Setting DHCP
To set DHCP, perform the following procedure:
Step Action
1
2
Enable DHCP globally.
Set a VLAN IP as the DHCP agent and a Server IP as the DHCP
server, to configure an ip dhcp-relay forwarding path.
3
4
5
Set the mode for each DHCP forwarding path.
Enable DHCP for the specific VLAN.
Enable the DHCP broadcast message for the specific VLAN.
—End—
ip dhcp-relay command
The ip dhcp-relay command is used to enable DHCP relay. DHCP
relay is enabled by default.
The syntax for this command is:
ip dhcp-relay
This command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode.
This command has no parameters.
no ip dhcp-relay command
The no ip dhcp-relay command is used to disable DHCP relay.
The syntax for this command is:
no ip dhcp-relay
This command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode.
This command has no parameters.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116 IP Routing Configuration and Management
show ip dhcp-relay counters command
The show ip dhcp-relay counters command displays the current
DHCP relay counters configuration globally on the Nortel Ethernet Routing
Switch 5500 Series. This includes the number of requests and the number
of replies.
The syntax for the show ip dhcp-relay counters command is:
show ip dhcp-relay counters
The show ip dhcp-relay counters command is executed in the User
EXEC command mode.
ip dhcp-relay clear-counters
The ip dhcp-relay clear-counters command clears the counters
for an interface.
The syntax for this command is:
ip dhcp-relay clear-counters
This command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode
while editing a VLAN only.
This command has no parameters.
show ip dhcp-relay fwd-path command
The show ip dhcp-relay fwd-path command displays the current
DHCP relay forward path configuration globally on the Nortel Ethernet
Routing Switch 5500 Series which includes the interface, the server, the
state (enabled or disabled), and the mode.
The syntax for the show ip dhcp-relay fwd-path command is:
show ip dhcp-relay fwd-path
The show ip dhcp-relay fwd-path command is executed in the User
EXEC command mode.
ip dhcp-relay fwd-path command
The ip dhcp-relay fwd-path command sets the mode for the specific
forwarding path DHCP relay settings globally on the Nortel Ethernet Routing
Switch 5500 Series.
The syntax for the ip dhcp-relay fwd-path command is:
ip dhcp-relay fwd-path <A.B.C.D> <O.P.Q.R>
The following table outlines the parameters for this command.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 117
ip dhcp-relay fwd-path parameters
Parameter
Description
<A.B.C.D>
Enter the IP address of the DHCP agent on the
forwarding path to be configured.
<O.P.Q.R>
Enter the IP address of the DHCP server on the
forwarding path to be configured.
The ip dhcp-relay fwd-path command is executed in the Global
Configuration command mode.
The DHCP relay feature is enabled by default, and the default mode is
BootP-DHCP.
ip dhcp-relay fwd-path enable command
The ip dhcp-relay fwd-path enable command enables the specific
DHCP forwarding path globally on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500
Series.
The syntax for the ip dhcp-relay fwd-path enable command is:
ip dhcp-relay fwd-path <A.B.C.D> <O.P.Q.R> enable
The following table describes the parameters for this command.
ip dhcp-relay fwd-path enable parameters
Parameter
Description
<A.B.C.D>
Enter the IP address of the DHCP agent on the
forwarding path to be enabled.
<O.P.Q.R>
Enter the IP address of the DHCP server on the
forwarding path to be enabled.
The ip dhcp-relay fwd-path enable command is executed in the
Global Configuration command mode.
The DHCP feature is enabled by default.
ip dhcp-relay fwd-path disable command
The ip dhcp-relay fwd-path disable command disables the
specific DHCP forwarding path globally on the Nortel Ethernet Routing
Switch 5500 Series.
The syntax for the ip dhcp-relay fwd-path disable command is:
ip dhcp-relay fwd-path <A.B.C.D> <O.P.Q.R> disable
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118 IP Routing Configuration and Management
The following table describes the parameters for this command.
ip dhcp-relay fwd-path disable parameters
Parameter
Description
<A.B.C.D>
Enter the IP address of the DHCP agent on the
forwarding path to be disabled.
<O.P.Q.R>
Enter the IP address of the DHCP server on the
forwarding path to be disabled.
The ip dhcp-relay fwd-path disable command is executed in the
Global Configuration command mode.
The DHCP relay feature is enabled by default.
no ip dhcp-relay fwd-path command
The no ip dhcp-relay fwd-path command removes the specified
DHCP forwarding path globally on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500
Series.
The syntax for the no ip dhcp-relay fwd-path command is:
no ip dhcp-relay fwd-path <A.B.C.D> <O.P.Q.R>
The following table outlines the parameters for this command.
no ip dhcp-relay fwd-path parameters
Parameter
Description
<A.B.C.D>
Enter the IP address of the DHCP agent on the
forwarding path to be removed.
<O.P.Q.R>
Enter the IP address of the DHCP server on the
forwarding path to be removed.
The no ip dhcp-relay fwd-path command is executed in the Global
Configuration command mode.
show vlan dhcp-relay command
The show vlan dhcp-relay command displays the current DHCP relay
forward path configuration for each VLAN on the Nortel Ethernet Routing
Switch 5500 Series.
The syntax for the show vlan dhcp-relay command is:
show vlan dhcp-relay [<1-4094>]
Substitute <1-4094> above with the VLAN ID of the VLAN to be displayed.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the CLI 119
The show vlan dhcp-relay command is executed in the User EXEC
command mode.
ip dhcp-relay command
The ip dhcp-relay command allows configures DHCP relay settings
on a VLAN.
The syntax for the ip dhcp-relay command is:
ip dhcp-relay [min-sec <0-65535>] [mode {bootp | dhcp |
bootp_dhcp}]
The following table outlines the parameters for this command.
ip dhcp-relay parameters
Parameter
Description
min-sec <0-65535>
Enter the minimum number of seconds to wait
between receiving the DHCP packet and forwarding
it to the destination device. The default is 0.
Enter the type of DHCP packets this VLAN supports:
mode {bootp | dhcp |
bootp_dhcp}
•
•
•
bootp - Supports BootP only
dhcp - Supports DHCP only
bootp_dhcp - Supports both BootP and DHCP
The ip dhcp-relay command is executed in the Interface Configuration
command mode.
no ip dhcp-relay command
The no ip dhcp-relay command disables DHCP relay on a VLAN.
The syntax for the no ip dhcp-relay command is:
no ip dhcp-relay
The no ip dhcp-relay command is executed in the Interface
Configuration command mode.
ip dhcp-relay broadcast command
The ip dhcp-relay broadcast command enables DHCP relay
broadcast on a VLAN.
The syntax for the ip dhcp-relay broadcast command is:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120 IP Routing Configuration and Management
ip dhcp-relay broadcast
The ip dhcp-relay broadcast command is executed in the Interface
Configuration command mode.
no ip dhcp-relay broadcast command
The no ip dhcp-relay broadcast command disables DHCP relay
broadcast on a VLAN.
The syntax for the no ip dhcp-relay broadcast command is:
no ip dhcp-relay broadcast
The no ip dhcp-relay broadcast command is executed in the
Interface Configuration command mode.
IP routing configuration examples
This section provides configuration examples for common IP routing tasks
using the Command Line Interface (CLI). For conceptual information about
the IP routing topics covered in this section, refer to "An Introduction to IP
Note: In many of the following configuration examples, a brouter port
is used to create a connection to the network core. This practice does
not imply that a brouter port is the only means through which a core
connection can be established. The use of a brouter port is only one of
many ways to create such a connection.
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) configuration
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series provides the following
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) features:
•
•
•
Default ARP aging
Static ARP entries
Proxy ARP
Static ARP entries can be used to solve the following instances encountered
on many networks:
•
•
To communicate with a device that does not respond to an ARP request.
To prevent an existing ARP entry from aging out.
When a static ARP entry is configured, both the IP address and MAC
address of a device is assigned to a physical port. This includes the VLAN
number if the physical port is associated with a VLAN.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 121
This section contains the following topics:
•
•
•
•
Changing the default ARP aging time
The default ARP aging time value is set for 360 minutes. To change this
default aging time use the ip arp timeout command. This command
has the following syntax:
ip arp timeout <minutes>
The <minutes> parameter represents the number of minutes to set for the
new timeout setting. This is a value in the range of 5 to 360.
The following is an example of setting a new default aging time:
5530-24TFD(config)# ip arp timeout 180
The new setting can be confirmed by using the show ip routing
command.
Adding a static ARP entry to a VLAN
To add a static ARP entry to a VLAN, use the ip arp command. This
command has the following syntax:
ip arp ip <ip_address> mac <mac_address> port <port_number>
vid <vid_number>
The following table outlines the parameters of this command
ip arp parameters
Parameter
ip_address
mac_address
port_number
vid_number
Description
The IP address of the entry.
The MAC address of the entry.
The slot/port number of the brouter port.
The VLAN ID of the entry.
The following is an example of adding a static ARP entry to a VLAN:
5530-24TFD(config)# ip arp 10.1.1.23 00:00:11:43:54:23 1/48
vid 1
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Adding a static ARP entry to a brouter port
To add a static ARP entry to a brouter port, use the ip arp command. This
command has the following syntax:
ip arp ip <ip_address> mac <mac_address> port <port_number>
vid <vid_number>
The following table outlines the parameters of this command
ip arp parameters
Parameter
ip_address
mac_address
port_number
vid_number
Description
The IP address of the entry.
The MAC address of the entry.
The slot/port number of the brouter port.
The VLAN ID of the entry.
The following is an example of adding a static ARP entry to a brouter port:
5530-24TFD(config)# ip arp 172.2.2.13 00:00:98:22:33:44 1/46
vid 1
Deleting a static ARP entry
To delete a static ARP entry, use the no ip arp command. This command
has the following syntax:
no ip arp ip <ip_address>
The <ip_address> parameter represents the IP address of the entry to
delete.
The following is an example of deleting a static ARP entry:
5530-24TFD(config)# no ip arp 172.2.2.13
Note: Deleting a static ARP entry is applicable to both VLANs and
brouter ports.
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) configuration
This section provides examples of the common RIP configuration tasks and
includes the CLI commands used to create the configuration.
RIP configuration tasks
RIP is configured on a VLAN or brouter port basis. This section presents the
steps in RIP configuration and accompanying command syntax examples.
To configure RIP on an interface, perform the following steps:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 123
Note: The command examples below demonstrate the configuration
of RIP on a VLAN.
Step Action
1
Configure the interface, assign an IP address and add ports.
5530-24TFD# enable
5530-24TFD#config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan create 51 name "VLAN-51" type
port
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 51
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip address 10.10.1.1
255.255.255.0
5530-24TFD(config-if)# exit
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan members add 51 8-9
2
Enable RIP.
Note: Perform one of the following command sequences to
enable RIP.
5530-24TFD# enable
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 51
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip enable
OR
5530-24TFD# enable
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# router rip
5530-24TFD(config-router)# network 10.10.1.1
3
4
5
Disable Supply RIP Updates, if required.
5530-24TFD# enable
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 51
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip supply disable
Disable Listen for RIP Updates, if required.
5530-24TFD# enable
5530-24TFD#config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)#interface vlan 51
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip listen disable
Enable Default Route Supply, if a default route exists in the route
table.
5530-24TFD# enable
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 51
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124 IP Routing Configuration and Management
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip default-supply enable
6
Enable Default Route Listen to add a default route to the route table,
if advertised from another router.
5530-24TFD# enable
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 51
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip default-listen enable
7
8
9
Add the In or Out Route Policy.
5530-24TFD# enable
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 51
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip out-policy map1
Enable Triggered Updates, if required.
5530-24TFD# enable
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 51
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip triggered enable
Configure the cost of the link by entering a value of 1 to 15; where 1
is the default.
5530-24TFD# enable
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 51
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip cost 2
10
11
12
Configure send mode parameters.
5530-24TFD# enable
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# router rip enable
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 51
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip send version rip2
Configure receive mode parameters.
5530-24TFD# enable
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# router rip enable
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 51
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip receive version rip2
Enable poison reverse.
Note: RIP Split Horizon is enabled by default. By setting the
Poison parameter to true, Poison Reverse is enabled. If Poison
Reverse is enabled, the RIP updates sent to a neighbor from
which a route is learned are poisoned with a metric of 16.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 125
Therefore, the receiver neighbor ignores this route because
the metric 16 indicates infinite hops in the network. These
mechanisms prevent routing loops.
5530-24TFD# enable
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 51
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip poison enable
—End—
Configuring RIP
This section describes the set up of a basic RIP configuration between two
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series routers. As illustrated in the
following diagram, router ERS2 is configured between router ERS1 and
the edge of the network core. Two VLANs (VLAN 2 and 3) are associated
with ERS1.
RIP configuration example
For the purposes of this example:
•
ERS1 is an edge switch with two configured VLANs, VLAN 2 and 3. It is
connected to aggregation switch ERS2 on ports 1/47 and 1/48.
•
Port 2/7 of ERS2 is configured as a brouter port with RIP to connect
to the network core.
Use the following procedure to configure router ERS 2 and reproduce the
illustrated RIP configuration:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Step Action
1
2
Configure tagging on ports 1/47 and 1/48. Tagging is required to
support multiple VLANs on the same interface.
5530-24TFD# enable
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan ports 1/47-48 tagging tagAll
Configure ERS2 for VLAN 2 access.
a. Create a port-based VLAN (VLAN 2) using spanning tree group
1 and include ports 1/47 and 1/48 in VLAN 2.
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan create 2 name "VLAN-2" type
port
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan member add 2 port 1/47-48
b. Assign the IP address 10.1.20.2/24 to VLAN 2.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 2
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip address 10.1.20.2
255.255.255.0
c. Enable RIP for VLAN 2 and disable RIP supply and listen. RIP
supply and listen are not required because no router is attached
to VLAN 2.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 2
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip enable
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip supply disable
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip listen disable
3
Configure ERS2 for VLAN 3 access.
a. Create a port-based VLAN (VLAN 3) using spanning tree group
1 and include ports 1/47 and 1/48 in VLAN3.
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan create 3 name "VLAN-3" type
port
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan member add 3 port 1/47-48
b. Assign the IP address 10.1.30.2/24 to VLAN 3.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 3
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip address 10.1.30.2
255.255.255.0
c. Enable RIP for VLAN 3 and disable RIP supply and listen. RIP
supply and listen are not required because no router is attached
to VLAN 3.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 3
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip enable
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip supply disable
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 127
5530-24TFD(config-if)#ip rip listen disable
4
Configure brouter port 2/7 on ERS2.
a. Assign the IP address 10.1.1.1/30 to port 2/7 using brouter
VLAN 2090.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface FastEthernet 2/7
5530-24TFD(config-if)# brouter vlan 2090 subnet
10.1.1.1/30
Note: Usage of the brouter command above requires the
usage of Variable Length Subnetting. Usage of a dotted
decimal subnet mask is not allowed.
b. Enable RIP on the interface.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface FastEthernet 2/7
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip enable
5
Enable IP routing and RIP globally.
5530-24TFD(config)# ip routing
5530-24TFD(config)# router rip enable
—End—
A list of the commands used to create this configuration can be displayed
using the show running-config command. Using this command on
ERS2 would list the following commands:
! *** VLAN *** !
vlan igmp unknown-mcast-no-flood disable
vlan configcontrol strict
auto-pvid
vlan name 1 "VLAN #1"
vlan create 2 name "VLAN-2" type port
vlan create 3 name "VLAN-3" type port
vlan members 2 1/47-48
vlan members 3 1/47-48
! *** RIP ***
router rip
!
router rip enable
timers basic holddown 120
timers basic timeout 180 update 30 default-metric 8
network 10.1.20.2
network 10.1.30.2
network 10.1.1.1
interface vlan 2
no ip rip listen enable
no ip rip supply enable
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128 IP Routing Configuration and Management
interface vlan 3
no ip rip listen enable
no ip rip supply enable
! *** Brouter Port *** !
interface fastEthernet ALL
brouter port 2/7 vlan 3 subnet 10.1.1.1/30
The following commands can be used to confirm the configuration of RIP
parameters:
Description
Command
show vlan
This command is used to display information about the
currently configured switch VLANs.
show vlan ip
This command is used to display IP address information
about VLANs that have been assigned addresses on the
switch.
show ip rip
This command displays information on the global switch RIP
configuration.
show ip route
This command displays the switch routing table.
show ip rip
interface
This command displays information about the RIP interfaces
present on the switch.
Configuring RIP version 2
When RIP is enabled on an interface, it operates by default in
rip1compatible send mode and rip1orRip2 receive mode. Depending on
configuration requirements, the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
can be configured to operate using RIP version 1 or 2. The configuration
illustrated below demonstrates a Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500
Series switch that has been configured to operate use RIP version 2 only.
Note: This example builds on the previous RIP configuration.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 129
RIPv2 configuration example
Use the following procedure to configure ERS2 to add RIP version 2 to
VLAN 2, VLAN 3, and the brouter port:
Step Action
1
Configure RIP version 2 on VLAN 2. Enable RIP version 2 mode on
the IP address used for VLAN 2.
5530-24TFD# enable
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# router rip enable
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 2
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip send version rip2
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip receive version rip2
2
Configure RIP version 2 on VLAN 3. Enable RIP version 2 mode on
the IP address used for VLAN 3.
5530-24TFD# enable
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# router rip enable
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 3
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip send version rip2
5530-24TFD(config)# router rip enable
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 3
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip receive version rip2
3
Configure RIP version 2 on the brouter port. Enable RIP version 2
mode on the IP address used for the brouter port.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface FastEthernet 2/7
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip enable
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip send version rip2
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130 IP Routing Configuration and Management
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip receive version rip2
—End—
Using RIP accept policies
RIP accept policies are used on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500
Series to selectively accept routes from RIP updates. If no policies are
defined, the default behavior is applied. This default behavior is to add all
learned routes to the route table. RIP accept policies are used to:
•
•
•
Listen to RIP updates only from certain gateways.
Listen only for specific networks.
Assign a specific mask to be included with a network in the routing table
(such as a network summary).
In the configuration illustrated below, the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch
5500 Series (ERS1) is configured with a RIP accept policy. This creates a
single route directed to ERS3 for all networks configured on it. The accept
policy accepts any network from 10.1.240.0 to 10.1.255.0, and creates a
single entry in the routing table on ERS1.
A summary route is calculated by comparing the common bits in the
address range to derive the summary address. For example, if the range of
IP addresses is from 10.1.240.0 to 10.1.255.0:
1. Determine the third octet of the first address: 10.1.240.0 = 1111 0000.
2. Determine the third octet of the ending address: 10.1.255.0 = 1111
1111.
3. Extract the common bits: 240 = 1111 0000 255 = 1111 1111 1111
= 20 bit mask.
Therefore, the network address to use for this example is 10.1.240.0/20
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 131
Accept policy configuration
Use the following steps to recreate the above configuration example:
Step Action
1
Configure the IP prefix list on ERS1.
Create a prefix list named Prefix_1 with an IP range from 10.1.240.0
to 10.1.255.0.
5530-24TFD(config)# ip prefix-list Prefix_1
10.1.240.0/20 ge 20 le 32
2
Configure the route policy named rip_pol_1 with match criteria
using the IP prefix configured in step 1. This injects one route of
10.1.240.0/20 into the route table.
5530-24TFD(config)# route-map rip_pol_1 1
5530-24TFD(config)# route-map rip_pol_1 1 enable
5530-24TFD(config)# route-map rip_pol_1 permit 1 enable
5530-24TFD(config)# route-map rip_pol_1 permit 1 match
network Prefix_1
5530-24TFD(config)# route-map rip_pol_1 permit 1
set-injectlist Prefix_1
3
Add the route policy created in step 2 to both RIP core ports.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface FastEthernet 2/7
5530-24TFD(config-if)# brouter vlan 2090 subnet
10.1.1.1/30
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip enable
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip in-policy rip_pol_1
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
132 IP Routing Configuration and Management
5530-24TFD(config)# interface FastEthernet 2/8
5530-24TFD(config-if)# brouter vlan 2091 subnet
10.1.1.5/30
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip enable
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip in-policy rip_pol_1
—End—
The show running-config command is used to display the current
configuration of a switch. Using this command on the above configuration
would yield the following results:
rip_pol_1
! *** Route Policies *** !
ip prefix-list Prefix_1 10.1.240.0/20 ge 20 le 32
route-map rip_pol_1
route-map rip_pol_1 1 enable
no route-map rip_pol_1 1 match interface
route-map rip_pol_1 1 match metric 0
route-map rip_pol_1 1 match network Prefix_1
no route-map rip_pol_1 1 match next-hop
route-map rip_pol_1 1 match route-type any
no route-map rip_pol_1 match route-source
route-map rip_pol_1 1 set injectlist Prefix_1
route-map rip_pol_1 set mask 0.0.0.0
route-map rip_pol_1 set metric 0
route-map rip_pol_1 set nssa-pbit enable
route-map rip_pol_1 set ip-preference 0
! *** Brouter Port *** !
interface fastEthernet ALL
brouter port 2/7
vlan 2090 subnet 10.1.1.1/30
ip rip in-policy rip_pol_1
brouter port 2/8 vlan 2091 subnet 10.1.1.5/30
ip rip in-policy rip_pol_1
Using RIP announce policies
In the previous configuration example, a RIP accept policy is used on ERS1
to insert a single route into its route table for all networks from ERS3.
Instead of using an accept policy on ERS1, a RIP announce policy on ERS3
could be used to announce a single route to both ERS1 and ERS2 for the
local network range.
To configure the RIP announce policy on ERS3, use the following
configuration steps:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 133
Step Action
1
Configure the IP prefix list on ERS3 named Prefix_1 with the IP
address 10.1.240.0.
5530-24TFD(config)# ip prefix-list Prefix_1
10.1.240.0/20 ge 20 le 32
2
Configure the route policy named Policy_Rip with match criteria
using the IP prefix configured in step 1.
5530-24TFD(config)# route-map rip_pol_1 1
5530-24TFD(config)# route-map rip_pol_1 1 enable
5530-24TFD(config)# route-map rip_pol_1 permit 1 enable
5530-24TFD(config)# route-map rip_pol_1 permit 1
set-injectlist Prefix_1
3
Add the route policy created in step 2 to both RIP core ports.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface FastEthernet 2/1
5530-24TFD(config-if)# brouter vlan 2091 subnet
10.1.1.14/30
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip enable
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip out-policy rip_pol_1
5530-24TFD(config)# interface FastEthernet 2/8
5530-24TFD(config-if)# brouter vlan 2090 subnet
10.1.1.6/30
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip enable
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip out-policy rip_pol_1
—End—
To limit the advertising of routes using the announce policy from the routing
table, a route policy should be created to deny the route. To configure the
RIP announce policy with a limited announce policy on ERS3, use the
following configuration steps:
Step Action
1
Configure the IP prefix list named Prefix_2 with the IP address
10.1.240.0.
5530-24TFD(config)# ip prefix-list Prefix_2
10.1.240.0/20 ge 20 le 20
2
Configure the IP route policy named rip_pol_2 with match criteria
using the IP prefix configured in Step 1.
5530-24TFD(config)# route-map rip_pol_2 deny 1
enable match network Prefix_2
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
134 IP Routing Configuration and Management
5530-24TFD(config)# route-map rip_pol_2 1 match
network Prefix_2
3
Add the Route Policy created in step 2 to both RIP core ports.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface FastEthernet 2/1
5530-24TFD(config-if)# brouter vlan 2091
subnet 10.1.1.14/30
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip enable
5530-24TFD(config-if)#ip rip out-policy rip_pol_2
5530-24TFD(config)# interface FastEthernet 2/8
5530-24TFD(config-if)# brouter vlan 2090
subnet 10.1.1.6/30
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip enable
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip out-policy rip_pol_2
—End—
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) configuration
This section contains examples of common OSPF-related configuration
tasks.
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series supports the following
OSPF standards:
•
•
•
RFC 2328 (OSPF version 2)
RFC 1850 (OSPF Management Information Base)
RFC 2178 (OSPF MD5 cryptographic authentication)
This section provides examples of the common OSPF configuration tasks
and includes the CLI commands used to create the configuration.
configuring an IP OSPF interface
An OSPF interface can be configured on a brouter port or on a VLAN. The
following section demonstrates the creation of the example OSPF interface
illustrated below.
OSPF interface example topology
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 135
To create the OSPF interface illustrated above for router R1, follow this
procedure:
Step Action
1
Configure brouter port OSPF interface.
Configure port 2 as a brouter port with VLAN ID of 2134 and enable
OSPF on this interface.
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# interface fast 2
5530-24TFD(config-if)# brouter port 2 vlan 2134 subnet
10.1.1.21/30
5530-24TFD(config-if)# router ospf
5530-24TFD(config-router)# network 10.1.1.21
2
Configure the VLAN OSPF interface.
Create a port-based VLAN (VLAN 2) using spanning tree group
1, assign IP address 172.3.1.1 to VLAN 2 and enable OSPF on
this interface.
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan create 2 type port
5530-24TFD(config)# spanning-tree stp 1 add-vlan 2
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan member add 2 1
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 2
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip address 172.3.1.1
255.255.255.0
5530-24TFD(config-if)# router ospf
5530-24TFD(config-router)# network 172.3.1.1
3
Assign a router ID to the new interface and enable OSPF globally.
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf
5530-24TFD(config-router)# router-id 1.1.1.1
5530-24TFD(config-router)# exit
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf enable
—End—
OSPF security
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series implementation of OSPF
includes security mechanisms to prevent the OSPF routing domain from
being attacked by unauthorized routers. These security mechanisms
prevent a malicious person from joining an OSPF domain and advertising
false information in its OSPF link state advertisements. Likewise, the
security prevents a misconfigured router from joining an OSPF domain.
Currently there are two security mechanisms supported: simple password
security and Message Digest 5 (MD5) security.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Simple password mechanism The simple password security mechanism
transmits a text password in the OSPF headers. Only routers that contain
the same authentication ID in their OSPF headers can communicate with
each other.
Note: Nortel recommends not using this security mechanism
because the password is stored in plain text and can be read from the
configuration file or from the OSPF packet.
To configure this authentication type on an OSPF interface of VLAN 2 using
the password test1234, use the following commands:
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 2
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip ospf authentication-type simple
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip ospf authentication-key test1234
Message Digest 5 The Message Digest 5 (MD5) mechanism provides
128-bit encrypted authentication based on the RFC 1321 standard. MD5
authentication for OSPF security, makes it very hard for a malicious user
to compute or extrapolate the decrypting codes from the OSPF packets.
Basically, each OSPF packet has a message digest appended to it, which
needs to be matched between sending and receiving routers. The message
digest is calculated on either side, based on the MD5 Key and any padding,
then compared for a match. If the message digest does not meet the match
criteria, the packet is rejected.
Each OSPF interface supports up to 2 keys, identifiable by key ID, to
facilitate a smooth key transition during the rollover process. Only the
selected primary key is used to encrypt the OSPF transmit packets.
The process of key change is as follows:
Note: Assume that all routers already use the same key for
authentication and a new key is required.
1. Add the second key to all routers. The routers will continue to send
OSPF packets encrypted with the old key.
2. Activate the second key on all routers by setting it as the primary key.
Routers will send OSPF packets encrypted with the new key while still
accepting packets using the old key. This is necessary as some routers
will not have activated the new key.
3. Remove the old key when all routers activate the new key.
MD5 configuration example In the configuration example illustrated
below, MD5 is configured between router R1 and R2.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 137
MD5 configuration example
To replicate the above configuration example using the key ID 2 and key
value qwsdf89, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1
Configure MD5 authentication on R1.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 2
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip ospf message-digest-key 2 md5
qwsdf89
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip ospf primary-md5-key 2
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip ospf authentication-type
message-digest
2
Configure MD5 authentication on R2.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 2
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip ospf message-digest-key 2 md5
qwsdf89
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip ospf primary-md5-key 2
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip ospf authentication-type
message-digest
—End—
Configuring OSPF network types
OSPF network types were created to allow OSPF-neighboring between
routers over different types of network infrastructures. With this feature,
each interface can be configured to support the various network types.
In the example configuration illustrated below, VLAN 2 on Nortel Ethernet
Routing Switch 5500 Series R1 is configured for OSPF with the interface
type field value set as passive. Because VLAN 2 is set as passive, OSPF
hello messages are not sent on this segment, although R1 continues to
advertise this interface to the remaining OSPF network.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
138 IP Routing Configuration and Management
OSPF network example
To create the configuration illustrated above for router R1, use the following
commands:
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan create 2 type port
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan mem add 2 1
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 2
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip address 172.3.1.1 255.255.255.0
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip ospf network passive
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series supports the following
types of networks:
•
•
Broadcast - Automatically discovers every OSPF router on the network
by sending OSPF hellos to the multicast group AllSPFRouters
(224.0.0.5). Neighboring is automatic and requires no configuration.
This interface type is typically used in an Ethernet environment.
Passive - Allows interface network to be included in OSPF without
generating LSAs or forming adjacencies. Typically used on an access
network, or on an interface that is used for BGP peering. This also
limits the amount of CPU cycles required to process the OSPF routing
algorithm.
Configuring OSPF areas
In large networks with many routers and networks, the link state database
(LSDB) and routing table can become very large. Large route tables and
link state databases (LSDB) consume memory. The processing of link state
advertisements results in more CPU cycles required to make forwarding
decisions. To help reduce these undesired effects, an OSPF network can
be divided into subdomains called areas. An area is made up of a number
of OSPF routers that have the same area identification.
By dividing a network into multiple areas, a separate LSDB, consisting of
router link state advertisements (LSA) and network LSAs are maintained
for each area. Each router within an area maintains an LSDB only for the
area to which it belongs. For example, the area router LSAs and network
LSAs are not flooded beyond the area borders.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 139
The impact of a topology change is localized to the area in which it occurs.
The only exception to this is for the area border routers, which must
maintain an LSDB for each area to which they belong. Changes in topology
are advertised to the rest of the network by the area border routers by
advertising summary LSAs.
A 32-bit Area ID, expressed in IP address format such as 0.0.0.0 for
0 identifies areas. Area 0 is also known as the backbone area and is
responsible for distributing routing information to all other areas.
If multiple areas are used, they must all be attached to the backbone
through an Area Border Router (ABR), which connects area 0.0.0.0 to the
non-backbone areas.
Normal area A normal area is a collection of routers that use the same
Area-ID that calculates inter-area and external routes through the use of the
following link state advertisements:
•
•
•
Summary LSAs
ASBR-summary LSAs
AS-external LSAs
As illustrated in the following figure, a normal area supports Area Border
Routers (ABRs) and Autonomous System Border Routers (ASBRs).
OSPF normal area
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series automatically becomes an
ABR when more than one area is configured for it and each area has at
least one operational interface. To designate a router as an ASBR, use the
as-boundary-router enable command.
5530-24TFD(config-router)# as-boundary-router enable
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
140 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Stub and Not So Stubby areas Stub areas do not receive advertisements
for external routes (AS-external LSAs, type 5) from an ABR, which reduces
the size of the link state database. Instead, routing to external destinations
from within a stub area is based on the default route that is originated by the
stub area ABR (Summary LSA, type 3).
Import summary can be disabled on a stub area ABR to further prevent
redistribution of summary routes from other areas into the stub area. In this
case, the stub area ABR advertises only default routes into the stub area.
Note: Disabling import summaries is only allowed in the stub area.
As shown in the following figure, a stub area has only one ABR. All packets
that are destined to be forwarded outside the stub area are routed to the
stub areas border exit point, where the ABR first examines the packets
and then forwarded to a destination.
OSPF stub area
Note: Stub areas do not support ASBRs. In all routers attached to the
stub area, the area must be configured as a stub area.
In the configuration example illustrated below, the Nortel Ethernet Routing
Switch 5500 Series R1 is configured in Stub Area 2, and R2 is configured
as a Stub ABR for Area 2.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 141
OSPF stub area example
Note: AS-external LSAs are not flooded into a stub area. Instead, only
one default route to external destinations is distributed into the stub area
by the stub ABR router. The area default cost specifies the cost for
advertising the default route into stub area by the ABR.
Use the procedure outlined below to perform the stub area configuration
illustrated above:
Note: This example assumes that global IP routing has been enabled
on the switch. Global IP routing is enabled on the switch in Global
Configuration mode using the ip routing command.
Step Action
1
Configure router R1.
a. Configure the OSPF interface on R1.
Configure port 2/6 as a brouter port in VLAN 100.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface fast 2/6
5530-24TFD(config-if)# brouter port 2/6 vlan 100
subnet 10.1.1.18/30
b. Configure VLAN 2 on R1.
Create VLAN 2 and assign an IP address to it.
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan create 2 type port
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan mem add 2 1/20
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 2
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip address 172.3.3.1
255.255.255.0
c. Enable OSPF on R1.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
142 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Configure R1 in stub area 2 with the Router-ID 1.1.1.5. Add the
OSPF interfaces to area 2 and enable OSPF on these interfaces.
5530-24TFD(config-router)# router-id 1.1.1.5
5530-24TFD(config-router)# area 0.0.0.2 import
noexternal
5530-24TFD(config-router)# network 10.1.1.18 area
0.0.0.2
5530-24TFD(config-router)# network 172.3.3.1 area
0.0.0.2
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf enable
2
Configure router R2.
a. Configure the OSPF interface on R2.
Configure port 2/6 as a brouter port in VLAN 100.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface fast 2/6
5530-24TFD(config-if)# brouter port 2/6 vlan 100
subnet 10.1.1.17/30
b. Configure the second OSPF interface on R2.
Configure port 2/1 as a brouter port in VLAN 300. Enable OSPF
on this interface.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface fast 2/1
5530-24TFD(config-if)# brouter port 2/1 vlan 300
subnet 10.1.1.22/30
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip ospf enable
c. Enable OSPF on R2.
Configure R2 in stub area 2 with an area default cost of 10.
Disable import summary to prevent R2 from sending summary
LSAs of area 0 into area 2. R2 will originate only summary LSA
for default route into area 2. Note that, by default, OSPF interface
10.1.1.22 is placed into OSPF area 0.0.0.0. Because one
additional area of 0.0.0.2 is added and OSPF interface 10.1.1.17
is added to area 0.0.0.2, R2 automatically becomes a stub ABR.
5530-24TFD(config-router)# router-id 1.1.1.2
5530-24TFD(config-router)# area 0.0.0.2 import
noexternal
5530-24TFD(config-router)# no area 0.0.0.2
import-summary enable
5530-24TFD(config-router)# area 0.0.0.2 default-cost
10
5530-24TFD(config-router)# network 10.1.1.17 area
0.0.0.2
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf enable
—End—
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 143
Not So Stubby Areas (NSSA) Similar to stub areas, the not so stubby
area (NSSA) can also prevent the flooding of AS-External Link State
advertisements into the NSSA by replacing them with a default route.
However, NSSA can also import small stub (non-OSPF) routing domains
into OSPF. This allows the NSSA to import external routes, such as RIP
routes, and then advertise these routes throughout the network.
External routing information is imported into NSSA by using type 7 LSAs.
These LSAs are translated at the NSSA boundary into LSA type 5. The N/P
bit in the type 7 LSA Options field indicates whether the type 7 LSA must be
translated. Only those LSAs with the N/P-bit set are translated.
The NSSA configuration example illustrated below demonstrates a Nortel
Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series configured as a NSSA ASBR router.
NSSA configuration example
To configure the example illustrated above, follow this procedure:
Step Action
1
Configure router R1.
a. Configure the RIP interface on R1.
Configure port 1/20 as a brouter port in VLAN 100 and enable
RIP on this interface.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface fast 1/20
5530-24TFD(config-if)# brouter port 1/20 vlan 100
subnet 20.1.1.2/30
5530-24TFD(config)# router rip
5530-24TFD(config-router)# network 20.1.1.2
b. Enable RIP globally and configure the RIP version 2 interface.
5530-24TFD(config)# router rip enable
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144 IP Routing Configuration and Management
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 100
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip receive version rip2
send version rip2
c. Configure the OSPF interface on R1.
Configure port 2/6 as a brouter port in VLAN 200.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface fast 2/6
5530-24TFD(config-if)# brouter port 2/6 vlan 200
subnet 10.1.1.18/30
d. Enable OSPF on R1.
Configure R1 as an ASBR, assign OSPF Router-ID 1.1.1.5,
create OSPF NSSA area 2, add the OSPF interface 10.1.1.18 to
area 2, and enable OSPF on the interface.
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf
5530-24TFD(config-router)# as-boundary-router enable
5530-24TFD(config-router)# router-id 1.1.1.5
5530-24TFD(config-router)# area 0.0.0.2 import nssa
5530-24TFD(config-router)# network 10.1.1.18 area
0.0.0.2
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf enable
e. Configure a route policy to distribute Direct and OSPF to RIP.
Create a route policy named Rip_Dist that distributes directly
connected and OSPF routes into RIP.
5530-24TFD(config)# route-map Rip_Dist permit 1
enable match protocol direct,ospf set metric-type
type1
f. Apply the Rip_Dist route policy to RIP Out Policy.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 100
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip out-policy Rip_Dist
g. Configure OSPF route distribution to distribute RIP routes as
AS-external LSA type 1.
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf
5530-24TFD(config-router)# redistribute rip enable
metric-type type1
5530-24TFD(config)# ip ospf apply redistribute rip
—End—
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 145
Configuring Area Border Routers (ABR)
Configuration of an OSPF ABR is an automatic process on the Nortel
Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series; no user intervention is required. The
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series automatically becomes an
OSPF ABR when it has operational OSPF interfaces belonging to more
than one area.
In the configuration example below, the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch
5500 Series R1 is automatically configured as an OSPF ABR after it is
configured with an OSPF interface for area 0.0.0.0 and 0.0.0.2.
ABR configuration example
To recreate the illustrated ABR configuration, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Configure an OSPF interface on port 2/6.
Configure port 2/6 as a brouter port in VLAN 100.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface fast 2/6
5530-24TFD(config-if)# brouter port 2/6 vlan 100 subnet
10.1.1.17/30
2
Configure an OSPF interface on port 2/1.
Configure port 2/1 as a brouter port in VLAN 200 and enable OSPF
on this interface.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface fast 2/1
5530-24TFD(config-if)# brouter port 2/1 vlan 200 subnet
10.1.1.22/30
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip ospf enable
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146 IP Routing Configuration and Management
3
Enable OSPF.
Configure R1 as an ABR. Note that, by default, OSPF interface
10.1.1.22 is placed into OSPF area 0.0.0.0. Because one additional
area of 0.0.0.2 is created and OSPF interface 10.1.1.17 is added to
area 0.0.0.2, R1 automatically becomes an ABR.
5530-24TFD(config-router)# router-id 1.1.1.2
5530-24TFD(config-router)# area 0.0.0.2
5530-24TFD(config-router)# network 10.1.1.17
area 0.0.0.2
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf enable
4
Configure area range.
Configure R1 to enclose the two networks (172.3.3.0 and 172.3.4.0)
into an address range entry 172.3.0.0 in area 0.0.0.2. R1 will
generate a single summary advertisement into the backbone for
172.3.0.0 with metric 100.
5530-24TFD(config-router)# area 0.0.0.2 range
172.3.0.0/16 summary-link advertise-mode summarize
advertise-metric 100
—End—
To display the created areas, use the show ip ospf area command.
Usage of this command on the example configuration would yield the
following output:
Area ID: 0.0.0.0
Import Summaries: Yes
Import Type: External
Intra-Area SPF Runs:
Reachable Area Border Routers:
Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers:
Link-State Advertisements:
2
0
0
0
Link-State Advertisements Checksum: 0(0x0)
Area ID: 0.0.0.2
Import Summaries: Yes
Import Type: External
Intra-Area SPF Runs:
Reachable Area Border Routers:
Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers:
Link-State Advertisements:
Link-State Advertisements Checksum: 0(0x0)
2
1
0
0
To display area ranges, use the show ip ospf area-range command.
Usage of this command on the example configuration would yield the
following output:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 147
Area ID
Range Subnet/Mask Range Type
Advertise Mode Metric
----------- ------------------ ------------- -------------- ------
0.0.0.2 172.3.0.0/16 Summary Link Summarize 100
To display ABR status, use the show ip ospf command. Usage of this
command on the example configuration would yield the following output:
Router ID: 1.1.1.2
Admin Status: Enabled
Version Number:
2
Area Border Router Oper Status: True
AS Boundary Router Config Status: False
External Link-State Advertisements:
2
External Link-State Checksum: 45698(0xb282)
Type-of-Service (TOS) Routing Supported: False
Originated Link-State Advertisements:
5
New Link-State Advertisements Received: 34
OSPF Traps: Disabled
Auto Virtual Link Creation: Disabled
SPF Hold-Down Time: 10
RFC 1583 Compatibility: Enabled
Configuring Autonomous System Border Routers (ASBR)
An ASBR is a router that has a connection to another Autonomous System
to distribute any external routes that originated from a protocol into OSPF. A
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series configured as an ASBR can:
•
•
Distribute all OSPF routes to RIP.
Distribute RIP, direct, or static routes to OSPF.
Distributing OSPF routes to RIP and RIP to OSPF using AS-external
LSA Type 1 metrics The configuration example illustrated below, displays
a Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series configured as an ASBR
between an OSPF and RIP version 2 network. In this example, the router
distributes all OSPF routes to the RIP network and all RIP routes to the
OSPF network.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148 IP Routing Configuration and Management
ASBR distribution example
Use the following procedure to replicate the ASBR distribution example:
Step Action
1
Configure RIP.
Configure the RIP interface on R1 by configuring port 1/31 as a
brouter port in VLAN 100 and enabling RIP on this interface.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface fast 1/31
5530-24TFD(config-if)# brouter port 1/31 vlan 100
subnet 10.1.1.41/30
5530-24TFD(config)# router rip
5530-24TFD(config-router)# network 10.1.1.41
2
3
Configure the RIP interface for RIP version 2 mode only.
5530-24TFD(config)# router rip enable
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 100
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip receive version rip2 send
version rip2
Configure the OSPF interface.
Configure port 2/7 as a brouter port in VLAN 200 and enable OSPF
on this interface.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface fast 2/7
5530-24TFD(config-if)# brouter port 2/7 vlan 200 subnet
10.1.1.2/30
5530-24TFD(config-if)# router ospf
5530-24TFD(config-router)# network 10.1.1.2
4
Make R1 the ASBR.
Configure R1 as an ASBR and assign the OSPF Router-ID.
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 149
5530-24TFD(config-router)# as-boundary-router enable
5530-24TFD(config-router)# router-id 1.1.1.3
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf enable
5
Configure OSPF route distribution.
Configure OSPF route distribution to import RIP into OSPF. The
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series distributes the RIP
routes as AS-external LSA (LSA type 5), using external metric type 1.
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf
5530-24TFD(config-router)# redistribute rip enable
metric 10 metric-type type1
5530-24TFD(config)# ip ospf apply redistribute rip
6
7
Configure a route policy.
A route policy is required for OSPF to RIP route redistribution. After
the route policy is created, apply it to the RIP interface. The following
command creates a route policy named allow which distributes both
direct and OSPF interfaces.
5530-24TFD(config)# route-map allow permit 1 enable
match protocol direct,ospf
Apply the route policy to the RIP Out Policy.
The following commands apply the route policy created in step 6 to
RIP interface 10.1.1.41.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 100
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip out-policy allow
—End—
The configuration steps described in the above example distributes all OSPF
routes to RIP. However, there are times when it can be more advantageous
to distribute only a default route to RIP. The following configuration steps
describe how to distribute only a default route to RIP instead of all OSPF
routes to RIP.
To configure R1 to distribute a default route only to RIP, complete the
following steps:
Step Action
1
Configure an IP prefix list with a default route.
The following command creates an IP prefix list named default with
an IP address of 0.0.0.0.
5530-24TFD(config)# ip prefix-list default 0.0.0.0/0
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150 IP Routing Configuration and Management
2
Configure a route policy.
Create a route policy named Policy_Default which distributes
the IP prefix list created in step 1. Note that ospf is selected as
the match-protocol value. This causes the default route to be
advertised through RIP only if OSPF is operational.
5530-24TFD(config)# route-map Policy_Default permit 1
enable match protocol ospf set injectlist default
5530-24TFD(config)# route-map Policy_Default
1 set metric-type type1
3
Apply the route policy to the RIP Out Policy.
Apply the route policy created in step 2 to RIP interface 10.1.1.41.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 100
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip out-policy Policy_Default
—End—
Controlling NSSA external route advertisements
In an OSPF NSSA, the NSSA N/p-bit (in the OSPF hello packets Options
field) is used to tell the ABR which external routes can be advertised to other
areas. When the NSSA N/p-bit is set true, the ABR exports the external
route. This is the default setting for the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500
Series. When the NSSA N/p-bit is not set true, the ABR drops the external
route. A route policy can be created on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch
5500 Series to manipulate the N/ p-bit value.
For example, the illustration below shows a RIP network located in NSSA
2. If advertising the 15.15.15.0/24 network to area 0 is the only desired
action, perform the following tasks:
•
•
•
•
Enable R1 as an OSPF ASBR.
Create NSSA area 0.0.0.2.
Create a route policy to advertise OSPF and direct interfaces to RIP.
Create a route policy to only advertise RIP network 15.15.15.0/24 to
area 0 by using the NSSA N/p-bit.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 151
External route advertisement example
The following procedure outlines the commands used to replicate the above
configuration example:
Step Action
1
Configure the RIP interface.
Configure port 1/20 as a brouter port in VLAN 200 and enables RIP
on this interface.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface fast 1/20
5530-24TFD(config-if)# brouter port 1/20 vlan 200
subnet 20.1.1.2/30
5530-24TFD(config)# router rip
5530-24TFD(config-router)# network 20.1.1.2
2
3
Globally enable RIP and configure a RIP interface for RIP version 2.
5530-24TFD(config)# router rip enable
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 200
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip receive version rip2 send
version rip2
Configure the OSPF interface.
Configure port 2/6 as a brouter port.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface fast 2/6
5530-24TFD(config-if)# brouter port 2/6 vlan 100 subnet
10.1.1.18/30
4
Enable OSPF.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Configure R1 as an ASBR, assign the OSPF Router-ID 1.1.1.5,
create OSPF NSSA area 2, add the OSPF interface 10.1.1.18 to
area 2, and enable OSPF on the interface. Enable ASBR and OSPF
globally.
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf
5530-24TFD(config-router)# router-id 1.1.1.5
5530-24TFD(config-router)# as-boundary-router enable
5530-24TFD(config-router)# area 0.0.0.2 import nssa
5530-24TFD(config-router)# network 10.1.1.18 area
0.0.0.2
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf enable
5
Create a route policy named Rip_Dist that distributes directly
connected and OSPF routes into RIP.
5530-24TFD(config)# route-map Rip_Dist permit 1 enable
match protocol direct,ospf set metric-type type1
6
7
Apply route policy to RIP Out Policy.
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 200
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip rip out-policy Rip_Dist
Add two prefix lists (15net and 14net) that are associated with the
network addresses from the RIP version 2 network.
5530-24TFD(config)# ip prefix-list 15net 15.15.15.0/24
5530-24TFD(config)# ip prefix-list 14net 14.14.14.0/24
8
Create a route policy named P_bit that sets the NSSA N/P-bit only
for the prefix list named 15net.
5530-24TFD(config)# route-map P_bit permit 1 enable
match network 15net set nssa-pbit enable
5530-24TFD(config)# route-map P_bit permit 2 enable
match network 14net
5530-24TFD(config)# no route-map P_bit 2 set nssa-pbit
enable
9
Configure OSPF route distribution to distribute RIP routes as
AS-external LSA Type 1.
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf
5530-24TFD(config-router)# redistribute rip enable
metric-type type1 route-policy P_bit
5530-24TFD(config)# ip ospf apply redistribute rip
—End—
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 153
Configuring a multi-area complex
The multi-area complex configuration example described in this section
uses five Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series devices (R1 to R5) in
a multi-area configuration.
Many of the concepts and topology descriptions that are used in this
example configuration are described in the previous sections of this chapter.
The concepts shown in those examples are combined in this example
configuration to show a real world topology example with command
descriptions.
Multi-area complex example
For this configuration example, the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500
Series devices R1 through R5 are configured as follows:
•
•
•
R1 is an OSPF ABR that is associated with OSPF Area 0 and 3.
R2 is an OSPF Stub ABR for OSPF Area 2 and ABR to OSPF Area 3.
R3 is an OSPF ASBR and is configured to distribute OSPF to RIP and
RIP to OSPF.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154 IP Routing Configuration and Management
•
•
•
R4 is an OSPF internal router in Area 3.
R5 is an internal OSPF stub router in Area 2.
All interfaces used for this configuration are ethernet, therefore the
OSPF interfaces are broadcast.
•
•
The interface priority value on R5 is set to 0, therefore R5 cannot
become a designated router (DR).
Configure the OSPF Router Priority so that R1 becomes the DR (priority
of 100) and R2 becomes backup designated router (BDR) with a priority
value of 50.
Stub and NSSA areas are used to reduce the LSDB size by excluding
external LSAs. The stub ABR advertises a default route into the stub area
for all external routes.
The following list outlines the commands used to create the illustrated
configuration. A similar listing could be provided by using the show
running-config command.
1. R1 configuration commands
! *** STP (Phase 1) *** !
spanning-tree stp 2 create
spanning-tree stp 3 create
spanning-tree cost-calc-mode dot1d
spanning-tree port-mode normal
spanning-tree stp 1 priority 8000
spanning-tree stp 1 hello-time 2
spanning-tree stp 1 max-age 20
spanning-tree stp 1 forward-time 15
spanning-tree stp 1 tagged-bpdu disable
tagged-bpdu-vid 4001
spanning-tree stp 1 multicast-address 01:80:c2:00:00:00
spanning-tree stp 2 priority 8000
spanning-tree stp 2 hello-time 2
spanning-tree stp 2 max-age 20
spanning-tree stp 2 forward-time 15
spanning-tree stp 2 tagged-bpdu enable
tagged-bpdu-vid 4002
spanning-tree stp 2 multicast-address 01:80:c2:00:00:00
spanning-tree stp 3 priority 8000
spanning-tree stp 3 hello-time 2
spanning-tree stp 3 max-age 20
spanning-tree stp 3 forward-time 15
spanning-tree stp 3 tagged-bpdu enable
tagged-bpdu-vid 4003
spanning-tree stp 3 multicast-address 01:80:c2:00:00:00
! *** VLAN *** !
vlan configcontrol autopvid
auto-pvid
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 155
vlan name 1 "VLAN #1"
vlan create 102 name "VLAN #102" type port
vlan create 103 name "VLAN #103" type port
vlan ports 1-24 tagging unTagAll filter-untagged-frame
disable filter-unregistered-frames enable priority 0
vlan ports 25-26 tagging tagAll filter-untagged-frame
disable filter-unregistered-frames enable priority 0
vlan members 1 24-26
vlan members 102 1-2
vlan members 103 7-8
vlan ports 1-2 pvid 102
vlan ports 3-6 pvid 1
vlan ports 7-8 pvid 103
vlan ports 9-26 pvid 1
vlan igmp unknown-mcast-no-flood disable
vlan igmp 1 snooping disable
vlan igmp 1 proxy disable robust-value 2
query-interval 125
vlan igmp 102 snooping disable
vlan igmp 102 proxy disable robust-value 2
query-interval 125
vlan igmp 103 snooping disable
vlan igmp 103 proxy disable robust-value 2
query-interval 125
vlan mgmt 1
! *** MLT (Phase 1) *** !
no mlt
mlt 1 name "Trunk #1" enable member 7-8 learning normal
mlt 1 learning normal
mlt 1 bpdu all-ports
mlt 1 loadbalance basic
mlt 2 name "Trunk #2" enable member 1-2 learning normal
mlt 2 learning normal
mlt 2 bpdu all-ports
mlt 2 loadbalance basic
! *** STP (Phase 2) *** !
spanning-tree stp 1 add-vlan 1
spanning-tree stp 2 add-vlan 102
spanning-tree stp 3 add-vlan 103
spanning-tree stp 2 enable
spanning-tree stp 3 enable
interface FastEthernet ALL
spanning-tree port 24-26 learning normal
spanning-tree port 1-2 stp 2 learning normal
spanning-tree port 7-8 stp 3 learning normal
spanning-tree port 24-26 cost 1 priority 80
spanning-tree port 1-2 stp 2 cost 1 priority 80
spanning-tree port 7-8 stp 3 cost 1 priority 80
spanning-tree bpdu-filtering port 1-26 timeout 120
no spanning-tree bpdu-filtering port 1-26
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156 IP Routing Configuration and Management
enable
exit
! *** MLT (Phase 2) *** !
mlt spanning-tree 1 stp 3 learning normal
mlt spanning-tree 2 stp 2 learning normal
! *** L3 *** !
no ip directed-broadcast enable
ip routing
interface vlan 102
ip address 10.1.1.21 255.255.255.252 2
ip dhcp-relay min-sec 0 mode bootp_dhcp
no ip dhcp-relay broadcast
ip dhcp-relay
exit
interface vlan 103
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.252 3
ip dhcp-relay min-sec 0 mode bootp_dhcp
no ip dhcp-relay broadcast
ip dhcp-relay
exit
ip arp timeout 360
ip dhcp-relay
ip blocking-mode none
! *** OSPF *** !
router ospf enable
router ospf
router-id 1.1.1.1
no as-boundary-router enable
no trap enable
timers basic holddown 10
rfc1583-compatibility enable
default-cost ethernet 100
default-cost fast-ethernet 10
default-cost gig-ethernet 1
default-cost ten-gig-ethernet 1
area 0.0.0.3 import external
area 0.0.0.3 import-summaries enable
exit
enable
configure terminal
interface vlan 103
ip ospf area 0.0.0.3
ip ospf network broadcast
ip ospf priority 100
ip ospf authentication-type none
ip ospf mtu-ignore enable
no ip ospf advertise-when-down enable
ip ospf transmit-delay 1
ip ospf retransmit-interval 5
ip ospf hello-interval 10
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 157
ip ospf dead-interval 40
ip ospf enable
exit
interface vlan 102
ip ospf area 0.0.0.0
ip ospf network broadcast
ip ospf priority 100
ip ospf authentication-type none
ip ospf mtu-ignore enable
no ip ospf advertise-when-down enable
ip ospf enable
exit
2. R2 configuration commands
! ! *** STP (Phase 1) *** !
spanning-tree stp 2 create
spanning-tree cost-calc-mode dot1d
spanning-tree port-mode normal
spanning-tree stp 1 priority 8000
spanning-tree stp 1 hello-time 2
spanning-tree stp 1 max-age 20
spanning-tree stp 1 forward-time 15
spanning-tree stp 1 tagged-bpdu disable
tagged-bpdu-vid 4001
spanning-tree stp 1 multicast-address 01:80:c2:00:00:00
spanning-tree stp 2 priority 8000
spanning-tree stp 2 hello-time 2
spanning-tree stp 2 max-age 20
spanning-tree stp 2 forward-time 15
spanning-tree stp 2 tagged-bpdu enable
tagged-bpdu-vid 4002
spanning-tree stp 2 multicast-address 01:80:c2:00:00:00
! *** VLAN *** !
vlan configcontrol autopvid
auto-pvid
vlan name 1 "VLAN #1"
vlan create 100 name "VLAN #100" type port
vlan create 101 name "VLAN #101" type port
vlan create 102 name "VLAN #102" type port
vlan ports 1-2 tagging tagAll filter-untagged-frame
disable filter-unregistered-frames enable priority 0
vlan ports 3-6 tagging unTagAll filter-untagged-frame
disable filter-unregistered-frames enable priority 0
vlan ports 7-8 tagging tagAll filter-untagged-frame
disable filter-unregistered-frames enable priority 0
vlan ports 9-26 tagging unTagAll filter-untagged-frame
disable filter-unregistered-frames enable priority 0
vlan members 1 1-26
vlan members 100 5-6
vlan members 101 7-8
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158 IP Routing Configuration and Management
vlan members 102 1-2
vlan ports 1-2 pvid 102
vlan ports 3-4 pvid 1
vlan ports 5-6 pvid 100
vlan ports 7-8 pvid 101
vlan ports 9-26 pvid 1
vlan igmp unknown-mcast-no-flood disable
vlan igmp 1 snooping disable
vlan igmp 1 proxy disable robust-value 2
query-interval 125
vlan igmp 100 snooping disable
vlan igmp 100 proxy disable robust-value 2
query-interval 125
vlan igmp 101 snooping disable
vlan igmp 101 proxy disable robust-value 2
query-interval 125
vlan igmp 102 snooping disable
vlan igmp 102 proxy disable robust-value 2
query-interval 125
vlan mgmt 1
! *** MLT (Phase 1) *** !
no mlt
mlt 1 name "Trunk #1" enable member 7-8 learning normal
mlt 1 learning normal
mlt 1 bpdu all-ports
mlt 1 loadbalance basic
mlt 2 name "Trunk #2" enable member 1-2 learning normal
mlt 2 learning normal
mlt 2 bpdu all-ports
mlt 2 loadbalance basic
mlt 5 name "Trunk #5" enable member 5-6 learning normal
mlt 5 learning normal
mlt 5 bpdu all-ports
mlt 5 loadbalance basic
! *** STP (Phase 2) *** !
spanning-tree stp 1 add-vlan 1
spanning-tree stp 1 add-vlan 100
spanning-tree stp 2 add-vlan 101
spanning-tree stp 2 add-vlan 102
spanning-tree stp 2 enable
interface FastEthernet ALL
spanning-tree port 1-26 learning normal
spanning-tree port 1-2,7-8 stp 2 learning normal
spanning-tree port 1-26 cost 1 priority 80
spanning-tree port 1-2,7-8 stp 2 cost 1 priority 80
spanning-tree bpdu-filtering port 1-26 timeout 120
no spanning-tree bpdu-filtering port 1-26 enable
exit
! *** MLT (Phase 2) *** !
mlt spanning-tree 1 stp 1 learning normal
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 159
mlt spanning-tree 1 stp 2 learning normal
mlt spanning-tree 2 stp 1 learning normal
mlt spanning-tree 2 stp 2 learning normal
mlt spanning-tree 5 stp 1 learning normal
! *** L3 *** !
no ip directed-broadcast enable
ip routing
interface vlan 1
ip dhcp-relay min-sec 0 mode bootp_dhcp
no ip dhcp-relay broadcast
ip dhcp-relay
exit
interface vlan 100
ip address 10.1.1.17 255.255.255.252 2
ip dhcp-relay min-sec 0 mode bootp_dhcp
no ip dhcp-relay broadcast
ip dhcp-relay
exit
interface vlan 101
ip address 10.1.1.9 255.255.255.252 3
ip dhcp-relay min-sec 0 mode bootp_dhcp
no ip dhcp-relay broadcast
ip dhcp-relay
exit
interface vlan 102
ip address 10.1.1.22 255.255.255.252 4
ip dhcp-relay min-sec 0 mode bootp_dhcp
no ip dhcp-relay broadcast
ip dhcp-relay
exit
ip arp timeout 360
ip dhcp-relay
ip blocking-mode none
! *** ECMP *** !
maximum-path 1 rip
maximum-path 1 ospf
maximum-path 1
! *** OSPF *** !
router ospf enable
router ospf
router-id 1.1.1.2
no as-boundary-router enable
no trap enable
timers basic holddown 10
rfc1583-compatibility enable
default-cost ethernet 100
default-cost fast-ethernet 10
default-cost gig-ethernet 1
default-cost ten-gig-ethernet 1
area 0.0.0.2 import noexternal
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160 IP Routing Configuration and Management
default-cost 1
area 0.0.0.2 import-summaries enable
area 0.0.0.3 import external
area 0.0.0.3 import-summaries enable
exit
enable
configure terminal
interface vlan 101
ip ospf area 0.0.0.3
ip ospf network broadcast
ip ospf priority 50
ip ospf authentication-type none
ip ospf mtu-ignore enable
no ip ospf advertise-when-down enable
ip ospf transmit-delay 1
ip ospf retransmit-interval 5
ip ospf hello-interval 10
ip ospf dead-interval 40
ip ospf enable
exit
interface vlan 100
ip ospf area 0.0.0.2
ip ospf network broadcast
ip ospf priority 50
ip ospf authentication-type none
ip ospf mtu-ignore enable
no ip ospf advertise-when-down enable
ip ospf enable
exit
interface vlan 102
ip ospf area 0.0.0.0
ip ospf network broadcast
ip ospf priority 50
ip ospf authentication-type none
ip ospf mtu-ignore enable
no ip ospf advertise-when-down enable
ip ospf enable
exit
interface vlan 1
ip ospf area 0.0.0.0
ip ospf network broadcast
ip ospf priority 1
ip ospf authentication-type none
ip ospf mtu-ignore enable
no ip ospf advertise-when-down enable
no ip ospf enable
exit
3. R3 configuration commands
! *** STP (Phase 1) *** !
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 161
spanning-tree stp 3 create
spanning-tree cost-calc-mode dot1d
spanning-tree port-mode normal
spanning-tree stp 1 priority 8000
spanning-tree stp 1 hello-time 2
spanning-tree stp 1 max-age 20
spanning-tree stp 1 forward-time 15
spanning-tree stp 1 tagged-bpdu disable
tagged-bpdu-vid 4001
spanning-tree stp 1 multicast-address 01:80:c2:00:00:00
spanning-tree stp 3 priority 8000
spanning-tree stp 3 hello-time 2
spanning-tree stp 3 max-age 20
spanning-tree stp 3 forward-time 15
spanning-tree stp 3 tagged-bpdu enable
tagged-bpdu-vid 4003
spanning-tree stp 3 multicast-address 01:80:c2:00:00:00
! *** VLAN *** !
vlan configcontrol automatic
auto-pvid
vlan name 1 "VLAN #1"
vlan create 103 name "VLAN #103" type port
vlan create 104 name "VLAN #104" type port
vlan create 105 name "VLAN #105" type port
vlan create 1001 name "VLAN #1001" type port
vlan ports 1-2 tagging tagAll filter-untagged-frame
disable filter-unregistered-frames enable priority 0
vlan ports 3-6 tagging unTagAll filter-untagged-frame
disable filter-unregistered-frames enable priority 0
vlan ports 7-8 tagging tagAll filter-untagged-frame
disable filter-unregistered-frames enable priority 0
vlan ports 9-26 tagging unTagAll filter-untagged-frame
disable filter-unregistered-frames enable priority 0
vlan members 1 4-6,9,12,15-26
vlan members 103 7-8
vlan members 104 1-2
vlan members 105 13-14
vlan members 1001 10
vlan ports 1-2 pvid 104
vlan ports 3-6 pvid 1
vlan ports 7-8 pvid 103
vlan ports 9 pvid 1
vlan ports 10 pvid 1001
vlan ports 11-12 pvid 1
vlan ports 13-14 pvid 105
vlan ports 15-26 pvid 1
vlan igmp unknown-mcast-no-flood disable
vlan igmp 1 snooping disable
vlan igmp 1 proxy disable robust-value 2
query-interval 125
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162 IP Routing Configuration and Management
vlan igmp 103 snooping disable
vlan igmp 103 proxy disable robust-value 2
query-interval 125
vlan igmp 104 snooping disable
vlan igmp 104 proxy disable robust-value 2
query-interval 125
vlan igmp 105 snooping disable
vlan igmp 105 proxy disable robust-value 2
query-interval 125
vlan igmp 1001 snooping disable
vlan igmp 1001 proxy disable robust-value 2
query-interval 125
vlan mgmt 1
! *** MLT (Phase 1) *** !
no mlt
mlt 1 name "Trunk #1" enable member 7-8 learning normal
mlt 1 learning normal
mlt 1 bpdu all-ports
mlt 1 loadbalance basic
mlt 2 name "Trunk #2" enable member 1-2 learning normal
mlt 2 learning normal
mlt 2 bpdu all-ports
mlt 2 loadbalance basic
mlt 4 name "Trunk #4" enable member 13-14 learning normal
mlt 4 learning normal
mlt 4 bpdu all-ports
mlt 4 loadbalance basic
! *** STP (Phase 2) *** !
spanning-tree stp 1 add-vlan 1
spanning-tree stp 3 add-vlan 103
spanning-tree stp 3 add-vlan 104
spanning-tree stp 1 add-vlan 105
spanning-tree stp 1 add-vlan 1001
spanning-tree stp 3 enable
interface FastEthernet ALL
spanning-tree port 4-6,9,12-26 learning normal
spanning-tree port 1-2,7-8 stp 3 learning normal
spanning-tree port 4-6,9,12-26 cost 1 priority 80
spanning-tree port 1-2,7-8 stp 3 cost 1 priority 80
spanning-tree bpdu-filtering port 1-26 timeout 120
no spanning-tree bpdu-filtering port 1-26 enable
exit
interface FastEthernet ALL
spanning-tree port 10 learning disable
exit
interface FastEthernet ALL
exit
! *** MLT (Phase 2) *** !
mlt spanning-tree 1 stp 3 learning normal
mlt spanning-tree 2 stp 3 learning normal
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 163
mlt spanning-tree 4 stp 1 learning normal
! *** L3 *** !
no ip directed-broadcast enable
ip routing
interface vlan 1
ip dhcp-relay min-sec 0 mode bootp_dhcp
no ip dhcp-relay broadcast
ip dhcp-relay
exit
interface vlan 103
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.252 3
ip dhcp-relay min-sec 0 mode bootp_dhcp
no ip dhcp-relay broadcast
ip dhcp-relay
exit
interface vlan 104
ip address 10.1.1.25 255.255.255.252 4
ip dhcp-relay min-sec 0 mode bootp_dhcp
no ip dhcp-relay broadcast
ip dhcp-relay
exit
interface vlan 105
ip address 20.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 5
ip dhcp-relay min-sec 0 mode bootp_dhcp
no ip dhcp-relay broadcast
ip dhcp-relay
exit
interface vlan 1001
ip address 172.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 2
ip dhcp-relay min-sec 0 mode bootp_dhcp
no ip dhcp-relay broadcast
ip dhcp-relay
exit
ip arp timeout 360
ip dhcp-relay
ip blocking-mode none
! *** Route Policies *** !
route-map Allow permit 1
route-map Allow 1 enable
route-map Allow 1 match protocol direct,ospf
no route-map Allow 1 match interface
route-map Allow 1 match metric 0
no route-map Allow 1 match network
no route-map Allow 1 match next-hop
route-map Allow 1 match route-type any
no route-map Allow 1 match route-source
no route-map Allow 1 set injectlist
route-map Allow 1 set mask 0.0.0.0
route-map Allow 1 set metric 5
route-map Allow 1 set nssa-pbit enable
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164 IP Routing Configuration and Management
route-map Allow 1 set ip-preference 0
! *** OSPF *** !
router ospf enable
router ospf
router-id 1.1.1.3
as-boundary-router enable
no trap enable
timers basic holddown 10
rfc1583-compatibility enable
default-cost ethernet 100
default-cost fast-ethernet 10
default-cost gig-ethernet 1
default-cost ten-gig-ethernet 1
area 0.0.0.0 import external
area 0.0.0.0 import-summaries enable
area 0.0.0.3 import external
area 0.0.0.3 import-summaries enable
redistribute direct metric 10 metric-type
type2 subnets allow
redistribute direct enable
redistribute rip metric 10 metric-type type2 subnets allow
redistribute rip enable
exit
enable
configure terminal
interface vlan 103
ip ospf area 0.0.0.3
ip ospf network broadcast
ip ospf priority 1
ip ospf authentication-type none
ip ospf mtu-ignore enable
no ip ospf advertise-when-down enable
ip ospf transmit-delay 1
ip ospf retransmit-interval 5
ip ospf hello-interval 10
ip ospf dead-interval 40
ip ospf enable
exit
interface vlan 104
ip ospf area 0.0.0.3
ip ospf network broadcast
ip ospf priority 1
ip ospf authentication-type none
ip ospf mtu-ignore enable
no ip ospf advertise-when-down enable
ip ospf enable
exit
interface vlan 105
ip ospf area 0.0.0.0
ip ospf network broadcast
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 165
ip ospf priority 1
ip ospf authentication-type none
ip ospf mtu-ignore enable
no ip ospf advertise-when-down enable
no ip ospf enable
exit
interface vlan 1001
ip ospf area 0.0.0.3
ip ospf network broadcast
ip ospf priority 1
ip ospf authentication-type none
ip ospf mtu-ignore enable
no ip ospf advertise-when-down enable
ip ospf enable
exit
interface vlan 1
ip ospf area 0.0.0.0
ip ospf network broadcast
ip ospf priority 1
ip ospf authentication-type none
ip ospf mtu-ignore enable
no ip ospf advertise-when-down enable
no ip ospf enable
exit
! *** RIP *** !
router rip
router rip enable
timers basic holddown 120
timers basic timeout 180 update 30
default-metric 8
no network 10.1.1.2
no network 10.1.1.25
network 20.1.1.1
no network 172.1.1.1
no network 203.203.100.52
exit
enable
configure terminal
interface vlan 103
no ip rip advertise-when-down enable
no ip rip auto-aggregation enable
no ip rip default-listen enable
no ip rip default-supply enable
ip rip cost 1
ip rip holddown 120
ip rip listen enable
no ip rip poison enable
no ip rip proxy-announce enable
ip rip receive version rip1OrRip2
ip rip send version rip1Comp
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166 IP Routing Configuration and Management
ip rip timeout 180
no ip rip triggered enable
ip rip supply enable
exit
interface vlan 104
no ip rip advertise-when-down enable
no ip rip auto-aggregation enable
no ip rip default-listen enable
no ip rip default-supply enable
ip rip cost 1
ip rip holddown 120
ip rip listen enable
no ip rip poison enable
no ip rip proxy-announce enable
ip rip receive version rip1OrRip2
ip rip send version rip1Comp
ip rip timeout 180
no ip rip triggered enable
ip rip supply enable
exit
interface vlan 105
no ip rip advertise-when-down enable
no ip rip auto-aggregation enable
no ip rip default-listen enable
no ip rip default-supply enable
ip rip cost 1
ip rip holddown 120
ip rip listen enable
ip rip out-policy Allow
no ip rip poison enable
no ip rip proxy-announce enable
ip rip receive version rip1OrRip2
ip rip send version rip1Comp
ip rip timeout 180
no ip rip triggered enable
ip rip supply enable
exit
interface vlan 1001
no ip rip advertise-when-down enable
no ip rip auto-aggregation enable
no ip rip default-listen enable
no ip rip default-supply enable
ip rip cost 1
ip rip holddown 120
ip rip listen enable
no ip rip poison enable
no ip rip proxy-announce enable
ip rip receive version rip1OrRip2
ip rip send version rip1Comp
ip rip timeout 180
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 167
no ip rip triggered enable
ip rip supply enable
exit
interface vlan 1
no ip rip advertise-when-down enable
no ip rip auto-aggregation enable
no ip rip default-listen enable
no ip rip default-supply enable
ip rip cost 1
ip rip holddown 120
ip rip listen enable
no ip rip poison enable
no ip rip proxy-announce enable
ip rip receive version rip1OrRip2
ip rip send version rip1Comp
ip rip timeout 180
no ip rip triggered enable
ip rip supply enable
exit
4. R4 configuration commands
! *** STP (Phase 1) *** !
spanning-tree stp 3 create
spanning-tree cost-calc-mode dot1d
spanning-tree port-mode normal
spanning-tree stp 1 priority 8000
spanning-tree stp 1 hello-time 2
spanning-tree stp 1 max-age 20
spanning-tree stp 1 forward-time 15
spanning-tree stp 1 tagged-bpdu disable
tagged-bpdu-vid 4001
spanning-tree stp 1 multicast-address 01:80:c2:00:00:00
spanning-tree stp 3 priority 8000
spanning-tree stp 3 hello-time 2
spanning-tree stp 3 max-age 20
spanning-tree stp 3 forward-time 15
spanning-tree stp 3 tagged-bpdu enable
tagged-bpdu-vid 4003
spanning-tree stp 3 multicast-address 01:80:c2:00:00:00
! *** VLAN *** !
vlan configcontrol automatic
auto-pvid
vlan name 1 "VLAN #1"
vlan create 101 name "VLAN #101" type port
vlan create 104 name "VLAN #104" type port
vlan ports 1-26 tagging unTagAll filter-untagged-frame
disable filter-unregistered-frames enable priority 0
vlan members 1 3-6,9-26
vlan members 101 7-8
vlan members 104 1-2
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168 IP Routing Configuration and Management
vlan ports 1-2 pvid 104
vlan ports 3-6 pvid 1
vlan ports 7-8 pvid 101
vlan ports 9-26 pvid 1
vlan igmp unknown-mcast-no-flood disable
vlan igmp 1 snooping disable
vlan igmp 1 proxy disable robust-value 2
query-interval 125
vlan igmp 101 snooping disable
vlan igmp 101 proxy disable robust-value 2
query-interval 125
vlan igmp 104 snooping disable
vlan igmp 104 proxy disable robust-value 2
query-interval 125
vlan mgmt 1
! *** MLT (Phase 1) *** !
no mlt
mlt 1 name "Trunk #1" enable member 7-8 learning normal
mlt 1 learning normal
mlt 1 bpdu all-ports
mlt 1 loadbalance basic
mlt 2 name "Trunk #2" enable member 1-2 learning normal
mlt 2 learning normal
mlt 2 bpdu all-ports
mlt 2 loadbalance basic
! *** STP (Phase 2) *** !
spanning-tree stp 1 add-vlan 1
spanning-tree stp 3 add-vlan 101
spanning-tree stp 3 add-vlan 104
spanning-tree stp 3 enable
interface FastEthernet ALL
spanning-tree port 3-6,9-26 learning normal
spanning-tree port 1-2,7-8 stp 3 learning normal
spanning-tree port 3-6,9-26 cost 1 priority 80
spanning-tree port 1-2,7-8 stp 3 cost 1 priority 80
spanning-tree bpdu-filtering port 1-26 timeout 120
no spanning-tree bpdu-filtering port 1-26 enable
exit
! *** MLT (Phase 2) *** !
mlt spanning-tree 1 stp 3 learning normal
mlt spanning-tree 2 stp 3 learning normal
! *** L3 *** !
no ip directed-broadcast enable
ip routing interface vlan 1
ip dhcp-relay min-sec 0 mode bootp_dhcp
no ip dhcp-relay broadcast
ip dhcp-relay
exit
interface vlan 101
ip address 10.1.1.10 255.255.255.252 2
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 169
ip dhcp-relay min-sec 0 mode bootp_dhcp
no ip dhcp-relay broadcast
ip dhcp-relay
exit
interface vlan 104
ip address 10.1.1.26 255.255.255.252 3
ip dhcp-relay min-sec 0 mode bootp_dhcp
no ip dhcp-relay broadcast
ip dhcp-relay
exit
ip arp timeout 360
ip dhcp-relay ip blocking-mode none
! *** OSPF *** !
router ospf enable
router ospf
router-id 1.1.1.4
no as-boundary-router enable
no trap enable
timers basic holddown 10
rfc1583-compatibility enable
default-cost ethernet 100
default-cost fast-ethernet 10
default-cost gig-ethernet 1
default-cost ten-gig-ethernet 1
area 0.0.0.0 import external
area 0.0.0.0 import-summaries enable
area 0.0.0.3 import external
area 0.0.0.3 import-summaries enable
exit
enable
configure terminal
interface vlan 101
ip ospf area 0.0.0.3
ip ospf network broadcast
ip ospf priority 1
ip ospf authentication-type none
ip ospf mtu-ignore enable
no ip ospf advertise-when-down enable
ip ospf transmit-delay 1
ip ospf retransmit-interval 5
ip ospf hello-interval 10
ip ospf dead-interval 40
ip ospf enable
exit
interface vlan 104
ip ospf area 0.0.0.3
ip ospf network broadcast
ip ospf priority 1
ip ospf authentication-type none
ip ospf mtu-ignore enable
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170 IP Routing Configuration and Management
no ip ospf advertise-when-down enable
ip ospf enable
exit
interface vlan 1
ip ospf area 0.0.0.0
ip ospf network broadcast
ip ospf priority 1
ip ospf authentication-type none
ip ospf mtu-ignore enable
no ip ospf advertise-when-down enable
no ip ospf enable
exit
5. R5 configuration commands
! *** STP (Phase 1) *** !
spanning-tree cost-calc-mode dot1d
spanning-tree port-mode normal
spanning-tree stp 1 priority 8000
spanning-tree stp 1 hello-time 2
spanning-tree stp 1 max-age 20
spanning-tree stp 1 forward-time 15
spanning-tree stp 1 tagged-bpdu disable
tagged-bpdu-vid 4001
spanning-tree stp 1 multicast-address 01:80:c2:00:00:00
! *** VLAN *** !
vlan configcontrol autopvid
auto-pvid
vlan name 1 "VLAN #1"
vlan create 100 name "VLAN #100" type port
vlan create 1000 name "VLAN #1000" type port
vlan ports 1-26 tagging unTagAll filter-untagged-frame
disable filter-unregistered-frames enable priority 0
vlan members 1 24-26
vlan members 100 5-6
vlan members 1000 10
vlan ports 1-4 pvid 1
vlan ports 5-6 pvid 100
vlan ports 7-9 pvid 1
vlan ports 10 pvid 1000
vlan ports 11-26 pvid 1
vlan igmp unknown-mcast-no-flood disable
vlan igmp 1 snooping disable
vlan igmp 1 proxy disable robust-value 2
query-interval 125
vlan igmp 100 snooping disable
vlan igmp 100 proxy disable robust-value 2
query-interval 125
vlan igmp 1000 snooping disable
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 171
vlan igmp 1000 proxy disable robust-value 2
query-interval 125
vlan mgmt 1
! *** MLT (Phase 1) *** !
mlt 5 name "Trunk #5" enable member 5-6 learning normal
mlt 5 learning normal
mlt 5 bpdu all-ports
mlt 5 loadbalance basic
! *** STP (Phase 2) *** !
spanning-tree stp 1 add-vlan 1
spanning-tree stp 1 add-vlan 100
spanning-tree stp 1 add-vlan 1000
interface FastEthernet ALL
spanning-tree port 5-6,24-26 learning normal
spanning-tree port 5-6,24-26 cost 1 priority 80
spanning-tree bpdu-filtering port 1-26 timeout 120
no spanning-tree bpdu-filtering port 1-26 enable
exit
interface FastEthernet ALL
spanning-tree port 10 learning disable
exit
! *** MLT (Phase 2) *** !
mlt spanning-tree 5 stp 1 learning normal
! *** L3 *** !
no ip directed-broadcast enable
ip routing interface vlan 1
ip dhcp-relay min-sec 0 mode bootp_dhcp
no ip dhcp-relay broadcast
ip dhcp-relay
exit
interface vlan 100
ip address 10.1.1.18 255.255.255.252 2
ip dhcp-relay min-sec 0 mode bootp_dhcp
no ip dhcp-relay broadcast
ip dhcp-relay
exit
interface vlan 1000
ip address 172.3.3.1 255.255.255.252 3
ip dhcp-relay min-sec 0 mode bootp_dhcp
no ip dhcp-relay broadcast
ip dhcp-relay
exit
ip arp timeout 360
ip dhcp-relay
ip blocking-mode none
! *** OSPF *** !
router ospf enable
router ospf
router-id 1.1.1.5
no as-boundary-router enable
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172 IP Routing Configuration and Management
no trap enable
timers basic holddown 10
rfc1583-compatibility enable
default-cost ethernet 100
default-cost fast-ethernet 10
default-cost gig-ethernet 1
default-cost ten-gig-ethernet 1
area 0.0.0.0 import external
area 0.0.0.0 import-summaries enable
area 0.0.0.2 import noexternal
default-cost 1
area 0.0.0.2 import-summaries enable
exit
enable
configure terminal
interface vlan 100
ip ospf area 0.0.0.2
ip ospf network broadcast
ip ospf priority 0
ip ospf authentication-type none
ip ospf mtu-ignore enable
no ip ospf advertise-when-down enable
ip ospf transmit-delay 1
ip ospf retransmit-interval 5
ip ospf hello-interval 10
ip ospf dead-interval 40
ip ospf enable
exit
interface vlan 1000
ip ospf area 0.0.0.2
ip ospf network broadcast
ip ospf priority 1
ip ospf authentication-type none
ip ospf mtu-ignore enable
no ip ospf advertise-when-down enable
ip ospf enable
exit
interface vlan 1
ip ospf area 0.0.0.0
ip ospf network broadcast
ip ospf priority 1
ip ospf authentication-type none
ip ospf mtu-ignore enable
no ip ospf advertise-when-down enable
no ip ospf enable
exit
The following commands illustrate the status of the routers in the
configuration example. Accompanying each command is the output
matching to the configuration example.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 173
Router R1 Status
show vlan
Id Name
Type Protocol User PID Active IVL/SVL Mgmt
--- --------- ---- -------- -------- ------ ------- ----
1
VLAN #1
Port None
0x0000
Yes
IVL
IVL
IVL
Yes
No
Port Members: 1-2,5-7,9-14,16-17,19-26
2
VLAN #2
Port Members: 3-4,8,18
VLAN #5 Port None
Port None
0x0000
0x0000
Yes
Yes
5
No
Port Members: 15
Total VLANs:3
show vlan ip
=========================================================================
Id ifIndex Address Mask MacAddress Offset Routing
=========================================================================
Primary Interfaces
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
2
5
10001
10002
10005
10.100.111.200 255.255.255.0 00:11:F9:35:84:40 1
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
3.3.3.1
255.255.255.0 00:11:F9:35:84:41 2
255.255.255.0 00:11:F9:35:84:44 5
10.10.10.1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Secondary Interfaces
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
2
2
14096
18190
4.4.4.1
5.5.5.1
255.255.255.0 00:11:F9:35:84:42 3
255.255.255.0 00:11:F9:35:84:43 4
Enabled
Enabled
show ip ospf
Router ID: 1.1.1.1
Admin Status: Enabled
Version Number:
2
Area Border Router Oper Status: True
AS Boundary Router Config Status: False
External Link-State Advertisements:
2
External Link-State Checksum: 49786(0xc27a)
Type-of-Service (TOS) Routing Supported: False
Originated Link-State Advertisements: 427
New Link-State Advertisements Received: 811
OSPF Traps: Disabled
Auto Virtual Link Creation: Disabled
SPF Hold-Down Time: 10
RFC 1583 Compatibility: Enabled
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174 IP Routing Configuration and Management
show ip ospf area
Area ID: 0.0.0.0
Import Summaries: Yes
Import Type: External
Intra-Area SPF Runs: 35
Reachable Area Border Routers:
2
Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers:
Link-State Advertisements: 15
0
Link-State Advertisements Checksum: 551120(0x868d0)
Area ID: 0.0.0.3
Import Summaries: Yes
Import Type: External
Intra-Area SPF Runs: 37
Reachable Area Border Routers:
2
Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers:
Link-State Advertisements: 13
1
Link-State Advertisements Checksum: 454461(0x6ef3d)
show ip ospf interface
Interface: 10.1.1.1
Area ID: 0.0.0.3
Admin State: Enabled
Type: Broadcast
Priority: 100
Designated Router: 10.1.1.1
Backup Designated Router: 10.1.1.2
Authentication Type: None
MTU Ignore: Yes
Advertise When Down: No
Metric Value: 10
Interface: 10.1.1.21
Area ID: 0.0.0.0
Admin State: Enabled
Type: Broadcast
Priority: 100
Designated Router: 10.1.1.21
Backup Designated Router: 10.1.1.22
Authentication Type: None
MTU Ignore: Yes
Advertise When Down: No
Metric Value: 10
show ip ospf neighbor
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 175
Interface Nbr Router ID Nbr IP Address Pri State RetransQLen Perm
--------- ------------- -------------- --- ----- ----------- ----
10.1.1.1 1.1.1.3
10.1.1.21 1.1.1.2
Total OSPF Neighbors:
10.1.1.2
10.1.1.22
1
Full
0
0
Dyn
Dyn
50 Full
2
show ip route
==================================================================
Ip Route
==================================================================
DST
MASK
NEXT
COST VLAN PORT PROT TYPE PRF
------------------------------------------------------------------
172.2.2.0
172.1.1.0
172.3.3.0
20.1.1.0
10.1.1.24
10.1.1.20
10.1.1.16
10.1.1.0
10.1.1.8
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
10.1.1.2 10
10.1.1.2 20
103 T#1
103 T#1
102 T#2
103 T#1
103 T#1
102 ---- C
102 T#2
103 ---- C
103 T#1
O
O
O
O
O
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
DB
IB
DB
IB
120
20
25
120
20
0
25
0
20
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.22 30
255.255.255.0 10.1.1.2 10
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.2 20
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.21
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.22 20
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.1
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.2 30
1
O
1
O
Total Routes: 9
-----------------------------------------------------------------
TYPE Legend: I=Indirect Route, D=Direct Route, A=Alternative Route,
B=Best Route, E=Ecmp Route, U=Unresolved Route, N=Not in HW
Router R2 Status
show vlan
Id Name
Type Protocol User PID Active IVL/SVL Mgmt
--- --------- ---- -------- -------- ------ ------- ----
1
VLAN #1
Port None
0x0000
0x0000
0x0000
0x0000
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
IVL
IVL
IVL
IVL
Yes
No
Port Members: 1-26
100 VLAN #100 Port None
Port Members: 5-6
101 VLAN #101 Port None
Port Members: 7-8
No
102 VLAN #102 Port None
Port Members: 1-2
No
show vlan ip
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Id ifIndex Address
10001
100 10100 10.1.1.17
101 10101 10.1.1.9
102 10102 10.1.1.22
Mask
MacAddress
Offset Routing
1
203.203.100.53 255.255.255.0
00:15:9B:F3:70:40 1
255.255.255.252 00:15:9B:F3:70:41 2
255.255.255.252 00:15:9B:F3:70:42 3
255.255.255.252 00:15:9B:F3:70:43 4
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
show ip ospf
Router ID: 1.1.1.2
Admin Status: Enabled
Version Number:
2
Area Border Router Oper Status: True
AS Boundary Router Config Status: False
External Link-State Advertisements:
2
External Link-State Checksum: 49786(0xc27a)
Type-of-Service (TOS) Routing Supported: False
Originated Link-State Advertisements: 99
New Link-State Advertisements Received: 66
OSPF Traps: Disabled
Auto Virtual Link Creation: Disabled
SPF Hold-Down Time: 10
RFC 1583 Compatibility: Enabled
show ip ospf area
Area ID: 0.0.0.0
Import Summaries: Yes
Import Type: External
Intra-Area SPF Runs:
8
Reachable Area Border Routers:
2
Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers:
Link-State Advertisements: 15
0
Link-State Advertisements Checksum: 551120(0x868d0)
Area ID: 0.0.0.2
Import Summaries: Yes
Import Type: No External
Intra-Area SPF Runs: 10
Reachable Area Border Routers:
Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers:
Link-State Advertisements:
Link-State Advertisements Checksum: 274851(0x431a3)
Stub Metric:
1
0
9
1
Stub Metric Type: OSPF Metric
Area ID: 0.0.0.3
Import Summaries: Yes
Import Type: External
Intra-Area SPF Runs: 13
Reachable Area Border Routers:
2
Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers:
1
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 177
Link-State Advertisements: 13
Link-State Advertisements Checksum: 454461(0x6ef3d)
show ip ospf interface
Interface: 10.1.1.9
Area ID: 0.0.0.3
Admin State: Enabled
Type: Broadcast
Priority: 50
Designated Router: 10.1.1.9
Backup Designated Router: 10.1.1.10
Authentication Type: None
MTU Ignore: Yes
Advertise When Down: No
Metric Value: 10
Interface: 10.1.1.17
Area ID: 0.0.0.2
Admin State: Enabled
Type: Broadcast
Priority: 50
Designated Router: 10.1.1.17
Backup Designated Router: 0.0.0.0
Authentication Type: None
MTU Ignore: Yes
Advertise When Down: No
Metric Value: 10
Interface: 10.1.1.22
Area ID: 0.0.0.0
Admin State: Enabled
Type: Broadcast
Priority: 50
Designated Router: 10.1.1.21
Backup Designated Router: 10.1.1.22
Authentication Type: None
MTU Ignore: Yes
Advertise When Down: No
Metric Value: 10
Interface: 203.203.100.53
Area ID: 0.0.0.0
Admin State: Disabled
Type: Broadcast
Priority:
1
Designated Router: 0.0.0.0
Backup Designated Router: 0.0.0.0
Authentication Type: None
MTU Ignore: Yes
Advertise When Down: No
Metric Value: 10
show ip ospf neighbor
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
178 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Interface Nbr Router ID Nbr IP Address Pri State RetransQLen Perm
--------- ------------- -------------- --- ----- ----------- ----
10.1.1.9 1.1.1.4
10.1.1.17 1.1.1.5
10.1.1.22 1.1.1.1
Total OSPF Neighbors:
10.1.1.10
10.1.1.18
10.1.1.21
1
0
Full
Full
0
0
0
Dyn
Dyn
Dyn
100 Full
3
show ip route
========================================================================
Ip Route
========================================================================
DST
MASK
NEXT
COST VLAN PORT PROT TYPE PRF
------------------------------------------------------------------------
172.3.3.0
172.2.2.0
172.1.1.0
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.18
20 100 T#5
10 101 T#1
30 101 T#1
O
O
O
IB
IB
IB
DB
IB
IB
DB
DB
DB
IB
20
120
20
0
120
20
0
0
0
20
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
10.1.1.10
10.1.1.10
203.203.100.0 255.255.255.0
203.203.100.53
10.1.1.10
1
1
---- C
20.1.1.0
10.1.1.24
10.1.1.20
10.1.1.16
10.1.1.8
10.1.1.0
255.255.255.0
10 101 T#1
20 101 T#1
1 102 ---- C
1 100 ---- C
1 101 ---- C
O
O
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.10
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.22
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.17
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.9
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.10
30 101 T#1
O
Total Routes: 10
------------------------------------------------------------------------
TYPE Legend: I=Indirect Route, D=Direct Route, A=Alternative Route,
B=Best Route,E=Ecmp Route, U=Unresolved Route, N=Not in HW
Router R3 Status
show vlan
Id
Name
Type Protocol User PID Active IVL/SVL Mgmt
--- --------- ---- -------- -------- ------ ------- ----
1
VLAN #1
Port None
0x0000
0x0000
0x0000
0x0000
0x0000
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
IVL
IVL
IVL
IVL
IVL
Yes
No
No
No
No
Port Members: 4-6,9,12,15-26
103 VLAN #103 Port None
Port Members: 7-8
104 VLAN #104 Port None
Port Members: 1-2
105 VLAN #105 Port None
Port Members: 13-14
1001 VLAN #1001 Port None
Port Members: 10
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 179
show vlan ip
Id ifIndex Address
Mask
MacAddress
Offset Routing
1
10001 203.203.100.52 255.255.255.0 00:15:9B:F1:FC:40 1
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
103 10103
104 10104
105 10105
10.1.1.2
10.1.1.25
20.1.1.1
255.255.255.252 00:15:9B:F1:FC:42 3
255.255.255.252 00:15:9B:F1:FC:43 4
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
00:15:9B:F1:FC:44 5
00:15:9B:F1:FC:41 2
1001 11001 172.1.1.1
show ip rip
Default Import Metric:
8
Domain:
HoldDown Time: 120
Queries: 0 Rip: Enabled
Route Changes:
1
Timeout Interval: 180
Update Time: 30
show ip rip interface
IP Address
Enable Send
Receive
Advertise When Down
--------------- ------ -------------- ------------ -------------------
10.1.1.2
10.1.1.25
20.1.1.1
172.1.1.1
false rip1Compatible rip1OrRip2
false rip1Compatible rip1OrRip2
false
false
false
false
false
true
rip1Compatible rip1OrRip2
false rip1Compatible rip1OrRip2
203.203.100.52 false rip1Compatible rip1OrRip2
RIP Dflt Dflt Trigger AutoAgg
IP Address Cost Supply Listen Update Enable Supply Listen Poison Proxy
---------- ---- ------ ------ ------- ------ ------ ------ ------ -----
10.1.1.2
10.1.1.25
20.1.1.1
172.1.1.1
203.203.100.52 1 false false false
IP Address RIP In Policy
1 false false false
1 false false false
1 false false false
1 false false false
false
false
false
false
false
true
true
true
true
true
true
true
true
true
true
false false
false false
false false
false false
false false
-------------- -------------
10.1.1.2
10.1.1.25
20.1.1.1
172.1.1.1
203.203.100.52
IP Address
RIP Out Policy
-------------- --------------
10.1.1.2
10.1.1.25
20.1.1.1
Allow
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180 IP Routing Configuration and Management
172.1.1.1
203.203.100.52
IP Address
Holddown Timeout
--------------- -------- -------
10.1.1.2
10.1.1.25
20.1.1.1
172.1.1.1
120
120
120
120
180
180
180
180
180
203.203.100.52 120
show route-map detail
=================================================================
Route Policy
=================================================================
Name Allow,
Id 1,
Seq 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Match:
enable : enable
mode : permit
match-protocol : direct,ospf
match-interface :
match-metric : 0
match-network :
match-next-hop :
match-route-type : any
match-route-src :
Set:
set-injectlist :
set-mask : 0.0.0.0
set-metric : 5
set-metric-type : type2
set-nssa-pbit : enable
set-metric-type-internal : 0
set-preference : 0
-----------------------------------------------------------------
show ip ospf redistribute
Source Metric Metric Type Subnet
Enabled Route Policy
------ ------ ----------- -------- ------- ------------
Direct 10
RIP 10
Type 2
Type 2
Allow
Allow
True
True
show ip ospf
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 181
Router ID: 1.1.1.3
Admin Status: Enabled
Version Number:
2
Area Border Router Oper Status: False
AS Boundary Router Config Status: True
External Link-State Advertisements:
2
External Link-State Checksum: 49786(0xc27a)
Type-of-Service (TOS) Routing Supported: False
Originated Link-State Advertisements:
9
New Link-State Advertisements Received: 39
OSPF Traps: Disabled
Auto Virtual Link Creation: Disabled
SPF Hold-Down Time: 10
RFC 1583 Compatibility: Enabled
show ip ospf area
Area ID: 0.0.0.0
Import Summaries: Yes
Import Type: External
Intra-Area SPF Runs:
Reachable Area Border Routers:
Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers:
Link-State Advertisements:
Link-State Advertisements Checksum: 0(0x0)
Area ID: 0.0.0.3
1
0
0
1
0
Import Summaries: Yes
Import Type: External
Intra-Area SPF Runs:
4
Reachable Area Border Routers:
2
Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers:
Link-State Advertisements: 13
Link-State Advertisements Checksum: 448840(0x6d948)
show ip ospf
Interface: 10.1.1.2
Area ID: 0.0.0.3
Admin State: Enabled
Type: Broadcast
Priority:
1
Designated Router: 10.1.1.1
Backup Designated Router: 10.1.1.2
Authentication Type: None
MTU Ignore: Yes
Advertise When Down: No
Metric Value: 10
Interface: 10.1.1.25
Area ID: 0.0.0.3
Admin State: Enabled
Type: Broadcast
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Priority:
1
Designated Router: 10.1.1.26
Backup Designated Router: 10.1.1.25
Authentication Type: None
MTU Ignore: Yes
Advertise When Down: No
Metric Value: 10
Interface: 20.1.1.1
Area ID: 0.0.0.0
Admin State: Disabled
Type: Broadcast
Priority:
1
Designated Router: 0.0.0.0
Backup Designated Router: 0.0.0.0
Authentication Type: None
MTU Ignore: Yes
Advertise When Down: No
Metric Value: 10
Interface: 172.1.1.1
Area ID: 0.0.0.3
Admin State: Enabled
Type: Broadcast
Priority:
1
Designated Router: 172.1.1.1
Backup Designated Router: 0.0.0.0
Authentication Type: None
MTU Ignore: Yes
Advertise When Down: No
Metric Value: 10
Interface: 203.203.100.52
Area ID: 0.0.0.0
Admin State: Disabled
Type: Broadcast
Priority:
1
Designated Router: 0.0.0.0
Backup Designated Router: 0.0.0.0
Authentication Type: None
MTU Ignore: Yes
Advertise When Down: No
Metric Value: 10
show ip ospf neighbor
Interface Nbr Router ID Nbr IP Address Pri State RetransQLen Perm
--------- ------------- -------------- --- ----- ----------- ----
10.1.1.2
10.1.1.25 1.1.1.4
1.1.1.1
10.1.1.1
10.1.1.26
100 Full
1 Full
0
0
Dyn
Dyn
Total OSPF Neighbors:
2
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 183
show ip route
========================================================================
Ip Route
========================================================================
DST
MASK
NEXT
COST VLAN PORT PROT TYPE PRF
------------------------------------------------------------------------
172.2.2.0
172.3.3.0
172.1.1.0
20.1.1.0
10.1.1.16
10.1.1.20
10.1.1.24
10.1.1.8
10.1.1.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.1
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.1
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.1
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.25
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.26
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.2
20.1.1.2
2
40
1
105 T#4
103 T#1
1001 ---- C
105 ---- C
103 T#1
103 T#1
104 ---- C
104 T#2
103 ---- C
R
O
IB
IB
DB
DB
IB
IB
DB
IB
DB
100
25
0
172.1.1.1
20.1.1.1
1
0
30
20
1
20
1
O
O
25
25
0
20
0
O
Total Routes: 9
------------------------------------------------------------------------
TYPE Legend: I=Indirect Route, D=Direct Route, A=Alternative Route,
B=Best Route,E=Ecmp Route, U=Unresolved Route, N=Not in HW
Router R4 Status
show vlan
Id
Name
Type Protocol User PID Active IVL/SVL Mgmt
--- --------- ---- -------- -------- ------ ------- ----
1
VLAN #1
Port None
0x0000
0x0000
0x0000
Yes
Yes
Yes
IVL
IVL
IVL
Yes
No
Port Members: 3-6,9-26
101 VLAN #101 Port None
Port Members: 7-8
104 VLAN #104 Port None
Port Members: 1-2
No
show vlan ip
Id ifIndex Address
Mask
MacAddress
Offset Routing
1
10001
203.203.100.54 255.255.255.0
00:15:9B:F2:2C:40 1
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
101 10101
104 10104
10.1.1.10
10.1.1.26
255.255.255.252 00:15:9B:F2:2C:41 2
255.255.255.252 00:15:9B:F2:2C:42 3
show ip ospf
Router ID: 1.1.1.4
Admin Status: Enabled
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Version Number:
2
Area Border Router Oper Status: False
AS Boundary Router Config Status: False
External Link-State Advertisements:
2
External Link-State Checksum: 45698(0xb282)
Type-of-Service (TOS) Routing Supported: False
Originated Link-State Advertisements:
5
New Link-State Advertisements Received: 34
OSPF Traps: Disabled
Auto Virtual Link Creation: Disabled
SPF Hold-Down Time: 10
RFC 1583 Compatibility: Enabled
show ip ospf area
Area ID: 0.0.0.0
Import Summaries: Yes
Import Type: External
Intra-Area SPF Runs:
Reachable Area Border Routers:
Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers:
Link-State Advertisements:
Link-State Advertisements Checksum: 0(0x0)
Area ID: 0.0.0.3
1
0
0
1
0
Import Summaries: Yes
Import Type: External
Intra-Area SPF Runs:
3
Reachable Area Border Routers:
2
Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers:
Link-State Advertisements: 13
Link-State Advertisements Checksum: 409758(0x6409e)
show ip ospf interface
Interface: 10.1.1.10
Area ID: 0.0.0.3
Admin State: Enabled
Type: Broadcast
Priority:
1
Designated Router: 10.1.1.9
Backup Designated Router: 10.1.1.10
Authentication Type: None
MTU Ignore: Yes
Advertise When Down: No
Metric Value: 10
Interface: 10.1.1.26
Area ID: 0.0.0.3
Admin State: Enabled
Type: Broadcast
Priority:
1
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 185
Designated Router: 10.1.1.25
Backup Designated Router: 10.1.1.26
Authentication Type: None
MTU Ignore: Yes
Advertise When Down: No
Metric Value: 10
Interface: 203.203.100.54
Area ID: 0.0.0.0
Admin State: Disabled
Type: Broadcast
Priority:
1
Designated Router: 0.0.0.0
Backup Designated Router: 0.0.0.0
Authentication Type: None
MTU Ignore: Yes
Advertise When Down: No
Metric Value: 10
show ip ospf neighbor
Interface Nbr Router ID Nbr IP Address Pri State
RetransQLen Perm
--------- ------------- --------------- --- --------- ----------- ----
10.1.1.10 1.1.1.2
10.1.1.26 1.1.1.3
Total OSPF Neighbors:
10.1.1.9
10.1.1.25
50 Full
1 Full
0
0
Dyn
Dyn
2
show ip route
========================================================================
Ip Route
========================================================================
DST
MASK
NEXT
COST VLAN PORT PROT TYPE PRF
------------------------------------------------------------------------
172.2.2.0
172.3.3.0
172.1.1.0
20.1.1.0
10.1.1.16
10.1.1.20
10.1.1.24
10.1.1.8
10.1.1.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.9
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.9
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.9
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.26
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.10
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.25
10.1.1.25
10
30
20
10
20
20
1
104 T#2
101 T#1
104 T#2
104 T#2
101 T#1
101 T#1
104 ---- C
101 ---- C
104 T#2
O
O
O
O
O
O
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
DB
DB
IB
120
25
20
120
25
25
0
10.1.1.25
10.1.1.25
1
20
0
20
O
Total Routes: 9
------------------------------------------------------------------------
TYPE Legend: I=Indirect Route, D=Direct Route, A=Alternative Route,
B=Best Route,E=Ecmp Route, U=Unresolved Route, N=Not in HW
Router R5 Status
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186 IP Routing Configuration and Management
show vlan
Id
Name
Type Protocol User PID Active IVL/SVL Mgmt
--- ---------- ---- -------- -------- ------ ------- ----
1
VLAN #1
Port None
0x0000
0x0000
0x0000
Yes
Yes
Yes
IVL
IVL
IVL
Yes
No
Port Members: 24-26
100 VLAN #100 Port None
Port Members: 5-6
1000 VLAN #1000 Port None
Port Members: 10
No
show vlan ip
Id ifIndex Address
Mask
MacAddress
Offset Routing
1
10001
203.203.100.51 255.255.255.0
00:15:9B:F8:1C:40 1
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
100 10100
1000 11000
10.1.1.18
172.3.3.1
255.255.255.252 00:15:9B:F8:1C:41 2
255.255.255.252 00:15:9B:F8:1C:42 3
show ip ospf
Router ID: 1.1.1.5
Admin Status: Enabled
Version Number:
2
Area Border Router Oper Status: False
AS Boundary Router Config Status: False
External Link-State Advertisements:
External Link-State Checksum: 0(0x0)
0
Type-of-Service (TOS) Routing Supported: False
Originated Link-State Advertisements: 48
New Link-State Advertisements Received: 387
OSPF Traps: Disabled
Auto Virtual Link Creation: Disabled
SPF Hold-Down Time: 10
RFC 1583 Compatibility: Enabled
show ip ospf area
Area ID: 0.0.0.0
Import Summaries: Yes
Import Type: External
Intra-Area SPF Runs:
Reachable Area Border Routers:
Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers:
Link-State Advertisements:
3
0
0
0
Link-State Advertisements Checksum: 0(0x0)
Area ID: 0.0.0.2
Import Summaries: Yes
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 187
Import Type: No External
Intra-Area SPF Runs: 11
Reachable Area Border Routers:
1
Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers:
Link-State Advertisements:
Link-State Advertisements Checksum: 274851(0x431a3)
Stub Metric:
0
9
1
Stub Metric Type: OSPF Metric
show ip ospf interface
Interface: 10.1.1.18
Area ID: 0.0.0.2
Admin State: Enabled
Type: Broadcast
Priority:
0
Designated Router: 10.1.1.17
Backup Designated Router: 0.0.0.0
Authentication Type: None
MTU Ignore: Yes
Advertise When Down: No
Metric Value: 10
Interface: 172.3.3.1
Area ID: 0.0.0.2
Admin State: Enabled
Type: Broadcast
Priority:
1
Designated Router: 172.3.3.1
Backup Designated Router: 0.0.0.0
Authentication Type: None
MTU Ignore: Yes
Advertise When Down: No
Metric Value: 10
Interface: 203.203.100.51
Area ID: 0.0.0.0
Admin State: Disabled
Type: Broadcast
Priority:
1
Designated Router: 0.0.0.0
Backup Designated Router: 0.0.0.0
Authentication Type: None
MTU Ignore: Yes
Advertise When Down: No
Metric Value: 10
show ip ospf
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
188 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Interface Nbr Router ID
Nbr IP Address Pri State
RetransQLen Perm
--------- --------------- --------------- --- --------- ----------- ----
10.1.1.18 1.1.1.2
10.1.1.17
50 Full
0
Dyn
Total OSPF Neighbors:
1
show ip route
========================================================================
Ip Route
========================================================================
DST
MASK
NEXT
COST VLAN PORT PROT TYPE PRF
------------------------------------------------------------------------
172.3.3.0
172.1.1.0
10.1.1.16
10.1.1.24
10.1.1.20
10.1.1.8
10.1.1.0
0.0.0.0
255.255.255.252 172.3.3.1
255.255.255.0 10.1.1.17
1
40
1
30
20
20
40
11
1000 ---- C
100 T#5
100 ---- C
DB
IB
DB
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
0
25
0
25
25
25
25
25
O
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.18
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.17
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.17
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.17
255.255.255.252 10.1.1.17
100 T#5
100 T#5
100 T#5
100 T#5
100 T#5
O
O
O
O
O
0.0.0.0
10.1.1.17
Total Routes: 8
------------------------------------------------------------------------
TYPE Legend: I=Indirect Route, D=Direct Route, A=Alternative Route,
B=Best Route,E=Ecmp Route, U=Unresolved Route, N=Not in HW
Diagnosing neighbor state problems
At initial startup, routers transmit hello packets in an attempt to find other
OSPF routers with which form adjacencies. After the hello packets are
received, the routers perform an initialization process, which causes
the routers to transition through various states before the adjacency is
established. The following table lists the states a router can go through
during the process of forming an adjacency.
OSPF neighbor states
Description
Step
State
1
Down
Indicates that a neighbor was configured manually,
but the router did not received any information
from the other router. This state can occur only on
NBMA interfaces.
2
Attempt
On an NBMA interface, this state occurs when
the router attempts to send unicast hellos to any
configured interfaces. The Nortel Ethernet Routing
Switch 5500 Series does not support NBMA type.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 189
3
4
5
6
7
Init
The router received a general hello packet (without
its Router ID) from another router.
2-Way
ExStart
Exchange
Loading
The router received a Hello directed to it from
another router. (The hello contains its Router ID)
Indicates the start of the Master/Slave election
process.
Indicates the link state database (LSDB) is
exchanged
Indicates the processing state of the LSDB for input
into the routing table. The router can request LSA
for missing or corrupt routes.
8
Full
Indicates the normal full adjacency state.
OSPF neighbor state information Neighbor state information can be
accessed by using the show ip ospf neighbor command.
5530-24TFD#show ip ospf neighbor
Interface Nbr Router ID Nbr IP Address Pri State RetransQLen Perm
--------- ------------- -------------- --- ----- ----------- ----
10.1.1.22 1.1.1.1
10.1.1.17 1.1.1.5
10.1.1.9 1.1.1.4
10.1.1.21
10.1.1.18
10.1.1.10
100 Full
0
0
0
Dyn
Dyn
Dyn
0
1
Full
Full
Problems with OSPF occur most often during the initial startup, when the
router cannot form adjacencies with other routers and the state is stuck in
the Init or ExStart/Exchange state.
Init State Problems A router can become stuck in an Init state and not
form adjacencies. There are several possible causes for this problem:
•
•
•
•
Authentication mismatch or configuration problem
Area mismatch for Stub or NSSA
Area ID mismatch
Hello Interval or Dead Interval mismatch
To determine any mismatches in OSPF configuration, use the show ip
ospf ifstats mismatch command.
ExStart/Exchange problems Even though routers can recognize each
other and have moved beyond two way communications, routers can
become stuck in the ExStart/Exchange state.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190 IP Routing Configuration and Management
A mismatch in maximum transmission unit (MTU) sizes between the routers
usually causes this type of problem. For example, one router could be set
for a high MTU size and the other router a smaller value. Depending on the
size of the link state database, the router with the smaller value may not be
able to process the larger packets and thus be stuck in this state. To avoid
this problem, ensure that the MTU size value for both routers match. This
problem is usually encountered during interoperations in networks with
other vendor devices.
Note: The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series automatically
checks for OSPF MTU mismatches.
In the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series, the supported MTU size
for OSPF is 1500 bytes by default. Incoming OSPF database description
(DBD) packets are dropped if their MTU size is greater than this value.
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) configuration
This section describes how to create a basic VRRP configuration on a
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series.
VRRP uses an election process to select a master router that hosts use as
the default gateway. If the master router (the default gateway) fails, the
VRRP backup router automatically replaces the master router and becomes
the new default gateway. In either case, the default gateway IP address and
MAC address does not change, thereby providing transparent operation.
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series can be configured in
a master-master configuration for load-balancing applications that use
Split MultiLink Trunking (SMLT). This configuration allows both switches to
respond to ARPs and forward traffic.
VRRP Priority settings can be configured to select the VRRP master router
for a specified VLAN. The VRRP Priority setting is an integer value, in the
range 1 and 255, where the highest value is used to elect the VRRP master
router. If two or more switches have the same priority value, the switch with
the highest numerical IP address value is selected and becomes the VRRP
master. The host is unaware of the entire process.
When a host sends traffic to a different subnet, it sends an ARP request for
the MAC address of the default gateway. In this case, the Nortel Ethernet
Routing Switch 5500 Series VRRP master router replies with its virtual
MAC address. The benefit of using a virtual MAC address is that, if the
master router fails, the VRRP backup router uses the same virtual MAC
address. The virtual MAC address on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch
5500 Series does not need to be configured. The virtual MAC address is
automatically set as:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 191
00-00-5E-00-01-<VRID>
Where the VRID is an integer value in the range 1 to 255 that represents
the virtual router identification.
The virtual MAC address is assigned when VRRP is configured on a switch
port or VLAN. The following example represents this process:
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan
2
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip vrrp address 199 10.1.20.1
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip vrrp 199 enable
Configuring normal VRRP operation
The following configuration example (illustrated below) shows how to
provide VRRP service for two edge host locations.
VRRP example topology
In this example, the switches have the following duties:
•
•
R1 is the VRRP master for S2
R2 is the VRRP master for S1
In this example, VRRP is enabled with OSPF as the routing protocol on
R1 and R2.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192 IP Routing Configuration and Management
The VRRP priority setting is used to determine which router will become
the VRRP master and which will become the VRRP backup. In instances
where the priority setting is the same for two routers, the higher IP address
becomes the tie breaker. Therefore, it is very important to set the correct
VRRP priority. VRRP fast advertisement will also be enabled in this example
to allow for fast failover detection.
The following procedure outlines the steps necessary to reproduce the
example described above:
Step Action
1
Configure VLAN 2 on router R1.
a. Create VLAN 2 on router R1.
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan create 2 type port
b. Configure the ports for VLAN 2 on R1.
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan members add 2 1/15
c. Configure an IP address for VLAN 2.
Add IP address 10.1.20.2 / 255.255.255.0 to VLAN 2.
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 2
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip address 10.1.20.2
255.255.255.0
d. Configure an OSPF interface for VLAN 2.
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf enable
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf
5530-24TFD(config-router)# network 10.1.20.2
e. Configure VRRP on VLAN 2.
The VRRP VIP address of 10.1.20.1 is added to VLAN 2 using
a VRID of 1.
Note 1: The VRRP priority is not configured here; it is left at
factory default of 100. Instead, the priority setting on router
R2 will be set to a higher value when R2 is configured.
Note 2: Fast advertisement is disabled by default. Fast
advertisement is proprietary to Nortel to support an
advertisement interval from 200 to 1000 milliseconds (ms)
with a default of 200. If fast VRRP advertisement is desired,
enable fast advertisement.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 193
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# router vrrp ena
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 2
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip vrrp address 1 10.1.20.1
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip vrrp 1 enable
2
Configure VLAN 3 on router R1.
a. Configure VLAN 3 on router R1 using spanning tree group 1.
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD# vlan create 3 type port
b. Configure the ports for VLAN 3 on R1.
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan members add 3 1/14
c. Configure an IP address for VLAN 3.
Add IP address 10.1.21.2 / 255.255.255.0 to VLAN 3.
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 3
5530-24TFD(config)# ip address 10.1.21.2
255.255.255.0
d. Configure an OSPF interface for VLAN 3.
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf enable
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf
5530-24TFD(config-router)# network 10.1.21.2
e. Configure VRRP on VLAN 3.
The VRRP VIP address of 10.1.21.1 is added to VLAN 2 using
a VRID of 2.
Note: Fast advertisement is disabled by default. Fast
advertisement is proprietary to Nortel to support an
advertisement interval from 200 to 1000 milliseconds (ms)
with a default of 200. If fast VRRP advertisement is desired,
enable fast advertisement.
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# router vrrp ena
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 3
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip vrrp address 2 10.1.21.1
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip vrrp 2 priority 200
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip vrrp 2 enable
3
Configure VLAN 2 on router R2.
a. Create VLAN 2 on router R2.
5530-24TFD# config terminal
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194 IP Routing Configuration and Management
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan create 2 type port
b. Configure the ports for VLAN 2 on R2.
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan members add 2 1/15
c. Configure an IP address for VLAN 2.
Add IP address 10.1.20.3 / 255.255.255.0 to VLAN 2.
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 2
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip address 10.1.20.3
255.255.255.0
d. Configure an OSPF interface for VLAN 2.
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf enable
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf
5530-24TFD(config-router)# network 10.1.20.3
e. Configure VRRP on VLAN 2.
The VRRP VIP address of 10.1.21.1 is added to VLAN 2 using
a VRID of 1.
Note 1: For this example the VRRP priority value is set to
200. This allows router R2 to be elected as the VRRP master
router.
Note 2: Fast advertisement is disabled by default. Fast
advertisement is proprietary to Nortel to support an
advertisement interval from 200 to 1000 milliseconds (ms)
with a default of 200. If fast VRRP advertisement is desired,
enable fast advertisement.
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# router vrrp ena
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 2
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip vrrp address 1 10.1.20.1
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip vrrp 1 enable
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip vrrp 1 priority 200
4
Configure VLAN 3 on router R2.
a. Configure VLAN 3 on router R2.
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan create 3 type port
b. Configure the ports for VLAN 3 on R1.
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan members add 3 1/14
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 195
c. Configure an IP address for VLAN 3.
Add IP address 10.1.21.3 / 255.255.255.0 to VLAN 3.
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 3
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip address 10.1.21.3
255.255.255.0
d. Configure an OSPF interface for VLAN 3.
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf enable
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf
5530-24TFD(config-router)# network 10.1.21.3
e. Configure VRRP on VLAN 3.
The VRRP VIP address of 10.1.21.1 is added to VLAN 2 using
a VRID of 2.
Note: Fast advertisement is disabled by default. Fast
advertisement is proprietary to Nortel to support an
advertisement interval from 200 to 1000 milliseconds (ms)
with a default of 200. If fast VRRP advertisement is desired,
enable fast advertisement.
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# router vrrp ena
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 3
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip vrrp address 2 10.1.21.1
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip vrrp 2 enable
—End—
After the VRRP configuration has been completed, use the show ip vrrp
and show ip vrrp interface verbose commands to display VRRP
configuration information and statistics.
Configuration command listing This following list is a complete
sequence of the commands used in this configuration:
1. VLAN Configuration for Router R1
config t
vlan create 2 type port
vlan members remove 2 1/1-1/14,2/1-2/8,3/1-3/8
vlan members add 2 1/15 interface
vlan 2 ip address 10.1.20.2 255.255.255.0
router ospf enable
router ospf
network 10.1.20.2
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196 IP Routing Configuration and Management
router vrrp ena
interface vlan 2
ip vrrp address 1 10.1.20.1
ip vrrp 1 enable
vlan create 3 type port
interface vlan 3
ip address 10.1.21.2 255.255.255.0
router ospf enable
router ospf
network 10.1.21.2
router vrrp ena
interface vlan 3
ip vrrp address 2 10.1.21.1
ip vrrp 2 priority 200
ip vrrp 2 enable
2. VLAN Configuration for Router R2
config t
vlan create 2 type port
vlan members remove 2 1/1-1/14,2/1-2/8,3/1-3/8
vlan members add 2 1/15 interface vlan 2
ip address 10.1.20.3 255.255.255.0
router ospf enable
router ospf
network 10.1.20.3
router vrrp ena
interface vlan 2
ip vrrp address 1 10.1.20.1
ip vrrp 1 priority 200
ip vrrp 1 enable
vlan create 3 type port
vlan members remove 3 1/1-1/14,1/15,2/1-2/8,3/1-3/8
vlan members add 3 1/14
interface vlan 3
ip address 10.1.21.3 255.255.255.0
router ospf enable
router ospf
network 10.1.21.3
router vrrp ena
interface vlan 3
ip vrrp address 2 10.1.21.1
ip vrrp 2 enable
Configuring VRRP with SMLT
This configuration example shows how you can provide high availability for
a Layer 2 edge switch feeding into a Layer 3 core. As demonstrated below,
both R1 and R2 switches are configured with a port-based VLAN (VLAN
2) with SMLT and VRRP set to enabled. This topology provides failover
protection and load-balancing.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 197
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series (E1), running in Layer 2
mode, is configured with one port-based VLAN and one MultiLink Trunking
(MLT) group for the aggregate uplink ports. The Nortel Ethernet Routing
Switch 5500 Series switches (R1 and R2) are configured with backup
master enabled so that both switches can reply to ARP.
VRRP with SMLT configuration
The following procedure would be used to recreate the illustrated topology:
Step Action
1
Configure the IST VLAN on R1
a. Configure IST VLAN 3999 on R1
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan create 3999 type port
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 3999
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip address 2.1.1.1
255.255.255.0
b. Configure IST MLT on R1
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# mlt 1 member 2/1-2/2
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan port 2/1-2/2 tagging enable
5530-24TFD(config)# mlt 1 enable
c. Configure the IST and add the IST to VLAN 3999
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# interface mlt 1
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198 IP Routing Configuration and Management
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ist enable peer-ip 2.1.1.2
vlan 3999
2
Configure VRRP and SMLT for access VLAN to E1
a. Configure VLAN 2 on R1
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan create 2 type port
b. Create IP address for VLAN 2
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 2
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip address 10.1.20.2
255.255.255.0
c. Configure the access port for VLAN 2 on R1 and add VLAN 2
to the IST and SMLT groups
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan members add 2
1/48,1/47,2/1,2/2
Note: 2/1 and 2/2 are IST ports. 1/48,1/47 are SMLT ports.
d. Create SMLT on R1
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# mlt 2 member 1/47,1/48
5530-24TFD(config)# mlt 2 enable
5530-24TFD(config)# interface mlt 2
5530-24TFD(config-if)# smlt 1
e. Enable OSPF interface on VLAN 2 of R1
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf enable
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf
5530-24TFD(config-router)# network 10.1.20.2
f. Configure VRRP VIP address for VLAN2 of R1
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# router vrrp ena
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 2
5530-24TFD(config)# ip vrrp address 1 10.1.20.1
5530-24TFD(config)# ip vrrp 1 enable
5530-24TFD(config)# ip vrrp 1 backup-master enable
Note: Fast advertisement is disabled by default. Fast
advertisement is proprietary to Nortel to support an
advertisement interval from 200 to 1000 milliseconds (ms)
with a default of 200. If fast VRRP advertisement is desired,
enable fast advertisement.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 199
3
Configure the IST VLAN for router R2
a. Configure IST VLAN 3999 on R2
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan create 3999 type port
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 3999
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip address 2.1.1.2
255.255.255.0
b. Configure IST MLT on R2
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# mlt 1 member 2/1-2/2
5530-24TFD(config)# mlt 1 enable
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan port 2/1-2/2 tagging enable
c. Configure an IST peer for R2 and add the IST to VLAN 3999
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# interface mlt 1
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ist enable peer-ip 2.1.1.2
vlan 3999
4
Configure VRRP and SMLT for VLAN access to E1
a. Configure VLAN 2 on R2
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan create 2 type port
b. Create an IP address for VLAN 2
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 2
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip address 10.1.20.3
255.255.255.0
c. Configure the access port for VLAN 2 on R2 and add VLAN 2
to the IST and SMLT groups
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# vlan members add 2 1/47, 1/48,
2/1. 2/2
Note: 1/47 and 1/48 are SMLT ports. 2/1 and 2/2 are IST
ports.
d. Create SMLT on R2
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# mlt 2 member 1/47, 1/48
5530-24TFD(config)# mlt 2 enable
5530-24TFD(config)# interface mlt 2
5530-24TFD(config-if)# smlt 1
e. Enable OSPF interface for VLAN 2 on R2
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
200 IP Routing Configuration and Management
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf enable
5530-24TFD(config)# router ospf
5530-24TFD(config-router)# network 10.1.20.3
f. Configure VRRP VIP address for VLAN 2 on R2
5530-24TFD# config terminal
5530-24TFD(config)# router vrrp ena
5530-24TFD(config)# interface vlan 2
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip vrrp address 1 10.1.20.1
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip vrrp 1 enable
5530-24TFD(config-if)# ip vrrp 1 backup-master
enable
Note: Fast Advertisement is disabled by default. Fast
advertisement is proprietary to Nortel to support an
advertisement interval from 200 to 1000 milliseconds (ms)
with a default of 200. If fast VRRP advertisement is desired,
enable fast advertisement.
—End—
Configuration command listing This following list is a complete
sequence of the commands used in this configuration:
1. Configuration for R1
#MLT CONFIGURATION #
config t
mlt 1 member 2/1-2/2
mlt 1 ena
vlan port 2/2-2/2 tagging enable
interface mlt 1
ist enable peer-ip 2.1.1.2 vlan 3999
mlt 2 member 1/48,1/47
mlt 2 enable
interface mlt 2
smlt 1
#VLAN CONFIGURATION #
config t
vlan members remove 1 1/47-1/48,2/1-2/2
vlan create 2 type port
vlan members remove 2 1/1-1/46,2/3-2/8,3/1-3/8
vlan members add 2 1/47-1/48,2/1-2/2
interface vlan 2
ip address 10.1.20.2 255.255.255.0
router ospf enable
router ospf
network 10.1.20.2
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 201
router vrrp ena
interface vlan 2
ip vrrp address 1 10.1.20.1
ip vrrp 1 enable
ip vrrp 1 backup-master enable
vlan create 3999 type port
vlan members remove 3999 1/1-1/47,2/3-2/8,3/1-3/8
vlan members add 3999 2/1-2/2
interface vlan 3999
ip address 2.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
#PORT CONFIGURATION – PHASE II #
config t
mlt spanning-tree 1 stp all learning disable
mlt spanning-tree 2 stp all learning disable
2. Configuration for R2
#MLT CONFIGURATION # config t
mlt 1 member 2/1-2/2
mlt 1 enable
vlan port 2/2-2/2 tagging enable
interface mlt 1
ist enable peer-ip 2.1.1.1 vlan 3999
mlt 2 member 1/48,1/47
mlt 2 enable
interface mlt 2
smlt 1
#VLAN CONFIGURATION #
config t
vlan members remove 1 1/47-1/48,2/1-2/2
vlan create 2 type port
vlan members remove 2 1/1-1/46,2/3-2/8,3/1-3/8
vlan members add 2 1/47-1/48,2/1-2/2
interface vlan 2
ip address 10.1.20.3 255.255.255.0
router ospf enable
router ospf
network 10.1.20.2
router vrrp ena
interface vlan 2
ip vrrp address 1 10.1.20.1
ip vrrp 1 enable
ip vrrp 1 backup-master enable
vlan create 3999 type port
vlan members remove 3999 1/1-1/47,2/3-2/8,3/1-3/8
vlan members add 3999 2/1-2/2
interface vlan 3999
ip address 2.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
#PORT CONFIGURATION – PHASE II #
config t
mlt spanning-tree 1 stp all learning disable
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
202 IP Routing Configuration and Management
mlt spanning-tree 2 stp all learning disable
Configuring VRRP with SLT
The following illustration and configuration file examples demonstrate a
VRRP configuration with SLT.
VRRP with SLT configuration
The following commands would recreate the above configuration:
1. Configuration for R1
#MLT CONFIGURATION #
config t
mlt 1 member 2/1-2/2
mlt 1 enable
vlan port 2/2-2/2 tagging enable
interface mlt 1
ist enable peer-ip 2.1.1.2 vlan 3999
interface fast-Ethernet 1/48
smlt 1
#VLAN CONFIGURATION #
config t
vlan members remove 1 1/48,2/1-2/2
vlan create 2 type port
vlan members remove 2 1/1-1/47,2/3-2/8,3/1-3/8
vlan members add 2 1/47,2/1-2/2
interface vlan 2
ip address 10.1.20.2 255.255.255.0
router ospf enable
router ospf
network 10.1.20.2
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 203
router vrrp ena
interface vlan 2
ip vrrp address 1 10.1.20.1
ip vrrp 1 enable
ip vrrp 1 backup-master enable
vlan create 3999 type port
vlan members remove 3999 1/1-1/47,2/3-2/8,3/1-3/8
vlan members add 3999 2/1-2/2
interface vlan 3999
ip address 2.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
#PORT CONFIGURATION – PHASE II #
config t
mlt spanning-tree 1 stp all learning disable
interface fast-Ethernet 1/48
spanning-tree stp 1 learning disable
2. Configuration for R2
#MLT CONFIGURATION #
config t
mlt 1 member 2/1-2/2
mlt 1 enable
vlan port 2/2-2/2 tagging enable
interface mlt 1
ist enable peer-ip 2.1.1.1 vlan 3999
interface fast-Ethernet 1/48
smlt 1
#VLAN CONFIGURATION #
config t
vlan members remove 1 1/48,2/1-2/2
vlan create 2 type port
vlan members remove 2 1/1-1/47,2/3-2/8,3/1-3/8
vlan members add 2 1/48,2/1-2/2
interface vlan 2
ip address 10.1.20.3 255.255.255.0
router ospf enable
router ospf
network 10.1.20.2
router vrrp ena
interface vlan 2
ip vrrp address 1 10.1.20.1
ip vrrp 1 enable
ip vrrp 1 backup-master enable
vlan create 3999 type port
vlan members remove 3999 1/1-1/47,2/3-2/8,3/1-3/8
vlan members add 3999 2/1-2/2
interface vlan 3999
ip address 2.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
#PORT CONFIGURATION – PHASE II #
config t
mlt spanning-tree 1 stp all learning disable
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
204 IP Routing Configuration and Management
interface fast-Ethernet 1/48
spanning-tree stp 1 learning disable
Equal Cost Multipath (ECMP)
Equal Cost Multipath (ECMP) is an IP feature for load-balancing routed IP
traffic across up to four equal-cost paths for each supported protocol. ECMP
supports OSPF, RIP, and static routes. Some benefits of using ECMP:
•
Supported protocols will rerun when an ECMP path fails, and the other
configured paths will automatically take the load.
•
Load sharing implies better use of network facilities.
ECMP is selected based on the source and destination IP address in the
packet. The hash_control register has a HASH_SELECT field which is set
to 5 (lower CRC-32).
R1 = CRC32 (SIP, DIP)
R2 = R1 & 0x1F(The Least Significant 5 bits are selected)
ecmp_index = R2 % (ecmp_count + 1)
Note: The value ecmp_count above is zero-based in the hardware so
if four paths are present then the value is three. This is why the value
is ecmp_count + 1.
The ECMP traffic distribution algorithm is demonstrated in the following
example:
Consider two network devices, Device 1 at the IP address 192.1.1.3 and
Device 2 at 192.1.1.4. Device 1 send to Device 2 so that 192.1.1.3 is the
source IP address (SIP) and 192.1.1.4 is the destination IP address (Device
2).
To calculate the CRC32 for the example source and destination IP address
noted above, the following calculations would be made:
•
CRC32 polynomial : x ^ 32 + x ^ 28 + x ^ 23 + x ^ 22 + x ^ 16 + x ^ 12 +
x ^ 11 + x ^ 10 + x ^ 8 + x ^ 7 + x ^ 5 + x ^ 4 + x ^ 2 + x ^ 1 + 1
•
•
R1 = CRC32 ( 0xc0010103, 0xc0010104 ) = 0xf474b549
R2 = ( 0xf474b549 & 0x1f ) = 9
If, for the purposes of this example, it is assumed that the ECMP count is 4
(hardware entries 0 though 3), the following calculation is then made:
•
ecmp_index = 9 % ( 4+1 ) = 1
This means that in this example, the second path at hardware index 1 in
the ECMP table will be used.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration examples 205
In the configuration example illustrated below, the following command would
enable two OSPF ECMP paths on router R1:
5530-24TFD(config)#ospf maximum-path 2
ECMP configuration example
Use the following commands to enable ECMP on each of the supported
protocols:
•
•
•
OSPF
ospf maximum-path <path_count>
RIP
rip maximum-path <path_count>
Static Routes
maximum-path <path_count>
In all commands above, the <path_count> parameter represents the
number of ECMP paths allotted. This is a value between 1 and 4. The
default is 1.
Displaying the IP routing table
After ECMP configuration is complete, verify the ECMP paths in the routing
table using the show ip route command. The following example displays
the output for this command:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
206 IP Routing Configuration and Management
========================================================================
Ip Route
========================================================================
DST
MASK
NEXT
COST VLAN PORT PROT TYPE PRF
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.0.0.0
3.3.3.0
4.4.4.0
5.5.5.0
10.10.10.0
0.0.0.0
10.100.111.1
10
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
5
1
19
-
-
-
-
S
C
C
C
C
C
IB
DB
DB
DB
DB
DB
5
0
0
0
0
0
255.255.255.0 3.3.3.1
255.255.255.0 4.4.4.1
255.255.255.0 5.5.5.1
255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1
10.100.111.0 255.255.255.0 10.100.111.200 1
Total Routes: 6
-
------------------------------------------------------------------------
TYPE Legend: I=Indirect Route, D=Direct Route, A=Alternative Route,
B=Best Route,E=Ecmp Route, U=Unresolved Route, N=Not in HW
Paths shown with the letter E in the TYPE column are designated equal-cost
paths. In this example, two routes to IP address 10.1.40.0 and two routes to
IP address 10.1.30.0 are displayed.
Displaying global ECMP configuration
To confirm global ECMP configuration, use the show ecmp command. A
sample output from this command is displayed below:
5530-24TFD# show ecmp
Protocol
--------
static:
rip:
MAX-PATH
--------
1
2
4
ospf:
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager
This section describes the procedures for IP routing configuration using the
Java Device Manager (JDM).
Layer 3 routable VLANs
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series are Layer 3 (L3) switches.
This means that a regular L2 VLAN becomes a routable L3 VLAN if an
IP address and MAC address are attached to the VLAN. When routing is
enabled in L3 mode, every L3 VLAN is capable of routing as well as carrying
the management traffic. The user can use any L3 VLAN instead of the
Management VLAN to manage the switch.
This section covers the functionality in the Java Device Manager used to
make Layer 3 Routable VLANs possible.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 207
Creating a Layer 3 routable VLAN
Note: The creation of a Management VLAN in the JDM requires the
assignment of an IP address to a VLAN. Ensure that IP forwarding is
turned on before proceeding.
To enable IP forwarding on the switch, follow this procedure:
Step Action
1
Open the IP dialog by selecting IP Routing > IP from the Device
Manager menu. The IP dialog opens with the Globals tab selected.
This tab is illustrated below.
IP dialog - Globals tab
2
3
In the Forwarding section, select the forwarding option.
Click Apply.
—End—
With IP forwarding enabled on the switch, the creation of a Layer 3
Routable VLAN can proceed. To create a Layer 3 Routable VLAN, follow
this procedure:
Step Action
1
Open the VLANs screen by selecting VLAN > VLANs from the JDM
menu.
2
3
Select the VLAN for Management VLAN assignment.
Click IP. The IP VLAN screen opens with the IP Address tab
selected. This screen and tab are illustrated below.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208 IP Routing Configuration and Management
IP VLAN screen
The following table describes the IP Address tab fields.
IP Address tab fields
Field
Description
The IP address associated with the selected
VLAN.
IpAddress
NetMask
The subnet mask address.
The IP broadcast address format used on this
interface.
BcastAddrFormat
The size of the largest IP datagram which
this entity can reassemble from fragmented
incoming IP datagrams received on this
interface.
ReasmMaxSize
VlanId
The VLAN number. A value of -1 indicates that
the VLAN ID is ignored.
MacOffset
SecondaryIf
Used to translate the IP address into a MAC
address. The valid range is 1--256.
Indicates whether or not this entry corresponds
to a secondary interface. If the value is false,
then this is the primary IP address, if the value
is true, then this is a secondary IP address.
Note: You can assign 1 primary IP address and
up to 8 secondary IP addresses to a VLAN.
4
Click Insert. The Insert IP Address screen opens. This screen is
illustrated below.
Insert IP Address screen
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 209
5
6
Type the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Mac Address Offset in
the fields provided.
Click Insert.
—End—
IP routing
IP routing tasks are performed in the JDM using the IP screen. To open the
IP screen, select IP Routing > IP from the menu. This screen is illustrated
below.
IP screen
This section outlines the various tabs on this screen and their use in IP
routing configuration.
Globals tab
The Globals tab is used to configure global IP routing information. To
configure this information, follow this procedure:
Step Action
1
Open the IP screen by selecting IP Routing > IP from the menu.
Select the Globals tab. This tab is illustrated below.
2
In the fields provided, enter the necessary configuration information.
The following table outlines the fields on this tab.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
210 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Globals tab fields
Field
Description
Forwarding
Indicates whether the switch is forwarding
datagrams received by it but not addressed to
it. Generally, IP routers forward datagrams but
IP hosts do not (except those source-routed
through the host).
DefaultTTL
Default value inserted into the Time-To-Live
field of the IP header of datagrams originated
at this entity, whenever a TTL value is not
supplied by the transport layer protocol.
Default value is 64.
ReasmTimeout
ARPLifeTime
Maximum number of seconds that received
fragments are held while they await reassembly
at this entity. Default value is 60.
The lifetime in minutes of an ARP entry within
the system.
3
Click Apply.
—End—
Addresses tab
The Addresses tab displays IP information for the switch. To view the
information on this tab, follow this procedure:
Step Action
1
Open the IP screen by selecting IP Routing > IP from the menu.
Select the Addresses tab. This tab is illustrated below.
Addresses tab
The Addresses tab is a read-only tab. Click Refresh to immediately
refresh the information it displays. The fields on this tab are outlined
in the following table.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 211
Addresses tab fields
Field
Description
IfIndex
The port number or VLAN ID.
The device IP address.
The subnet mask address.
The IP broadcast address used.
IpAddress
NetMask
BcastAddrFormat
ReasmMaxSize
The size of the largest IP datagram that
this entity can reassemble from incoming
IP fragmented datagrams received on this
interface.
VlanId
The VLAN number. A value of -1 indicates that
the VLAN ID is ignored.
MacOffset
SecondaryIf
Used to calculate the offset of the VLAN MAC
from the switch MAC.
The SecondaryIf field is set to True if the
VLAN IP address is a secondary IP address
and False if the IP address for the VLAN is the
primary IP address.
—End—
Routes tab
The Routes tab lists the different routes (dynamic or static) known to the
switch. To view the known routes, perform the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Open the IP screen by selecting IP Routing > IP from the menu.
Select the Routes tab. This tab is illustrated below.
IP dialog- Routes tab
2
Using the fields provided, view the information provided on switch
routes. The fields on this tab are described in the following table.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
212 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Routes tab fields
Field
Description
Dest
The destination address of the route.
The subnet mask used by the route destination.
The next hop in the listed route.
Mask
NextHop
HopOrMetric
The OSPF hop count or metric associated with
the route.
Interface
Proto
The interface associated with the route.
The protocol associated with the route.
The route path type.
PathType
Pref
The preference value associated with the route.
—End—
Note: Routes will not be displayed until at least one port in the VLAN
has link.
The route list can be updated by clicking the Refresh button. The route list
can also be filtered. This is described below.
Filtering route information
The Routes tab can be filtered to display only the desired switch routes.
Use the following procedure to filter the Routes tab:
Step Action
1
With the Routes tab open, click the Filter button. The Filter dialog
is displayed. This dialog is illustrated below.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 213
2
Using the fields provided, set the filter for the tab. These fields are
described in the following table.
Filter dialog fields
Field
Description
Condition
When using multiple filter expressions on the
tab, this is the condition that is used to join
them together.
Ignore Case
Column
Denotes whether filters are case sensitive or
insensitive.
Denotes the type of criteria that will be applied
to values used for filtering.
All Records
Dest
Select this check box to clear any filters and
display all rows.
Select this check box and enter a value to filter
on the route destination value.
Mask
Select this check box and enter a value to filter
on the route destination subnet mask value.
NextHop
HopOrMetric
Interface
Proto
Select this check box and enter a value to filter
on the route next hop value.
Select this check box and enter a value to filter
on the hop count or metric of the route.
Select this check box and enter a value to filter
on the route’s associated interface.
Select this check box and enter a value to filter
on the route protocol.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
214 IP Routing Configuration and Management
PathType
Pref
Select this check box and enter a value to filter
on the route path type.
Select this check box and enter a value to filter
on the route preference value.
3
Click Filter.
—End—
The tab will now be filtered on the criteria specified.
Static Routes tab
The Static Routes tab is used to configure static routes for the switch. To
configure a static route with this tab, follow this procedure:
Step Action
1
Open the IP screen by selecting IP Routing > IP from the menu.
Select the Static Routes tab. This tab is illustrated below.
Static Routes tab
2
Click Insert. The Insert Static Route screen opens. This screen
is illustrated below.
Insert Static Route screen
3
In the fields provided, enter the information for the new static route.
The following table outlines the fields on this screen.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 215
Insert Static Route fields
Field
Description
Dest
The destination IP address of the route.
0.0.0.0 is considered the default route. Multiple
routes to a single destination can appear in
the table, but access to such multiple entries
is dependent on the table-access mechanisms
defined by the network management protocol
in use.
Mask
The destination mask of the route.
NextHop
The IP address of the next hop of this route.
In the case of a route bound to an interface
that is realized through a broadcast media,
the value of this field is the agent IP address
on that interface.
Metric
This field represents the cost of the static route.
It is used to choose the best route (the one
with the smallest cost) to a certain destination.
This field has a range of 1 to 65535. If this
metric is not used, the value is set to -1.
Enable
Enable the new static route.
4
Click Insert. The new static route is displayed on the Static Routes
tab.
—End—
ARP tab
The ARP tab is used to configure Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
entries for the switch. To configure the ARP tab, follow this procedure:
Step Action
1
Open the IP screen by selecting IP Routing > IP from the menu.
Select the ARP tab. This tab is illustrated below.
ARP tab
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
216 IP Routing Configuration and Management
2
Click Insert. The Insert ARP Entry screen opens. This screen
is illustrated below.
Insert ARP Entry screen
3
To determine the interface and VLAN to use for the ARP entry, do
the following:
a. Select a VLAN from the Port in VLAN drop down list.
b. Using the provided dialog, select the ports that will be used in
this entry.
c. The Interface field will be populated with the appropriate VLAN
/ interface information.
4
In the fields provided, enter the remainder of the required information
for the new ARP entry. These fields are outlined in the following table.
Insert ARP Entry fields
Field
Description
MacAddress
IpAddress
The unique hardware address of the device.
The IP address of the device used to represent
a point of attachment in a TCP/IP internetwork.
5
Click Insert. The ARP tab is displayed with the new entry.
—End—
ARP Interfaces tab
The ARP Interfaces tab is used to configure proxy ARP on the switch.
Proxy ARP allows the switch to respond to an ARP request from a locally
attached host (or end station) for a remote destination.
To configure proxy ARP, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
2
Select IP Routing > IP from the Device Manager menu. The IP
dialog opens with the Globals tab selected.
Select the ARP Interfaces tab. This tab is illustrated below.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 217
IP screen - ARP Interfaces tab
3
Using the provided fields, configure proxy ARP. These fields are
outlined in the following table.
ARP Interfaces tab fields
Field
Description
IfIndex
DoProxy
DoResp
The index of the configured switch interface.
Enable or disable proxy ARP on the interface.
Enable or disable the sending of ARP responses
on the specified interface.
4
Click Apply.
—End—
ARP Inspection VLAN tab
To view and change ARP inspection status for VLANs, use the following
procedure:
Step Action
1
2
From the Device Manager, select IP Routing > IP. The IP window
appears.
Select the ARP Inspection-VLAN tab. The ARP Inspection-VLAN
window appears.
ARP Inspection-VLAN tab
3
4
To change the ARP Inspection status for a VLAN, select the VLAN.
Double click the ArpInspectionEnabled field for the VLAN.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
218 IP Routing Configuration and Management
5
6
Select true to enable ARP Inspection-VLAN or falseto disable ARP
Inspection-VLAN.
Click Apply.
—End—
ARP Inspection port tab
To view and change ARP inspection status for ports, use the following
procedure:
Step Action
1
2
From the Device Manager, select IP Routing > IP. The IP window
appears.
Select the ARP Inspection-port tab. The ARP Inspection-port
window appears.
ARP Inspection-port tab
3
4
5
To change the ARP Inspection status for a port, select the port.
Double click the ArpInspectionIfTrusted field for the port.
Select true enable ARP Inspection or falseto disable ARP
Inspection.
6
Click Apply.
—End—
Note: ArpInspectionIfTrusted controls whether or not the interface is
trusted for ARP inspection.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 219
TCP tab
The TCP tab displays Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) information for
the switch. This is a read-only tab. To view information on the TCP tab,
follow this procedure:
Step Action
1
Open the IP screen by selecting IP Routing > IP from the menu.
Select the TCP tab. This tab is illustrated below.
TCP tab
2
Click Refresh to immediately refresh the information this tab
displays.
The following table outlines the fields on this tab.
TCP tab fields
Field
Description
RtoAlgorithm
The algorithm used to determine the timeout
value used for retransmitting unacknowledged
octets.
RtoMin
The minimum value permitted by a TCP
implementation for the retransmission timeout,
measured in milliseconds.
RtoMax
MaxConn
The maximum value permitted by a TCP
implementation for the retransmission timeout,
measured in milliseconds.
The limit on the total number of TCP
connections that the entity can support.
In entities where the maximum number of
connections is dynamic, this object contains
the value -1.
—End—
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
220 IP Routing Configuration and Management
TCP Connections tab
This tab displays information on the current TCP connections the switch
maintains. This tab is read-only. To view information on this tab, follow
this procedure:
Step Action
1
Open the IP screen by selecting IP Routing > IP from the menu.
Select the TCP Connections tab. This tab is illustrated below.
TCP Connections tab
2
Click Refresh to immediately refresh the information this tab
displays.
The following table describes the fields on this tab.
TCP Connections tab fields
Field
Description
LocalAddress
The local IP address for this TCP connection.
In the case of a connection in the listen state,
which is willing to accept connections for any
IP interface associated with the node, the
value 0.0.0.0 is used.
LocalPort
The local port number for this TCP connection.
The remote IP address for this TCP connection.
RemAddress
RemPort
The remote port number for this TCP
connection.
State
The state of this TCP connection.
—End—
UDP Listeners tab
This tab displays information on the UDP listeners currently maintained by
the switch. This tab is read-only. To view the information on this tab, follow
this procedure:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 221
Step Action
1
Open the IP screen by selecting IP Routing > IP from the menu.
Select the UDP Listeners tab. This tab is illustrated below.
UDP Listeners tab
2
Click Refresh to immediately refresh the information displayed.
The following table outlines the fields on this tab.
UDP Listeners tab fields
Field
Description
LocalAddress
The local IP address for this UDP listener.
In the case of a UDP listener that accepts
datagrams for any IP interface associated with
the node, the value 0.0.0.0 is used.
LocalPort
The local port number for this UDP listener.
—End—
ECMP tab
The ECMP tab is used to configure the Equal Cost Multipath (ECMP)
feature on the switch.
To configure ECMP, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
2
Select IP Routing > IP from the Device Manager menu. The IP
dialog opens with the Globals tab selected
Select the ECMP tab. This tab is illustrated below.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
222 IP Routing Configuration and Management
IP dialog - ECMP tab
3
Using the provided fields, configure ECMP. These fields are outlined
in the following table.
ECMP tab fields
Field
Description
RoutingProtocol
MaxPath
The routing protocol to be configured.
The maximum number of ECMP paths assigned
to the protocol.
4
Click Apply.
—End—
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) configuration
This section describes the Java Device Manager procedures used to
configure and manage the Routing Information Protocol (RIP) on the Nortel
Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series. RIP is a distance vector protocol
used to dynamically discover network routes based on information passed
between routers in the network. RIP is useful in network environments
where using static route administration would be difficult.
Global RIP configuration
Global RIP configuration is used to configure the RIP parameters that will
apply to all active RIP interfaces. To configure global parameters, follow
this procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > RIP from the Device Manager menu. The RIP
dialog is opened with the Globals tab selected. This tab is illustrated
below.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 223
RIP dialog - Globals tab
2
Using the fields provided, configure the global RIP parameters. The
following table describes these parameters.
Globals tab fields
Field
Description
Operation
Enables or disables the operation of RIP on all
interfaces. The default is disabled.
UpdateTime
The time interval between RIP updates on all
interfaces. It is a global parameter for the box; that
is, it applies to all interfaces and cannot be set
individually for each interface. The default is 30
seconds.
RouteChanges
The number of route changes made to the IP Route
Database by RIP; does not include the refresh of
a route’s age.
Queries
The number of responses sent to RIP queries from
other systems.
HoldDownTime
Sets the length of time that RIP will continue
to advertise a network after determining it is
unreachable. The range is 0 to 360 seconds. The
default is 120 seconds.
TimeOutInterval
DefImportMetric
The time out interval between RIP update and all
interfaces.
Sets the value of the default import metric to import
a route into a RIP domain. For announcing OSPF
internal routes into a RIP domain, if the policy does
not specify a metric value, the default import metric
should be used. For OSPF external routes, the
external cost is used.
3
Click Apply.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
224 IP Routing Configuration and Management
—End—
RIP interface configuration
RIP interface configuration is used to tailor RIP to the individual interfaces.
To configure a RIP interface, perform the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > RIP from the Device Manager menu. The RIP
dialog is opened. Select the Interface tab. This tab is illustrated
below.
RIP dialog - Interface tab
2
Using the fields provided, configure the interface. The following table
describes these fields.
Interface tab fields
Field
Description
Address
The IP address of the RIP interface. This field is for
organizational purposes only and cannot be edited.
Send
Sets the RIP version sent on this interface. The
following values are valid:
•
•
•
•
doNotSend - No RIP updates sent on this
interface.
ripVersion1 - RIP updates compliant with RFC
1058.
rip1Compatible - Broadcasts RIPv2 updates
using RFC 1058 route subsumption rules.
ripVersion2 - Multicasting RIPv2 updates.
The default is rip1Compatible.
Receive
Sets the RIP version received on this interface: rip1,
rip2, or rip1OrRip2 The default is rip1OrRip2. Note
that rip2 and rip1OrRip2 imply reception of multicast
packets.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 225
3
Click Apply.
—End—
Advanced RIP interface configuration
Advanced RIP interface configuration is used to fine tune and further
configure a RIP interface. To configure advanced RIP interface options,
follow this procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > RIP from the Device Manager menu. The RIP
dialog is opened. Select the Interface Advance tab. This tab is
illustrated below.
RIP dialog - Interface Advance tab
2
Using the fields provided, configure the advanced RIP features.
These fields are described in the following table.
Interface Advance tab fields
Field
Description
Address
The IP address of the RIP interface. This field is
for organizational purposes only and cannot be
edited.
Interface
The switch interface that corresponds to the listed
IP address.
Enable
Supply
Enables or disables RIP on this interface.
Determines whether this interface supplies RIP
advertisements.
Listen
Determines whether this interface listens for RIP
advertisements.
Poison
Enables or disables poison reverse on this
interface.
DefaultSupply
Determines whether this interface advertises
default routes.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
226 IP Routing Configuration and Management
DefaultListen
TriggeredUpdate
AutoAggregate
InPolicy
Determines whether this interface listens for
default route advertisements.
Enables or disables triggered updates on this
interface.
Enables or disables auto aggregation on this
interface.
Associates a previously configured switch policy
with this interface for use as an in policy.
OutPolicy
Associates a previously configured switch policy
with this interface for use as an out policy.
Cost
The cost associated with this interface.
HoldDownTime
Sets the holddown timer for this interface. This is
an integer value in seconds between 0 and 360.
TimeoutInterval
Sets the timeout interval for this interface. This is
an integer value between 15 and 259200.
ProxyAnnounceFlag Enables or disables proxy announcements on this
interface.
3
Click Apply.
—End—
RIP Statistics
The Stats tab provides statistical information about the currently configured
RIP interfaces. To view these RIP statistics, follow this procedure:
Step Action
1
2
Select IP Routing > RIP from the Device Manager menu. The RIP
dialog opens with the Globals tab selected.
Select the Stats tab. This tab is illustrated below.
Stats tab
3
RIP statistics for the configured interfaces are displayed. The fields
on this tab are outlined in the following table.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 227
Stats tab fields
Field
Description
Address
The RIP interface address.
RcvBadPackets
The number of RIP response packets received by
the interface that have been discarded.
RcvBadRoutes
SentUpdates
The number of RIP routes received by the
interface that have been ignored.
The number of triggered RIP updates actually
sent on this interface. This does not include full
updates sent containing new information.
—End—
To graph these statistics, select a row from the Stats tab and click the
Graph button. A new dialog will open with the statistics for the selected
interface. This dialog is illustrated below.
RIP Stats Graph dialog
Select a graph type by clicking the appropriate graphing button.
VLAN RIP configuration
The RIP tab of the IP VLAN screen is used to configure RIP parameters
for the interface.
To configure VLAN RIP parameters, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select VLAN > VLANs from the Device Manager menu. The VLAN
dialog opens with the Basic tab selected.
2
3
On the Basic tab, select an interface and click the IP button.
The IP VLAN screen opens with the IP Address tab selected.
Select the RIP tab. This tab is illustrated below.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
228 IP Routing Configuration and Management
IP VLAN screen - RIP tab
4
Using the provided fields, configure the interface RIP parameters.
These fields are outlined in the following table.
RIP tab fields
Field
Description
Poison
Determines whether or not poison reverse is
implemented on this interface.
DefaultSupply
DefaultListen
Determines whether or not the interface
implements the default supply mechanism.
Determines whether or not the interface
implements the default listen mechanism.
AutoAggregateEnable
AdvertiseWhenDown
Cost
Determines whether or not auto aggregation is
enabled on this interface.
Determines whether or not this interface will
advertise even when non-operational.
The cost associated with this interface.
5
Click Apply.
—End—
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) configuration
The Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Protocol is an Interior Gateway
Protocol (IGP) that distributes routing information between routers belonging
to a single autonomous system (AS). Intended for use in large networks,
OSPF is a link-state protocol which supports IP subnetting and the tagging
of externally-derived routing information.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 229
This section describes the configuration of OSPF on the switch using the
Java Device Manager.
Global OSPF configuration
The General tab of the OSPF dialog is used to configure global OSPF
parameters. To configure these parameters, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > OSPF from the Device Manager menu. The
OSPF dialog will open with the General tab selected. This tab is
illustrated below.
OSPF dialog - General tab
2
Using the fields provided, configure the global OSPF parameters.
These fields are described in the following table.
General tab fields
Field
Description
RouterId
The unique ID of the router in the Autonomous
System.
AdminStat
The administrative status of OSPF on the
router.
VersionNumber
The current OSPF version number.
AreaBrdRtrStatus
Denotes whether this router is an Area
Border Router.
ASBrdRtrStatus
Denotes whether this router is an
Autonomous System Border Router.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Field
Description
ExternLsaCount
The number of external (link state type 5)
link-state advertisements in the link state
database.
ExternLsaCksumSum
The sum of the link state checksums of the
external link state advertisements contained
in the link state database. This sum can
be used to determine if there has been a
change in a router’s link state database and
to compare the link state database of two
routers.
OriginateNewLsas
RxNewLsas
The number of new link state advertisements
that have been originated. This number is
incremented each time the router originates
a new link state advertisement.
The number of link state advertisements
received determined to be new instantiations.
This number does not include newer
instantiations of self-originated link state
advertisements.
10MbpsPortDefaultMetric The default metric of a 10 Mbps port. This is
an integer value between 1 and 65535.
100MbpsPortDefaultMetric The default metric of a 100 Mbps port. This
is an integer value between 1 and 65535.
1000MbpsPortDefaultMetricThe default metric of a 1000 Mbps port. This
is an integer value between 1 and 65535.
10000MbpsPortDefaultMetriTche default metric of a 10000 Mbps port. This
is an integer value between 1 and 65535.
TrapEnable
Indicates whether OSPF traps should be
sent.
AutoVirtLinkEnable
SpfHoldDownTime
Indicates status of OSPF automatic Virtual
Link. The default setting is disabled.
The SPF Hold Down Timer value is an integer
between 3 and 60. The SPF will run, at most,
once per hold down timer value.
OspfAction
An immediate OSPF action to take. Select
runSpf and click Apply to do an immediate
SPF run.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 231
Field
Description
Rfc1583Compatibility
Controls the preference rules used when
choosing among multiple Autonomous
System external link state advertisements
advertising the same destination. When
this is enabled, the preference rule will
be the same as specified by RFC 1583.
When disabled, the new preference rule, as
described in RFC 2328, will be applicable.
This potentially prevents the routing loops
when Autonomous System external link state
advertisements for the same destination have
been originated from different areas.
LastSpfRun
Used to indicate the time the last SPF
calculation was done.
3
Click Apply.
—End—
OSPF area configuration
The Areas tab of the OSPF dialog is used to configure OSPF area
parameters. To configure these parameters, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > OSPF from the Device Manager menu. The
OSPF dialog will open. Select the Areas tab. This tab is illustrated
below.
OSPF dialog - Areas tab
2
Using the fields provided, configure the existing OSPF areas. These
fields are described in the table below.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
232 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Areas tab fields
Field
Description
AreaId
The area’s unique identifier. Area ID 0.0.0.0 is
used for the OSPF backbone.
ImportAsExtern
The area’s support for importing Autonomous
System external link state advertisements.
The options available are: importExternal,
importNoExternal, and importNssa.
SpfRuns
The number of times that the intra-area route
table has been calculated using this area link
state database.
AreaBdrRtrCount
AsBdrRtrCount
The total number of Area Border Routers
reachable within this area. This is initially zero
and is calculated in each SPF pass.
The total number of Autonomous System
Border Routers reachable within this area. This
is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF
pass.
AreaLsaCount
The total number of link state advertisements
in this area’s link state database, excluding
Autonomous System external link state
advertisements.
AreaLsaCksumSum
The sum of the link state advertisements’
checksums contained in this area’s link state
database. This sum excludes external (link
state type 5) link state advertisements. The sum
can be used to determine if there has been a
change in a router’s link state database, and to
compare the link state database of two routers.
AreaSummary
Controls the import of summary link state
advertisements into stub areas. It has no effect
on other areas. If the value is noAreaSummary,
the router will neither originate nor propagate
summary link state advertisements into the
stub area. If the value is sendAreaSummary,
the router will both summarize and propagate
summary link state advertisements.
3
Click Apply.
—End—
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 233
OSPF area creation
The Areas tab can also be used to create a new OSPF area. To create a
new OSPF area, follow this procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > OSPF from the Device Manager menu. The
OSPF dialog will open. Select the Areas tab. This tab is illustrated
above.
2
3
Click Insert.
The Insert Areas dialog opens. This dialog is illustrated below.
Insert Areas dialog
4
Using the fields provided, create the new area. These fields are
described in the following table.
Insert Areas dialog fields
Field
Description
AreaId
The area’s unique identifier. Area ID 0.0.0.0 is
used for the OSPF backbone.
ImportAsExtern
The area’s support for importing Autonomous
System external link state advertisements.
The options available in this drop down list
are: importExternal, importNoExternal, and
importNssa.
5
Click Insert.
—End—
OSPF area deletion
To delete an OSPF area, use the following procedure.
Deleting an OSPF area
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
234 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > OSPF from the Device Manager menu. The
OSPF dialog opens.
Select the Areas tab.
Select an AreaID to delete.
Click Delete.
2
3
4
—End—
Stub Area Metrics configuration
The Stub Area Metrics tab of the OSPF dialog is used to configure stub
area metrics associated with different types of service. To configure these
parameters, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > OSPF from the Device Manager menu. The
OSPF dialog will open. Select the Stub Area Metrics tab. This tab
is illustrated below.
OSPF dialog - Stub Area Metrics tab
2
Using the fields provided, configure the stub area metrics. These
fields are described in the table below.
Stub Area Metrics tab fields
Field
Description
AreaId
TOS
The unique ID of the stub area.
The Type of Service associated with the metric.
Metric
The metric value applied to the indicated type of
service. By default, this equals the least metric at the
type of service among the interfaces to other areas.
Status
Displays the status of the entry; Active or Not Active.
This field is read-only.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 235
3
Click Apply.
—End—
Interface configuration
The Interfaces tab of the OSPF dialog is used to configure OSPF interfaces.
To configure OSPF interfaces, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > OSPF from the Device Manager menu. The
OSPF dialog will open. Select the Interfaces tab. This tab is
illustrated below.
OSPF dialog - Interfaces tab
2
Using the fields provided, configure the OSPF interface. These fields
are described in the table below.
Interfaces tab fields
Field
Description
IpAddress
AreaId
The IP address of the OSPF interface.
The unique ID of the area to which the
interface connects. Area ID 0.0.0.0 indicates
the OSPF backbone.
AdminStat
State
The administrative status of the OSPF
interface.
Correct DR state of the OSPF interface (DR,
BDR, OtherDR).
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Field
Description
RtrPriority
The priority of the interface. Used in
multi-access networks, this field is used in
the designated router election algorithm.
The value 0 signifies that the router is not
eligible to become the designated router
on this network. In the event of a tie in this
value, routers will use their Router ID as a tie
breaker. This is an integer value between 0
and 255.
DesignatedRouter
The IP address of the Designated Router.
BackupDesignatedRouter The IP address of the Backup Designated
Router.
Type
The OSPF interface type. The options
available are: broadcast or passive.
AuthType
The interface authentication type. The
options available are: none, simplePassword,
or md5.
AuthKey
The interface authentication key. This key is
for when AuthType is simplePassword.
PrimaryMd5Key
HelloInterval
The MD5 primary key if it exists. Otherwise
this field will display 0.
The interval in seconds between the Hello
packets sent by the router on this interface.
This value must be the same for all routers
attached to a common network. This is an
integer value between 1 and 65535.
TransitDelay
The estimated number of seconds it takes to
transmit a link state update packet over this
interface. This is an integer value between
0 and 3600.
RetransInterval
The number of seconds between link
state advertisement retransmissions for
adjacencies belonging to this interface.
This value is also used when retransmitting
database description and link state request
packets. This is an integer value between
0 and 3600.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 237
Field
Description
RtrDeadInterval
The number of seconds that a router’s Hello
packets have not been transmitted before the
router neighbors declare it down. This value
should be some multiple of the Hello interval
and must be the same for all routers attached
to the common network. This is an integer
value between 0 and 2147483647 and must
be multiple of the HelloInterval value.
PollInterval
The number of seconds allocated between
polls.
AdvertiseWhenDown
Indicates if this interface advertises even
when it is non-operational.
MtuIgnore
Events
Indicates whether the MTU value is ignored.
The number of times this OSPF interface has
changed its state or an error has occurred.
3
Click Apply.
—End—
Interface Metric configuration
The If Metrics tab of the OSPF dialog is used to configure OSPF interface
metrics. To configure OSPF interface metrics, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > OSPF from the Device Manager menu. The
OSPF dialog will open. Select the If Metrics tab. This tab is
illustrated below.
OSPF dialog - If Metrics tab
2
Using the fields provided, configure the interface metrics. These
fields are described in the table below.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
238 IP Routing Configuration and Management
If Metrics tab fields
Field
Description
IpAddress
TOS
The IP address of the interface.
The Type of Service associated with the metric.
Value
The value advertized to other areas indicating the
distance from the OSPF router to any network in the
range. This is an integer value between 0 and 65535.
Status
Displays the status of the entry; Active or Not Active.
This field is read-only.
3
Click Apply.
—End—
Neighbor information
The Neighbors tab of the OSPF dialog is used to view OSPF neighbor
information. To view OSPF neighbors, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > OSPF from the Device Manager menu. The
OSPF dialog will open. Select the Neighbors tab. This tab is
illustrated below.
OSPF dialog - Neighbors tab
2
Using the fields provided, view the OSPF neighbor information.
These fields are explained in the table below.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 239
Neighbor tab fields
Field
Description
IpAddr
The IP address this neighbor is using as
an IP source address. On addressless
links, this will not be represented as
0.0.0.0 but as the address of another of
the neighbor’s interfaces.
AddressLessIndex
The corresponding value of the interface
index on addressless links. This value is
zero for interfaces having an IP address.
Router
Options
Priority
The unique ID of the neighboring router in
the Autonomous System.
A value corresponding to the neighbor’s
Options field.
The priority of the neighbor in the
designated router election algorithm. A
value of 0 indicates that the neighbor is
not eligible to become the designated
router on this particular network. This is a
value between 0 and 255.
State
The state of the relationship with this
neighbor.
Events
The number of times this neighbor
relationship has changed state or an error
has occurred.
RetransmissionQueueLength The current length of the retransmission
queue.
NbmaNbrPermanence
The status of the entry. The values
dynamic and permanent refer to how the
neighbor came to be known.
HelloSuppressed
InterfaceAddr
This field indicates whether Hello packets
are being suppressed to the neighbor.
The neighbor’s interface address.
3
Click Refresh to update the information.
—End—
Virtual interface information
Use the Virtual If tab of the OSPF dialog to view virtual interface
information.
Use the following procedure to view OSPF Virtual Interface information:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
240 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Step Action
1
2
Select IP Routing > OSPF from the Device Manager menu. The
OSPF dialog opens.
Select the Virtual If tab. The Virtual If tab is illustrated below.
Virtual If tab
3
Use the fields on the tab, as described in the following table, to view
the Virtual Interface information.
Virtual Interface fields
Field
Description
AreaId
Specifies the unique ID of the area connected to the
interface. TIP: an area ID of 0.0.0.0 indicates the
OSPF backbone.
Neighbor
Specifies ID of adjacent, reachable routers.
TransitDelay
Specifies the estimated number of seconds required
to transmit a link state update packet over the virtual
interface. The transit delay is expressed as an integer
between 0 and 3600.
RetransInterval
HelloInterval
Specifies the number of seconds between link state
advertisement retransmissions for adjacencies
belonging to the virtual interface. The retransmit
interval is also used to transmit database description
and link state request packets. The retransmit interval
is expressed as an integer between 0 and 3600.
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between the Hello
packets sent by the router on the virtual interface.
TIP: This value must be the same for all routers
attached to a common network. The hello interval is
expressed as an integer between 1 and 65535.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 241
Field
RtrDeadInterval
Description
Specifies the number of seconds since a router last
transmitted hello packets before neighbor routers
declare it down. The retransmit dead interval is
expressed as an integer between 0 and 2147483647.
TIP: The retransmit dead interval should be a multiple
of the hello interval and must be the same for all
routers attached to a common network.
AuthType
Specifies the interface authentication type.
The available authentication types are: none,
simplePassword, or MD5.
AuthKey
Specifies the interface authentication key used with
the simplePassword authentication type.
PrimaryMd5Key
State
Specifies the MD5 primary key. If no MD5 primary
key exists, the value in this field is 0.
Specifies the current DR state of the interface. States
are designated router (DR), backup designated router
(BDR), or OtherDR.
Events
Type
Specifies the number of times the virtual interface
has changed state or the number of times an error
has occurred.
Specifies whether the virtual interface is broadcast
or passive.
4
Click one of the labelled buttons across the bottom of the tab to
refresh the information in the view, insert or delete information, apply
changes, copy or paste settings, reset changes, export information
to an external file or print.
—End—
Virtual interface creation
To create an OSPF virtual interface, use the following procedure.
Creating an OSPF virtual interface
Step Action
1
2
3
From the Device Manager main menu, select IP Routing.
Select OSPF. The OSPF window opens with the General tab open.
Select the Virtual If tab. The Virtual If window opens.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
242 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Virtual interface tab
4
Click Insert. The OSPF, Insert Virtual If dialog opens.
Insert virtual interface dialog
5
Enter the information in the fields on the Virtual If window.
OSPF Insert Virtual Interface fields
Field
Description
AreaId
Specifies the unique identifier of the area connected to the interface.
TIP: an area ID of 0.0.0.0 indicates the OSPF backbone.
Neighbor
Specifies the ID of adjacent, reachable routers.
TransitDelay
Specifies the estimated number of seconds required to transmit a
link state update packet over the virtual interface. Transit delay is
expressed as an integer between 0-3600. The default value is 0.
RetransInterval
Specifies the number of seconds between link state advertisement
retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to the virtual interface. The
retransmit interval is also used to transmit database description and
link state request packets. The retransmit interval is expressed as an
interval between 0-3600. The default value is 5.
HelloInterval
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between the Hello packets sent by
the router on the virtual interface. TIP: This value must be the same
for all routers attached to a common network. The hello interval is
expressed as an integer between 1-65535. The default value is 10.
RtrDeadInterval
Specifies the number of seconds since a router last transmitted hello
packets before neighbor routers declare it down. The retransmit dead
interval is expressed as an integer between 0-2147483647. The
default value is 60.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 243
Field
Description
AuthType
Specifies the interface authentication type. The available
authentication types are: none, simple password, or MD5. If you
select simplePassword, you must supply an authorization key.
AuthKey
Specifies the interface authentication key used with the
simplePassword authentication type.
6
Click Insert.
—End—
Virtual interface deletion
To delete an OSPF virtual interface, use the following procedure.
Deleting an OSPF virtual interface
Step Action
1
2
3
4
5
From the Device Manager main menu, select IP Routing.
Select OSPF. The OSPF window opens.
Select the Virtual If tab.
Select an AreaId to delete.
Click Delete.
—End—
Automatic Virtual Link creation
Use the AutoVirtLinkEnable box on the OSPF General tab to create an
automatic virtual link. For more information about Virtual Link, see "OSPF
Use the following procedure to create an automatic Virtual Link.
Creating an automatic Virtual Link
Step Action
1
2
From the Device Manager main menu, select IP Routing > OSPF.
The OSPF dialog opens.
On the General tab, enter the router ID in the RouterId box for one
of the end point ABRs.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
244 IP Routing Configuration and Management
3
4
Check the AutoVirtLinkEnable box.
Click Apply.
5
6
7
Enter the router ID in the RouterId box for the other end point ABR.
Check the AutoVirtLinkEnable box.
Click Apply.
—End—
Automatic Virtual Link Deletion
To delete an automatic Virtual Link use the following procedure.
Deleting an automatic Virtual Link
Step Action
1
2
From the Device Manager main menu, select IP Routing > OSPF.
The OSPF dialog opens.
On the General tab, enter the router ID in the RouterId box for one
of the end point ABRs.
3
4
Deselect the AutoVirtLinkEnable box.
Click Apply.
5
6
7
Enter the router ID in the RouterId box for the other end point ABR.
Deselect the AutoVirtLinkEnable box.
Click Apply.
—End—
Automatic Virtual Links are also removed when the transit area is deleted or
when the router is no longer an ABR.
Virtual neighbors information
Use the Virtual Neighbors tab of the OSPF dialog to view virtual neighbor
information.
Use the following procedure to view OSPF Virtual Neighbors information:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 245
Step Action
1
2
Select IP Routing > OSPF from the Device Manager menu. The
OSPF dialog opens.
Select the Virtual Neighbors tab. The Virtual Neighbors tab is
illustrated below.
Virtual Neighbors tab
3
Use the fields on the tab, as described in the following table, to view
the Virtual Neighbors information.
Virtual Neighbors tab fields
Field
Description
Area
Specifies the subnetwork in which the virtual neighbor
resides.
RouterId
Specifies the 32-bit integer (represented as a type
IpAddress) uniquely identifying the neighboring router
in the autonomous system. .
IpAddr
Options
State
Specifies the IP address of the virtual neighboring
router.
Specifies a bit mask corresponding to the option field
of the neighbor.
Specifies the state of the Virtual Neighbor
Relationship.
Events
Specifies the number of state changes or error events
that have occurred between the OSPF router and the
neighbor router.
RetransQLen
Specifies the current length of the retransmission
queue (the number of elapsed seconds between
advertising retransmissions of the same packet to
a neighbor).
HelloSuppressed Specifies whether Hello packets to the virtual
neighbor are suppressed or not.
4
Click one of the labelled buttons across the bottom of the tab to
refresh the information in the view, insert information, copy settings,
or print.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
246 IP Routing Configuration and Management
—End—
OSPF Hosts information
Use the Hosts tab of the OSPF dialog to view virtual neighbor information.
Use the following procedure to view OSPF Hosts information:
Step Action
1
2
Select IP Routing > OSPF from the Device Manager menu. The
OSPF dialog opens.
Select the Hosts tab. The Hosts tab illustration follows.
Hosts tab
3
Use the fields on the tab, as described in the following table, to view
the Hosts information.
Hosts fields
Field
Description
IpAddress
TOS
Specifies the host IP address.
Specifies the configured route type of service.
TIP: the value in this field should be 0 as TOS-based
routing is not supported.
Metric
Specifies the configured cost of the host.
AreaID
Specifies the ID of the area connected to the host.
4
Click one of the labelled buttons across the bottom of the tab to
refresh the information in the view, insert or delete information, copy
settings, export information to an external file, or print.
—End—
OSPF Host creation
To create an OSPF host, use the following procedure.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 247
Creating an OSPF host
Step Action
1
From the Device main menu, select OSPF. The OSPF window
opens.
2
3
4
Select the Hosts tab. The Hosts window opens.
Click Insert. The OSPF Insert Hosts dialog opens.
Enter the information on the Insert Hosts dialog.
OSPF Insert Hosts dialog
Field
Description
IpAddress
Metric
Specifies the host IP address.
Specifies the configured cost of the host.
5
Click Insert.
—End—
OSPF Host deletion
To delete an OSPF host, use the following procedure.
Deleting an OSPF host
Step Action
1
2
3
4
From the Device Manager main menu, select OSPF.
Select Hosts.
Select the IpAddress to delete.
Click Delete.
—End—
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Link State Database information
The Link State Database tab of the OSPF dialog is used to view link state
information. To view OSPF link states, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > OSPF from the Device Manager menu. The
OSPF dialog will open. Select the Link State Database tab. This
tab is illustrated below.
OSPF dialog - Link State Database tab
2
Using the fields provided, view the link state database. These fields
are described in the following table.
Link State Database fields
Field
Description
AreaId
The unique identifier of the Area the link state
advertisement was received from.
Type
Lsid
The type of link state advertisement. Each link state
type has a separate advertisement format.
The Link State ID is a link state type-specific field
containing either a Router ID or an IP address. This
field identifies the section of the routing domain that
is being described by the advertisement.
RouterId
The unique identifier of the originating router in the
Autonomous System.
Sequence
This field is used to detect old or duplicate link state
advertisements by assigning an incremental number
to duplicate advertisements. The higher the sequence
number, the more recent the advertisement.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 249
Age
The age of the link state advertisement in seconds.
Checksum
The checksum of the complete content of the
advertisement, excluding the Age field. This field
is excluded so that the advertisement’s age can
be increased without updating the checksum. The
checksum used is the same as that used in ISO
connectionless datagrams and is commonly referred
to as the Fletcher checksum.
3
Click Refresh to update the information.
—End—
External Link State Database information
The Ext. Link State Database tab of the OSPF dialog is used to view
external link state information. To view OSPF external link states, use the
following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > OSPF from the Device Manager menu. The
OSPF dialog will open. Select the Ext. Link State Database tab.
This tab is illustrated below.
OSPF dialog - Ext. Link State Database tab
2
Using the fields provided, view the external link state database.
These fields are described in the following table.
Ext. Link State Database fields
Field
Description
Type
The type of link state advertisement. Each link
state type has a separate advertisement format.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
250 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Lsid
The Link State ID is a link state type-specific field
containing either a Router ID or an IP address. This
field identifies the section of the routing domain that
is being described by the advertisement.
RouterId
The unique identifier of the originating router in the
Autonomous System.
Sequence
This field is used to detect old or duplicate link
state advertisements by assigning an incremental
number to duplicate advertisements. The higher
the sequence number, the more recent the
advertisement.
Age
The age of the link state advertisement in seconds.
Checksum
The checksum of the complete content of the
advertisement, excluding the Age field. This field
is excluded so that the advertisement’s age can
be increased without updating the checksum.
The checksum used is the same as that used in
ISO connectionless datagrams and is commonly
referred to as the Fletcher checksum.
Advertisement
The entire link state advertisement including the
header."
3
Click Refresh to update the information.
—End—
Area Aggregate configuration
The Area Aggregate tab of the OSPF dialog is used to configure area
aggregate information. To configure OSPF area aggregates, use the
following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > OSPF from the Device Manager menu. The
OSPF dialog will open. Select the Area Aggregate tab. This tab
is illustrated below.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 251
OSPF dialog - Area Aggregate tab
2
Using the fields provided, configure the area aggregate information.
These fields are described in the following table.
Area Aggregate tab fields
Field
Description
AreaID
The unique identifier of the Area this address
aggregate is found in.
LsdbType
The type of address aggregate. This field specifies
the link state database type that this address
aggregate applies to. Select one of the following
types: Summary Link, Aggregated Summary Link,
nssaExternal link, or Not so Stubby Area Link.
IpAddress
Mask
The IP address of the network or subnetwork
indicated by the aggregate range.
The subnet mask that pertains to the network or
subnetwork.
Effect
This field indicates the aggregates effect. Subnets
subsumed by aggregate ranges either trigger
the advertisement of the indicated aggregate
(advertiseMatching value) or result in the subnet
not being advertised at all outside the area. Select
one of the following types: AdvertiseMatching
(Advertise the aggregate summary LSA with
same LSID), DoNotAdvertiseMatching (Suppress
all networks that fall within the entire range) or
AdvertiseDoNotAggregate (Advertise individual
networks).
AdvertiseMetric
The advertisement metric associated with this
aggregate. Enter an integer value between 0 and
65535 which represents the Metric cost value for
the OSPF area range.
3
Click Apply.
—End—
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
252 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Area Aggregate creation
To create a new OSPF area aggregate, follow this procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > OSPF from the Device Manager menu. The
OSPF dialog will open. Select the Area Aggregate tab. This tab
is illustrated above.
2
3
Click Insert.
The Insert Area Aggregate dialog opens. This dialog is illustrated
below.
Insert Area Aggregate dialog
4
Using the fields provided, create the new area aggregate. These
fields are described in the following table.
Insert Area Aggregate dialog fields
Field
Description
AreaID
The unique identifier of the Area this address
aggregate is found in.
LsdbType
The type of address aggregate. This field
specifies the link state database type that this
address aggregate applies to. Options available
are: summaryLink and nssaExternalLink.
IpAddress
Mask
The IP address of the network or subnetwork
indicated by the aggregate range.
The subnet mask that pertains to the network or
subnetwork.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 253
Effect
This field indicates the aggregates effect.
Subnets subsumed by aggregate ranges either
trigger the advertisement of the indicated
aggregate (advertiseMatching value) or
result in the subnet not being advertised at
all outside the area. Options available are:
advertiseMatching, doNotAdvertiseMatching, and
advertiseDoNotAggregate.
AdvertiseMetric
The advertisement metric associated with this
aggregate. This is an integer value between 0
and 65535.
5
Click Insert.
—End—
Area Aggregate deletion
To delete an OSPF area aggregate, use the following procedure.
Deleting an OSPF area aggregate
Step Action
1
From the Device Manager main menu, select IP Routing. The IP
Routing menu appears.
2
3
4
5
Select OSPF. The OSPF dialog opens.
Select the Area Aggregate tab. The Area Aggregate window opens.
Select an AreaID to delete.
Click Delete.
—End—
OSPF redistribution configuration
The Redistribution tab of the OSPF dialog is used to configure OSPF
redistribution settings. To configure OSPF redistribution, use the following
procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > OSPF from the Device Manager menu. The
OSPF dialog will open. Select the Redistribute tab. This tab is
illustrated below.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
254 IP Routing Configuration and Management
OSPF dialog - Redistribute tab
2
Use the fields provided on this tab to configure redistribution. These
fields are described in the following table.
Redistribute tab fields
Field
Description
RouteSource
Select the route source protocol for redistribution
(RIP, Direct or Static).
Enable
Metric
Indicates whether the redistribution entry is active.
A value between 0 and 65535 that indicates the
metric to be announced in the advertisement.
MetricType
Subnets
The field specifies the metric type. The value
type1 is treated as an internal metric and type2
is treated as an external metric.
This field indicates whether subnetworks need to
be advertised individually. Options available are:
allow and suppress.
RoutePolicy
The name of an existing route policy that will be
used to determine whether a specific route should
be advertised to a given protocol.
3
Click Apply.
—End—
Redistribution creation
To create a new redistribution entry, follow this procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > OSPF from the Device Manager menu. The
OSPF dialog will open. Select the Redistribute tab. This tab is
illustrated above.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 255
2
3
Click Insert.
The Insert Redistribute dialog opens. This dialog is illustrated
below.
Insert Redistribute dialog
4
Using the fields provided, create the new redistribution entry. These
fields are described in the following table.
Insert Redistribute dialog fields
Field
Description
RouteSource
This field indicates that the protocol is either
interested or not interested in knowing the routes
learned from this source.
Enable
Metric
Indicates whether the redistribution entry is active.
A value between 0 and 65535 that indicates the
metric to be announced in the advertisement.
MetricType
Subnets
The field specifies the metric type. The value
type1 is treated as an internal metric and type2
is treated as an external metric.
This field indicates whether subnetworks need to
be advertised individually. Options available are:
allow and supress.
RoutePolicy
The name of an existing switch policy that will be
used to determine whether a specific route should
be advertised to a given protocol.
5
Click Insert.
—End—
Redistribution deletion
To delete a redistribution entry, use the following procedure.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
256 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Deleting a redistribution entry
Step Action
1
From the Device Manager main menu, select IP Routing. The IP
Routing menu appears.
2
3
4
5
Select OSPF. The OSPF dialog opens.
Select the Redistribute tab. The Redistribute window opens.
Select a RouteSource to delete.
Click Delete.
—End—
Message Digest information
The Message Digest tab of the OSPF dialog is used to view OSPF
message digest settings. To view OSPF message digests, use the following
procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > OSPF from the Device Manager menu. The
OSPF dialog will open. Select the Message Digest tab. This tab
is illustrated below.
OSPF dialog - Message Digest tab
2
Using the fields provided, view the message digest information.
These fields are described in the following table.
Message Digest tab fields
Field
Description
IpAddress
Index
The IP address associated with the digest entry.
The index value of the digest entry. This is an
integer value between 1 and 255.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 257
Type
Key
The type of digest entry. Only MD5 is supported.
The key value associated with the digest entry.
3
Click Refresh to update the displayed information.
—End—
Message Digest creation
To create a new OSPF message digest entry, follow this procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > OSPF from the Device Manager menu. The
OSPF dialog will open. Select the Message Digest tab. This tab
is illustrated above.
2
3
Click Insert.
The Insert Message Digest dialog opens. This dialog is illustrated
below.
Insert Message Digest dialog
4
Using the fields provided, create the new digest entry. These fields
are described in the following table.
Insert Message Digest dialog fields
Field
Description
IpAddress
Index
The IP address associated with the digest entry.
The index value of the digest entry. This is an
integer value between 1 and 255.
Type
Key
The type of digest entry. Only MD5 is supported.
The key value associated with the digest entry.
5
Click Insert.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
258 IP Routing Configuration and Management
—End—
Message Digest deletion
To delete an OSPF message digest entry, use the following procedure.
Deleting an OSPF message digest entry
Step Action
1
From the Device Manager main menu, select IP Routing. The IP
Routing menu appears.
2
3
4
5
Select OSPF. The OSPF dialog opens.
Select the Message Digest tab. The Message Digest window opens.
Select an IpAddress to delete.
Click Delete.
—End—
Virtual If Message Digest information
Use the Virtual If Message Digest tab of the OSPF dialog to view OSPF
virtual message digest settings.
To view OSPF virtual message digest settings, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
2
Select IP Routing > OSPF from the Device Manager menu. The
OSPF dialog opens.
Select the Virtual If Message Digest tab. See the following
illustration of Virtual If Message Digest tab
Virtual If Message Digest tab
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 259
3
Use the fields in the following table to view Virtual If Message Digest
information:
Virtual If Message Digest fields
Field
Description
AreaId
Specifies the ID of the area associated with the
virtual interface message digest entry.
Neighbor
Index
Specifies the IP address of the neighbor router
associated with the virtual interface message
digest entry.
Specifies the index value of the virtual interface
message digest entry. The value is an integer
between 1 and 255.
Type
Key
Specifies the type of virtual interface digest
entry.
Specifies the key associated with the virtual
interface message digest entry.
4
Click one of the labelled buttons across the bottom of the tab to
refresh the information in the view, insert or delete information, copy
settings, export information to an external file, or print.
—End—
Virtual If Message Digest creation
To create a Virtual Message Digest entry, use the following procedure.
Creating a Virtual If Message Digest entry
Step Action
1
From the Device Manager main menu, select IP Routing. The IP
Routing menu appears.
2
3
Select OSPF. The OSPF window opens.
Select the Virtual If Message Digest tab. The Virtual If Message
Digest screen opens.
4
Click Insert. The OSPF, Insert Virtual If Message Digest window
opens.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
260 IP Routing Configuration and Management
OSPF Insert Virtual If Message Digest window
5
6
Enter the information in the fields provided.
Click Insert.
—End—
Virtual If Message Digest deletion
To delete a Virtual Message Digest entry, use the following procedure.
Deleting a Virtual If Message Digest entry
Step Action
1
From the Device Manager main menu, select IP Routing. The IP
Routing menu appears.
2
3
Select OSPF. The OSPF dialog opens.
Select the Virtual If Message Digest tab. The Virtual If Message
Digest window opens.
4
5
Select an AreaId to delete.
Click Delete.
—End—
OSPF statistics
The Stats tab of the OSPF dialog is used to view OSPF statistics. To view
OSPF statistics, use the following procedure:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 261
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > OSPF from the Device Manager menu. The
OSPF dialog will open. Select the Stats tab. This tab is illustrated
below.
OSPF dialog Stats tab
2
Using the fields provided, view the OSPF statistics. These fields
are described in the table below.
Stats tab fields
Field
Description
LsdbTblSize
Indicates the number of entries in the link state
database.
TxPackets
Indicates the number of packets transmitted
by OSPF.
RxPackets
Indicates the number of packets received by
OSPF.
TxDropPackets
RxDropPackets
RxBadPackets
SpfRuns
Indicates the number of packets dropped by
OSPF before transmission.
Indicates the number of packets dropped before
receipt by OSPF.
Indicates the number of bad packets received
by OSPF.
Indicates the total number of SPF calculations
performed. This also includes the number of
partial route table calculations.
BuffersAllocated
Indicates the total number of buffers allocated
for OSPF.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
262 IP Routing Configuration and Management
BuffersFreed
Indicates the total number of buffers that are
freed by OSPF.
BufferAllocFailures
BufferFreeFailures
Indicates the number of times that OSPF has
failed to allocate buffers.
Indicates the number of times that OSPF has
failed to allocate buffers.
3
Values on the Stats tab will refresh automatically based on the value
selected in the Poll Interval field. To clear the counters and start
over at zero, click Clear Counters.
—End—
VLAN OSPF statistics
OSPF statistical information can also be viewed on a per-interface basis. To
view VLAN OSPF statistics, perform the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select VLAN > VLANs from the Device Manager menu. The VLAN
dialog opens.
2
3
4
Select an interface from those listed on the Basic tab.
Click the IP button.
On the IP VLAN dialog, select the OSPF Stats tab. This tab is
illustrated below.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 263
OSPF Stats tab
5
The following table describes the fields on this tab.
OSPF Stats tab fields
Field
Description
VersionMismatches
AreaMismatches
AuthTypeMismatches
AuthFailures
The number of version mismatches received by this interface.
The number of area mismatches received by this interface.
The number of AuthType mismatches received by this interface.
The number of authentication failures on this interface.
The number of net mask mismatches received by this interface.
NetMaskMismatches
HelloIntervalMismatches
The number of hello interval mismatches received by this
interface.
DeadIntervalMismatches
The number of dead interval mismatches received by this
interface.
OptionMismatches
RxHellos
The number of option mismatches received by this interface.
The number of hello packets received by this interface.
RxDBDescrs
The number of database descriptor packets received by this
interface.
RxLSUpdates
RxLSReqs
RxLSAcks
The number of link state update packets received by this
interface.
The number of link state request packets received by this
interface.
The number of link state acknowledge packets received by
this interface.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
264 IP Routing Configuration and Management
TxHellos
The number hello packets transmitted by this interface.
TxDBDescrs
The number of database descriptor packets transmitted by
this interface.
TxLSUpdates
TxLSReqs
TxLSAcks
The number of link state update packets transmitted by this
interface.
The number of link state request packets transmitted by this
interface.
The number of link state acknowledge packets transmitted by
this interface.
—End—
To graph the statistical information, select the desired data and click the
appropriate graph button at the bottom of the screen.
Route policies
Route policies are a Nortel proprietary improvement on existing routing
schemes. Using existing routing schemes, packets are forwarded based
on routes that have been learned by the router through routing protocols
such as RIP and OSPF or through the introduction of static routes. Route
policies introduce the ability to forward packets based on rule sets created
by the network administrator. These rule sets, or policies, are then applied
to the learned or static routes.
This section describes the configuration and management of route policies
using the Java Device Manager.
Prefix List configuration
The Prefix List tab is used for the configuration of policy prefix lists. Prefix
lists are the base item in a routing policy. Prefix lists contain lists of IP
addresses with their associated masks that support the comparison of
ranges of masks.
To configure a prefix list, following this procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > Policy from the Device Manager menu. The
Policy dialog opens with the Prefix List tab selected. This tab
is illustrated below.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 265
Policy dialog - Prefix List tab
2
Using the fields provided, configure the selected Prefix List. These
fields are described in the following table.
Prefix List tab fields
Field
Description
Id
The unique identifier of this prefix list.
The IP address associated with this prefix list.
Prefix
PrefixMaskLen
The subnet mask length associated with this prefix
list.
Name
The name associated with this prefix list.
The mask length from the stated subnet mask.
The mask length up to the stated subnet mask.
MaskLenFrom
MaskLenUpto
3
Click Apply.
—End—
Prefix List creation
To create a new prefix list, follow this procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > Policy from the Device Manager menu. The
Policy dialog opens with the Prefix List tab selected. This tab
is illustrated above.
2
3
Click Insert.
The Insert Prefix List dialog opens. This dialog is illustrated below.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
266 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Insert Prefix List dialog
4
Using the fields provided, create a new prefix list. These fields are
described in the following table.
Insert Prefix List dialog fields
Field
Description
Id
The unique identifier of this prefix list.
The IP address associated with this prefix list.
Prefix
PrefixMaskLen
The subnet mask length associated with this prefix
list.
Name
The name associated with this prefix list.
The mask length from the stated subnet mask.
The mask length up to the stated subnet mask.
MaskLenFrom
MaskLenUpto
5
Click Insert.
—End—
Prefix List deletion
To delete a prefix list, use the following procedure.
Deleting a Prefix List
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > Policy from the Device Manager menu. The
Policy dialog opens with the Prefix List tab selected.
2
3
Select an Id to delete.
Click Delete.
—End—
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 267
Route Policy configuration
The Route Policy tab is used to configure route policies on the switch.
Route policies are created and then applied to switch in either an accept
(in), announce (out), or redistribution capacity.
To configure route policies on the switch, perform the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > Policy from the Device Manager menu. The
Policy dialog will open with the Prefix List tab selected. Select the
Route Policy tab. This tab is illustrated below.
Policy dialog - Route Policy tab
2
Using the fields provided, configure the route policy. These fields
are described in the following tab.
Route Policy tab fields
Field
Description
Id
The index value used to uniquely identify a group
of policies.
SequenceNumber
The secondary index value assigned to individual
policies inside a larger policy group.
Name
The name associated with this policy.
Enable
Indicates whether the policy is enabled. Disabled
policies should not be used for routing.
Mode
Specifies the action to be taken when this policy
is selected for a specific route. A value of permit
indicates that the route will be used while deny
indicates that the route will be ignored.
MatchProtocol
MatchNetwork
Select the appropriate protocol (RIP, Static,
Direct, OSPF or Any). If configured, matches the
protocol through which the route is learned. This
field is used only for RIP announce purposes.
If configured, the switch matches the destination
network against the contents of the specified
prefix list.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
268 IP Routing Configuration and Management
MatchIpRouteSource If configured, matches the next hop IP address
for RIP routes and advertising router IDs
for OSPF routes against the contents of the
specified prefix list. This option is ignored for all
other route types.
MatchNextHop
MatchInterface
If configured, matches the next hop IP address
of the route against the contents of the specified
prefix list. This field applies only to non-local
routes.
If configured, the switch matches the IP address
of the interface by which the RIP route was
learned against the contents of the specified
prefix list. This field is used only for RIP routes
and ignored for all other type of route.
MatchRouteType
Sets a specific route-type to be matched (applies
only to OSPF routes). Externaltype1, and
Externaltype2 specify the OSPF routes of the
specified type only. OSPF internal refers to intra-
and inter-area routes.
MatchMetric
NssaPbit
If configured, the switch matches the metric of
the incoming advertisement or existing route
against the specified value (1 to 655535). If 0,
then this field is ignored. The default is 0.
Set or reset the P bit in specified type 7 LSA. By
default the P bit is always set in case the user set
it to a disable state for a particular route policy
than all type 7. LSAs associated with that route
policy will have the P bit cleared with this intact
NSSA ABR will not perform translation of these
LSAs to type 5. Default is enabled.
SetRoutePreference
Setting the preference greater than zero,
specifies the route preference value to be
assigned to the routes which matches this policy.
This applies to Accept policies only. You can set
a value from 0 to 255. The default value is 0. If
the default is configured, the global preference
value is used.
SetMetric
If configured, the switch sets the metric value
for the route while announcing or redistributing.
The default-import-metric is 0. If the default
is configured, the original cost of the route is
advertised into OSPF; for RIP, the original cost of
the route or the default value is used.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 269
SetMetricType
Applicable to OSPF protocol only. If configured,
sets the metric type for the routes to be
announced into the OSPF routing protocol that
matches this policy. The default is type 2. This
field is applicable only for OSPF announce
policies.
SetInjectNetList
SetMask
If configured, the switch replaces the destination
network of the route that matches this policy with
the contents of the specified prefix list.
Indicates the mask to used for routes that pass
the policy matching criteria.
3
Click Apply.
—End—
Route Policy creation
To create a new route policy, follow this procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > Policy from the Device Manager menu. The
Policy dialog will open with the Prefix List tab selected. Select the
Route Policy tab. This tab is illustrated above.
2
3
Click Insert.
The Insert Route Policy dialog opens. This dialog is illustrated
below.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
270 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Insert Route Policy dialog
4
Using the fields provided, create the new route policy. These fields
are described in the following table.
Insert Route Policy fields
Field
Description
Id
The index value used to uniquely identify a
group of policies.
SequenceNumber
The secondary index value assigned to
individual policies inside a larger policy group.
Name
The name associated with this policy.
Enable
Indicates whether the policy is enabled.
Disabled policies should be used for routing.
Mode
Specifies the action to be taken when this
policy is selected for a specific route. A value
of permit indicates that the route will be used
while deny indicates that the route will be
ignored.
MatchProtocol
Select the appropriate protocol (RIP, Static,
Direct, OSPF or Any). If configured, matches
the protocol through which the route is
learned. This field is used only for RIP
announce purposes.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 271
MatchNetwork
If configured, the switch matches the
destination network against the contents of
the specified prefix list.
MatchIpRouteSource
If configured, matches the next hop IP
address for RIP routes and advertising router
IDs for OSPF routes against the contents of
the specified prefix list. This option is ignored
for all other route types.
MatchNextHop
MatchInterface
If configured, matches the next hop IP
address of the route against the contents of
the specified prefix list. This field applies only
to non-local routes.
If configured, the switch matches the IP
address of the interface by which the RIP
route was learned against the contents of the
specified prefix list. This field is used only
for RIP routes and ignored for all other type
of route.
MatchRouteType
Sets a specific route-type to be matched
(applies only to OSPF routes). Externaltype1,
and Externaltype2 specify the OSPF routes
of the specified type only. OSPF internal
refers to intra- and inter-area routes.
MatchMetric
NssaPbit
If configured, the switch matches the metric of
the incoming advertisement or existing route
against the specified value (1 to 655535). If
0, then this field is ignored. The default is 0.
Set or reset the P bit in specified type 7
LSA. By default the P bit is always set in
case the user set it to a disable state for a
particular route policy than all type 7. LSAs
associated with that route policy will have the
P bit cleared with this intact NSSA ABR will
not perform translation of these LSAs to type
5. Default is enabled.
SetRoutePreference
Setting the preference greater than zero,
specifies the route preference value to be
assigned to the routes which matches this
policy. This applies to Accept policies only.
You can set a value from 0 to 255. The default
value is 0. If the default is configured, the
global preference value is used.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
272 IP Routing Configuration and Management
SetMetric
If configured, the switch sets the metric
value for the route while announcing or
redistributing. The default-import-metric is 0.
If the default is configured, the original cost of
the route is advertised into OSPF; for RIP, the
original cost of the route or the default value
is used.
SetMetricType
Applicable to OSPF protocol only. If
configured, sets the metric type for the routes
to be announced into the OSPF routing
protocol that matches this policy. The default
is type 2. This field is applicable only for
OSPF announce policies.
SetInjectNetList
SetMask
If configured, the switch replaces the
destination network of the route that matches
this policy with the contents of the specified
prefix list.
Indicates the mask to used for routes that
pass the policy matching criteria.
5
Click Insert.
—End—
Route policy deletion
To delete a route policy, use the following procedure.
Deleting a route policy
Step Action
1
From the Device Manager main menu, select IP Routing. The IP
Routing menu appears.
2
3
4
5
Select Policy. The Policy dialog opens.
Select the Route Policy tab.
Select an Id to delete.
Click Delete.
—End—
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 273
Applying OSPF policies
The Applying Policy tab is used to apply configured OSPF policies to the
switch. To configure policy application, perform the following procedure:
Step Action
1
2
3
Select IP Routing > Policy from the Device Manager menu. The
Policy dialog opens with the Prefix List tab selected. Select the
Applying Policy tab. This tab is illustrated below.
Policy dialog - Applying Policy tab
Using the fields provided, select the policies to be applied. These
fields are described in the following table.
Applying Policy tab fields
Field
Description
OspfInFilterApply
Select this check box to apply OSPF accept
policies.
RedistributeApply
Select this check box to apply OSPF
redistribution policies.
OspfApplyRedistribute
If applying OSPF redistribution policies,
select the type of redistribution from the
available options.
Click Apply.
—End—
OSPF Accept Policy configuration
The OSPF Accept tab is used to configure OSPF accept policies on the
switch. To configure OSPF accept policies, perform the following tasks:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
274 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > Policy from the Device Manager menu. The
Policy dialog opens with the Prefix List tab selected. Select the
OSPF Accept tab. This tab is illustrated below.
Policy dialog - OSPF Accept tab
2
Using the fields provided, configure the desired accept policy. These
fields are described in the following table.
OSPF Accept tab fields
Field
Description
AdvertisingRtr
The advertising router associated with the accept
policy.
Enable
Indicates whether the policy is enabled.
MetricType
Indicates the metric type associated with the
policy. Available options are: type1, type2, and
any.
PolicyName
Indicates the name associated with the policy.
3
Click Apply.
—End—
OSPF Accept Policy creation
To create a new OSPF accept policy, follow this procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > Policy from the Device Manager menu. The
Policy dialog opens with the Prefix List tab selected. Select the
OSPF Accept tab. This tab is illustrated above.
2
Click Insert.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 275
3
The Insert OSPF Accept dialog opens. This dialog is illustrated
below.
Insert OSPF Accept dialog
4
Using the fields provided, create the new accept policy. These fields
are described in the following table.
Insert OSPF Accept fields
Field
Description
AdvertisingRtr
The advertising router associated with the accept
policy.
Enable
Indicates whether the policy is enabled.
MetricType
Indicates the metric type associated with the
policy. Available options are: type 1, type 2, and
any.
PolicyName
Indicates the name associated with the policy.
5
Click Insert.
—End—
OSPF Accept Policy deletion
To delete an OSPF accept policy, use the following procedure.
Deleting an OSPF accept policy
Step Action
1
From the Device Manager main menu, select IP Routing. The IP
Routing menu appears.
2
3
4
5
Select Policy. The Policy dialog appears.
Select the OSPF Accept tab. The OSPF Accept window opens.
Select an AdvertisingRtr to delete.
Click Delete.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
276 IP Routing Configuration and Management
—End—
RIP In and Out Policy configuration
The RIP In/Out Policy tab is used to configure RIP accept and announce
policies on switch interfaces. To configure these policies, follow this
procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > Policy from the Device Manager menu. The
Policy dialog opens with the Prefix List tab selected. Select the RIP
In/Out Policy tab. This tab is illustrated below.
Policy dialog - RIP In/Out Policy tab
2
Using the fields provided, configure the RIP policies. These fields
are described in the following table.
RIP In/Out Policy tab fields
Field
Description
Address
Interface
InPolicy
The address of the RIP interface.
The associated switch interface.
A previously configured policy that will be used as the
accept policy on this interface.
OutPolicy
A previously configured policy that will be used as the
announce policy on this interface.
3
Click Apply.
—End—
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 277
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)
The Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) is designed to eliminate
the single point of failure that can occur when the single static default
gateway router for an end station is lost.
This section describes the procedures used to configure VRRP using the
Java Device Manager.
Global VRRP configuration
The Device Manager can be used to configure global VRRP settings. This
is done from the VRRP Globals tab.
To configure global VRRP settings, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > VRRP from the Device Manager menu. The
VRRP dialog opens with the Globals tab selected. This tab is
illustrated below.
VRRP dialog - Globals tab
2
Using the provided fields, configure the global VRRP settings. These
fields are illustrated in the following table.
Globals tab fields
Field
Description
Enabled
Indicates whether VRRP is globally enabled
on the switch.
Version
Indicates the version of VRRP supported on
this switch.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
278 IP Routing Configuration and Management
NotificationCntl
Indicates whether the VRRP-enabled router
generates Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) traps based on VRRP
events:
•
•
Enabled - SNMP traps are sent.
Disabled - SNMP traps are not sent.
PingVirtualAddrEnabled Indicates whether this device should respond
to pings directed to a virtual router’s IP
address.
3
Click Apply.
—End—
VRRP interface creation
The Interface Address tab of the VRRP dialog is used to create new VRRP
interfaces. Configuration and management of these interfaces is performed
on the Interfaces tab.
To create new VRRP interfaces, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > VRRP from the Device Manager menu. The
VRRP dialog opens with the Globals tab selected. Select the
Interface Address tab. This tab is illustrated below.
VRRP dialog - Interface Address tab
2
3
Click Insert.
The Insert Interface Address dialog opens. This dialog is illustrated
below.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 279
Insert Interface Address dialog
4
Using the provided fields, create the new interface. These fields
are outlined in the following table.
Insert Interface Address dialog fields
Field
Description
IfIndex
The interface index to assign to the new
interface. Click the button at the end of the
field to select a previously configured interface.
Otherwise, enter an index value directly.
VrId
The virtual router ID to assign to this interface.
The IP address to assign to this interface.
The status of the interface; active or inactive.
IpAddr
Status
5
Click Insert.
—End—
VRRP Interface deletion
To delete a VRRP interface, use the following procedure.
Deleting a VRRP interface
Step Action
1
From the Device Manager menu, select IP Routing. The IP Routing
menu appears.
2
3
Select VRRP. The VRRP window opens.
Select the Interface Address tab. The Interface Address window
opens.
4
5
Select an IfIndex to delete.
Click Delete.
—End—
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
280 IP Routing Configuration and Management
VRRP interface management
The Interfaces tab is used to manage VRRP interfaces created on the
Interface Address tab.
To manage VRRP interfaces, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > VRRP from the Device Manager menu. The
VRRP dialog opens with the Globals tab selected. Select the
Interfaces tab. This tab is illustrated below.
VRRP dialog - Interfaces tab
2
Manage VRRP interfaces using the provided fields. These fields
are outlined in the following table.
Interfaces tab fields
Field
Description
IfIndex
The interface index of the VRRP
interface.
VrId
A number that uniquely identifies a
virtual router on a given VRRP router.
PrimaryIpAddr
An IP address selected from the set
of real interface addresses. VRRP
advertisements are always sent using
the primary IP address as the source of
the IP packet.
VirtualMacAddr
State
The virtual MAC address of the virtual
router.
The current state of the virtual router.
A virtual router can be in one of the
following states: initalize (indicates the
virtual router is waiting for a startup
event), backup (indicates the virtual
router is monitoring the availability of the
master router), or master\ (indicates the
virtual router is forwarding packets for IP
addresses associated with the router).
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 281
AdminState
Priority
Indicates the administrative status of the
virtual router.
Indicates the priority to be used for the
virtual router master election process.
This is an integer value between 1 and
255. The priority value for the VRRP
router that owns the IP addresses
associated with the virtual router must be
255. The default priority value for VRRP
routers backing up a virtual router is 100.
MasterIpAddr
Indicates the master router’s real
(primary) IP address. This is the IP
address listed as the source in the
VRRP advertisement last received by
this virtual router.
AdvertisementInterval
Indicates the time interval, in seconds,
between transmission of advertisement
messages. Only the master router sends
VRRP advertisements. This is an integer
value between 1 and 255. The default
value is 1.
VirtualRouterUpTime
HolddownTimer
Indicates the amount of time this virtual
router has spent out of the initialize
state.
The amount of time (in seconds) to wait
before preempting the current VRRP
master. This is an integer value between
0 and 21600.
HoldDownState
HoldDownTimeRemaining
Action
The holddown state of this VRRP
interface.
The amount of time (in seconds) left
before the holddown timer will expire.
Used to trigger an action on this VRRP
interface. Options available are: none
(no action) or preemptHoldDownTimer.
CriticalIpAddrEnabled
Indicates whether the user-defined
critical IP address is enabled. If the
user-defined critical IP address is not
enabled, a default critical IP address of
0.0.0.0 will be used.
CriticalIpAddr
The IP address of the interface that will
cause a shutdown event.
BackupMasterEnabled
Indicates whether the backup/master
functionality is enabled on this interface.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
282 IP Routing Configuration and Management
BackupMasterState
Indicates the state of the backup/master
functionality.
FastAdvertisementEnabled
Indicates if the Faster Advertisement
Interval should be used. The default
value is false.
FastAdvertisementInterval
The fast advertisement interval,
in milliseconds, between sending
advertisement messages. This is an
integer value between 200 and 1000.
The default value is 200.
3
Click Apply.
—End—
Graphing VRRP interface information
Statistical information about the VRRP interface can be viewed and graphed
on the Interfaces tab.
To view and graph this statistical information, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > VRRP from the Device Manager menu. The
VRRP dialog opens with the Globals tab selected. Select the
Interfaces tab. This tab is illustrated above.
2
3
Select a listed interface and click Graph.
The VRRP Stats dialog opens. This dialog is illustrated below.
VRRP Stats dialog
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 283
4
Using the provided fields, view and graph the VRRP statistical
information. The following table outlines these fields
VRRP Stats fields
Field
Description
BecomeMaster
The total number of times that this virtual
router’s state has transitioned to MASTER.
AdvertiseRcvd
The total number of VRRP advertisements
received by this virtual router.
AdvertiseIntervalErrors
The total number of VRRP advertisement
packets received for which the
advertisement interval is different
than the one configured for the local virtual
router.
IpTtlErrors
The total number of VRRP packets
received by the virtual router with IP TTL
(Time-To-Live) not equal to 255.
PriorityZeroPktsRcvd
PriorityZeroPktsSent
InvalidTypePktsRcvd
The total number of VRRP packets received
by the virtual router with a priority of 0.
The total number of VRRP packets sent by
the virtual router with a priority of 0.
The number of VRRP packets received by
the virtual router with an invalid value in the
type field.
AddressListErrors
The total number of packets received for
which the address list does not match the
locally configured list for the virtual router.
AuthFailures
The total number of VRRP packets received
that do not pass the authentication check.
InvalidAuthType
AuthTypeMismatch
The total number of packets received with
an unknown authentication type.
The total number of packets received
with Auth Type not equal to the locally
configured authentication method.
PacketLengthErrors
The total number of packets received with
a packet length less than the length of the
VRRP header.
—End—
Viewing general VRRP statistics
General VRRP statistics can be viewed and graphed on the Stats tab.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
284 IP Routing Configuration and Management
To view and graph general VRRP statistics, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > VRRP from the Device Manager menu. The
VRRP dialog opens with the Globals tab selected. Select the Stats
tab. This tab is illustrated below.
VRRP dialog - Stats tab
2
Using the provided fields to view and graph the general VRRP
statistics. The following table outlines these fields.
Stats tab fields
Field
Description
RouterChecksumErrors
The total number of VRRP packets received
with an invalid VRRP checksum value.
RouterVersionErrors
RouterVrIdErrors
The total number of VRRP packets received
with an unknown or unsupported version
number.
The total number of VRRP packets received
with an invalid VRID for this virtual router.
—End—
Equal Cost MultiPath (ECMP)
The Equal Cost MultiPath (ECMP) feature allows routers to determine equal
cost paths to the same destination prefix. The multiple paths can be used
for load sharing of traffic and allows faster convergence to other active paths
in case of network failure. This section describes the procedures used to
configure ECMP on the switch using the Java Device Manager.
Note: ECMP is only supported on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch
5520 and 5530. ECMP will work in a mixed stack but will not run on any
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5510 units in the stack.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 285
ECMP configuration
The ECMP tab is used to configure and manage ECMP settings for RIP,
OSPF, and static routes.
To configure ECMP, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > IP from the Device Manager menu. The IP
dialog opens with the Globals tab selected. Select the ECMP tab.
This tab is illustrated below.
2
3
Using the MaxPath field, enter the number of paths allotted to each
protocol listed. Up to 4 paths can be allotted to each. The default
is 1.
Click Apply.
—End—
Brouter port
A brouter port is a single-port VLAN that can route IP packets as well
as bridge all non-routable traffic. The following section describes the
procedures necessary to configure and manage brouter ports on the Nortel
Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series using the Java Device Manager.
Configuration and management of Brouter ports
The IP Address tab of the Port dialog is used to configure and manage the
switch brouter ports.
To configure and manage brouter ports, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select a port on the Device Manager Front Panel view.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
286 IP Routing Configuration and Management
2
Select Edit > Port from the Device Manager menu. The Port dialog
opens with the Interface tab selected. Select the IP Address tab.
This tab is illustrated below.
Port dialog - IP Address tab
3
Use the provided fields to view the brouter port settings. These fields
are outlined in the following table.
IP Address tab fields
Field
Description
IpAddress
NetMask
The IP address assigned to this brouter.
The subnet mask associated with the brouter
IP address.
BcastAddrFormat
ReasmMaxSize
The IP broadcast address format used on this
interface.
The size of the largest IP datagram which
this entity can reassemble from incoming
IP fragmented datagrams received on this
interface.
VlanId
The VLAN ID associated with this brouter port.
MacOffset
The MAC address offset associated with this
brouter port.
—End—
Creating a Brouter port
To create a new brouter port, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select a port on the Device Manager Front Panel view.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 287
2
Select Edit > Port from the Device Manager menu. The Port dialog
opens with the Interface tab selected. Select the IP Address tab.
This tab is illustrated above.
3
4
Click Insert.
The Insert IP Address dialog opens. This dialog is illustrated below.
Insert IP Address dialog
5
Using the provided fields, create the new brouter port. These fields
are outlined in the following table.
Insert IP Address dialog fields
Field
Description
IpAddress
NetMask
The IP address assigned to this brouter.
The subnet mask associated with the brouter
IP address.
VlanId
The VLAN ID associated with this brouter port.
MacOffset
The MAC address offset associated with this
brouter port.
6
Click Insert.
—End—
Note: Brouter ports are treated as routable VLANs and are displayed
on the Basic tab of the VLANs screen.
Deleting a Brouter port
To delete a brouter port, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
2
Select a port on the Device Manager Front Panel view.
Select Edit > Port from the Device Manager menu. The Port dialog
opens with the Interface tab selected. Select the IP Address tab.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
288 IP Routing Configuration and Management
3
4
Select a brouter port from these listed on the tab by clicking in the
row.
Click Delete.
—End—
UDP broadcast forwarding
UDP broadcast forwarding is a general mechanism for selectively forwarding
limited UDP broadcasts received on an IP interface to a configured IP
address. This section outlines the procedures used to configure and
manage UDP broadcast forwarding using the Java Device Manager.
UDP protocol configuration
The Protocols tab of the UDP Forward dialog is used to define UDP ports
for use in UDP forwarding.
To configure a UDP port, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > UDP Forwarding from the Device Manager
menu. The UDP Forwarding dialog opens with the Protocols tab
selected. This tab is illustrated below.
UDP Forward dialog - Protocols tab
2
3
Click Insert.
The Insert Protocols dialog opens. This dialog is illustrated below.
Insert Protocols dialog
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 289
4
Using the provided fields, configure the new UDP protocol. These
fields are outlined in the following table.
Insert Protocols dialog fields
Field
Description
PortNumber
Name
The port the new UDP protocol will use.
The name associated with the UDP protocol.
5
Click Insert.
—End—
UDP forwarding configuration
The Forwardings tab of the UDP Forward dialog is used to assign a server
IP address to a previously configured protocol.
To configure a UDP forwarding, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > UDP Forwarding from the Device Manager
menu. The UDP Forwarding dialog opens with the Protocols tab
selected. Select the Forwardings tab. This tab is illustrated below.
UDP Forward dialog - Forwardings tab
2
3
Click Insert.
The Insert Forwardings dialog opens. This dialog is illustrated
below.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
290 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Insert Forwardings dialog
4
Using the provided fields, configure the UDP forwarding. These
fields are outlined in the following table.
Insert Forwardings dialog fields
Field
Description
DestPort
The destination port of the UDP forwarding.
These are configured on the Protocols tab.
DestAddr
The server IP address.
5
Click Insert.
—End—
UDP forwarding deletion
To delete a server IP address from a previously configured protocol, use the
following procedure.
Deleting a UDP forwarding
Step Action
1
From the Device Manager main menu, select IP Routing. The IP
Routing menu appears.
2
3
4
5
Select UDP Forwarding. The UDP Forwarding dialog opens.
Select the Forwardings tab.
Select a DestPort to delete.
Click Delete.
—End—
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 291
UDP forwarding list configuration
The Forwarding Lists tab of the UDP Forward dialog is used to group
the port/server IP pairs configured on the Forwardings tab into lists and
assign name to the lists.
To configure a forwarding list, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > UDP Forwarding from the Device Manager
menu. The UDP Forwarding dialog opens with the Protocols tab
selected. Select the Forwarding Lists tab. This tab is illustrated
below.
UDP Forward dialog - Forwarding Lists tab
2
Using the provided fields, configure the forwarding list. These fields
are outlined in the following table.
Forwarding Lists tab fields
Field
Description
Id
The unique identifier assigned to the forwarding
list.
Name
The name assigned to the forwarding list.
FwdIdList
The identifiers of the port/server IP pairs created
on the Forwardings tab and associated with the
forwarding list.
3
Click Apply.
—End—
UDP forwarding list creation
To create a new forwarding list, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > UDP Forwarding from the Device Manager
menu. The UDP Forwarding dialog opens with the Protocols tab
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
292 IP Routing Configuration and Management
selected. Select the Forwarding Lists tab. This tab is illustrated
above.
2
3
Click Insert.
The Insert Forwarding Lists dialog opens. This dialog is illustrated
below.
Insert Forwarding Lists dialog
4
Using the provided fields, configure the new forwarding list. These
fields are outlined in the following table.
Insert Forwarding Lists dialog fields
Field
Description
Id
The unique identifier assigned to the forwarding
list.
Name
The name assigned to the forwarding list.
FwdIdList
The identifiers of the port/server IP pairs created
on the Forwardings tab and associated with the
forwarding list.
5
Click Insert.
—End—
UDP forwarding list deletion
To delete a UDP forwarding list, use the following procedure.
Deleting a UDP forwarding list
Step Action
1
2
3
From the Device Manager menu, select IP Routing . The IP
Routing menu appears.
Select UDP Forwarding. The UDP Forwarding dialog opens with
the Protocols tab selected.
Select the Forwarding Lists tab.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 293
4
5
Select an Id to delete.
Click Delete.
—End—
Configuring UDP broadcast interfaces
The Broadcast Interfaces tab is used to assign a forwarding list to an
interface. The TTL for outgoing packets and the broadcast mask for
incoming packets are also added on this tab.
To configure the broadcast interface, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > UDP Forwarding from the Device Manager
menu. The UDP Forwarding dialog opens with the Protocols tab
selected. Select the Broadcast Interfaces tab. This tab is illustrated
below.
UDP Forward dialog - Broadcast Interfaces tab
2
Using the provided fields, configure the broadcast interface. These
fields are outlined in the following table.
Broadcast Interface tab fields
Field
Description
LocalIfAddr
UdpPortFwdListId
The IP address of the local interface.
The port forwarding lists associated with
the interface. This ID is defined in the
Forwarding Lists tab.
MaxTtl
Indicates the maximum number of hops
an IP broadcast packet can take from the
source device to the destination device.
This is an integer value between 1 and 16.
NumRxPkts
The total number of UDP broadcast
packets received by this local interface.
NumFwdPkts
The total number of UDP broadcast
packets forwarded.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
294 IP Routing Configuration and Management
NumDropPktsDestUnreach
The total number of UDP broadcast
packets dropped because the destination
was unreachable.
NumDropPktsUnknownPort
BroadCastMask
The total number of UDP broadcast
packets dropped because the destination
port or protocol specified has no matching
forwarding policy.
The subnet mask of the local interface
that is used for broadcasting the UDP
broadcast packets.
3
Click Apply.
—End—
UDP broadcast interface creation
To create a new broadcast interface, use the following procedure:
Step Action
1
Select IP Routing > UDP Forwarding from the Device Manager
menu. The UDP Forwarding dialog opens with the Protocols tab
selected. Select the Broadcast Interfaces tab. This tab is illustrated
above.
2
3
Click Insert.
The Insert Broadcast Interface dialog opens. This dialog is
illustrated below.
Insert Broadcast Interfaces dialog
4
Using the provided fields, create the new broadcast interface. These
fields are outlined in the following table.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 295
Insert Broadcast Interfaces dialog fields
Field
Description
LocalIfAddr
UdpPortFwdListId
The IP address of the local interface.
The port forwarding lists associated with the
interface. This ID is defined in the Forwarding
Lists tab.
MaxTtl
Indicates the maximum number of hops an IP
broadcast packet can take from the source
device to the destination device. This is an
integer value between 1 and 16.
BroadCastMask
The subnet mask of the local interface that
is used for broadcasting the UDP broadcast
packets.
5
Click Insert.
—End—
UDP broadcast interface deletion
To delete a UDP broadcast interface, use the following procedure.
Deleting a UDP broadcast interface
Step Action
1
From the Device Manager main menu, select IP Routing. The IP
routing menu appears.
2
3
Select UDP Forwarding. The UDP Forwarding dialog opens.
Select the Broadcast Interfaces tab. The Broadcast Interfaces
window opens.
4
5
Select a LocalIfAddr to delete.
Click Delete.
—End—
DHCP configuration
The following topics describe DHCP configuration using the Device
Manager.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
296 IP Routing Configuration and Management
DHCP Relay
Use the DHCP relay tab to view and configure the DHCP settings for the
switch.
To view the DHCP Relay tab, select IP Routing > DHCP from the Device
Manager menu. The following figure illustrates the DHCP Relay tab.
DHCP Relay tab
To configure a DHCP entry, use the following procedure:
Creating a DHCP entry
Step Action
1
2
From the Device Manager, select IP Routing > DHCP. The DHCP
Relay tab appears.
Click the Insert button. The DHCP, Insert DHCP Relay dialog, as
illustrated in the following figure, appears.
Insert DHCP Relay
3
Make the new DHCP progressRelay entry in the fields provided. The
following table describes the fields in the Insert DHCP Relay dialog.
Insert DHCP Relay fields
Field
Description
AgentAddr
ServerAddr
The IP address configured on an interface.
The IP address of the DHCP server. This IP
address should be a remote address, so the
DHCP packet is sent through unicast to the
remote device.
Enable
Mode
Enables the DHCP mode.
Indicate whether this entry pertains to BOOTP
packets, DHCP packets, or both.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 297
4
Click Insert. The new DHCP entry displays on the DHCP Relay
screen.
—End—
To delete a DHCP entry, use the following procedure.
Deleting a DHCP entry
Step Action
1
From the Device Manager, select IP Routing > DHCP. The DHCP
Relay tab appears.
2
3
Select a DHCP relay entry to delete.
Click Delete.
—End—
DHCP Snooping
To enable DHCP Snooping, use the following procedure.
Step Action
1
2
From the Device Manager menu, select IP Routing > DHCP. The
DHCP window appears.
Select the DHCP Snooping tab. DHCP Snooping dialog appears.
DHCP Snooping tab
3
4
To enable DHCP Snooping, click the check box. The status appears.
Click Apply.
—End—
DHCP Snooping VLAN
To view DHCP Snooping information for VLANs, use the following procedure.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
298 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Step Action
1
2
From the Device Manager menu, select IP Routing > DHCP. The
DHCP window appears.
Select the DHCP Snooping-VLAN tab. The DHCP Snooping-VLAN
window appears. If DHCP Snooping is enabled for a VLAN the field
is true. If DHCP Snooping is disabled for a VLAN, the field is false.
DHCP Snooping-VLAN tab
3
4
Select a VlanId.
To change the status, double click the DhcpSnoopingEnabled box
for the VLAN.
5
6
Select true or false.
Click Apply.
—End—
DHCP Snooping port
To view DHCP Snooping information for ports, use the following procedure.
Step Action
1
2
From the Device Manager menu, select IP Routing > DHCP. The
DHCP window appears.
Select the DHCP Snooping-port tab. The DHCP Snooping-port
window appears.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 299
DHCP Snooping-port tab
3
4
Select a port.
To change the status, double click the DhcpSnoopingIfTrusted box
for the port.
Note: The DhcpSnoopingIfTrusted field value is used to control
whether this interface is trusted for DHCP snooping purposes.
5
6
Select true or false.
Click Apply.
—End—
DHCP bindings
To view information about learned DHCP bindings, use the following
procedure.
Step Action
1
2
From the Device Manager menu, select IP Routing > DHCP. The
DHCP window appears.
Select the DHCP Bindings tab. The DHCP Bindings window
appears.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
300 IP Routing Configuration and Management
DHCP Bindings
—End—
The following table describes the fields in the DHCP Bindings window.
Field
Description
VlanId
Specifies the VLAN ID for the DHCP client..
Specifies the VLAN MAC address for the DHCP client.
MacAddress
AddressType
Specifies the type of address contained in the corresponding
binding address.
Address
Interface
Specifies the IP address for the DHCP client.
Specifies the interface to which the DHCP client is
connected.
LeaseTime(sec)
Specifies the DHCP client binding lease time, in seconds.
IP Source Guard port
To view IP Source Guard status for ports, use the following procedure.
Step Action
1
From the Device Manager menu, select IP Routing > DHCP. The
DHCP Relay window appears.
DHCP Relay tab
2
Select the IP Source Guard-port tab. The IP Source Guard-port
window appears.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 301
IP Source Guard-port tab
3
4
5
6
To change the port mode, select a port.
Double click the mode box.
Select ip or disabled.
Click Apply.
—End—
IP Source Guard addresses
To view IP Source Guard address information, use the following procedure.
Step Action
1
2
From the Device Manager menu, select IP Routing > DHCP. The
DHCP Relay window opens.
Select the IP Source Guard-addresses tab. The IP Source
Guard-addresses window appears.
IP Source Guard-addresses tab
—End—
The following table describes the fields in the IP Source Guard-addresses
window:
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
302 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Field
Port
Description
Specifies the IP Source Guard-enabled port number.
Specifies the port type.
Type
Address
Specifies the IP address allowed to communicate with the
port.
TIP: Up to 10 IP addresses are allowed on an IP Source
Guard-enabled port. Traffic from other addresses is
dropped.
Source
Specifies the address source.
VLAN DHCP configuration
DHCP can also be configured for Layer 3 VLANs. To configure DHCP for a
Layer 3 VLAN, follow this procedure:
Step Action
1
Open the VLANs screen by selecting VLAN > VLANs from the JDM
menu.
2
3
Highlight the VLAN for which DHCP is to be configured.
Click IP. The IP VLAN screen opens. Select the DHCP tab. This tab
is illustrated below.
DHCP tab fields
The following table describes the DHCP tab fields.
DHCP tab fields
Fields
Description
Specifies whether DHCP is enabled or
disabled.
Enable
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 303
Fields
Description
MinSec
Indicates the minimum number of seconds to
wait between receiving a DHCP packet and
actually forwarding the DHCP packet to the
destination device. A value of zero(0) indicates
forwarding should be done immediately without
any delay.
Mode
Indicates what type of DHCP packets this
interface supports. A value of none(1) results
in all incoming DHCP and BOOTP packets
being dropped.
AlwaysBroadcast
Indicates if DHCP Reply packets should be
broadcast to the DHCP client on this interface.
4
5
Make changes as necessary in the fields provided.
Click Apply.
—End—
Note: A procedure for viewing and graphing DHCP statistics can
be found in Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch Configuration - System
Monitoring Part Number NN47200-505
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
304 IP Routing Configuration and Management
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
305
Configuring IGMP snooping using the
Java Device Manager
This section describes the methods and procedures to configure and
manage IGMP snooping using the Java Device Manager. For more
information, refer to "IGMP snooping" (page 46)
To enable IGMP Snooping for a VLAN, use the following procedure.
Enabling IGMP Snooping for a VLAN
Step Action
1
2
From the Device Manager main menu, select >VLAN. The VLAN
dialog opens.
Select the Snoop tab. The Snoop dialog opens.
VLAN Snoop tab
3
4
Select a VLAN.
To enable snooping, double click the Enable field for the VLAN and
select true.
5
6
7
To enable proxy reporting, double click the field and select true.
To change other field values, click the field and enter the value.
Click Apply to commit the configuration changes.
—End—
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
306 Configuring IGMP snooping using the Java Device Manager
TIP: You can change the presentation order of the VLANs in the Snoop
table. Click the column name of any column. An up or down arrow, indicating
ascending or descending order, appears next to the column name.
VLAN Snoop tab fields
Field
Id
Description
The number assigned to the VLAN during creation.
The VLAN name.
Name
Enable
Specifies snooping status:
•
•
if false, snooping is disabled
if true, snooping is enabled
ReportProxyEnable
Specifies the IGMP report proxy status.
•
•
if false, no proxy report generates
if true, a proxy report (IGMP host membership report)
generates
The default ReportProxyEnable setting is false (disabled).
Robustness
Specifies the robust value. Use a Robustness value to
tune the system for the expected packet loss on a subnet.
Note: If a subnet experiences unacceptably high packet
losses, increase the Robustness value.
The default Robustness value is 2.
QueryInterval
Specifies the query time, in seconds, between IGMP host
and query packets transmitted on an interface.
QueryInterval, the time between general queries sent
by the multicast router, controls the number of IGMP
messages allowed on the subnet
The default setting is 125 seconds.
MRouterPorts
Displays the set of ports in the VLAN providing
connectivity to an IP multicast router.
Ver1MRouterPorts
Displays the set of ports in the VLAN providing
connectivity to an IP Multicast router using IGMP version
1.
Ver2MRouterPorts
Displays the set of ports in the VLAN providing
connectivity to an IP Multicast router using IGMP version
2.
ActiveMRouterPorts
ActiveQuerier
Displays the set of active ports in the VLAN providing
connectivity to an IP Multicast router.
Displays the IP address of a multicast querier router.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enabling IGMP Snooping for a VLAN 307
Field
Description
QuerierPort
Displays the port on which the multicast querier router
was heard.
MRouterExpiration
Displays the multicast querier router aging timeout value.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
308 Configuring IGMP snooping using the Java Device Manager
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
309
Configuring IGMP using Web-based
management
This chapter describes the methods and procedures for the configuration
and management of IGMP.
Configuring IGMP using the Web-based Management Interface
The Web-based Management Interface provides tools for the configuration
and management of IGMP. To configure IGMP using these tools, use the
following procedure:
Step Action
1
Open the IGMP Configuration window by choosing Applications >
IGMP > IGMP Configuration from the menu.
IGMP Configuration screen
2
Click the icon in the Action column beside the VLAN for the IGMP to
be configured. The IGMP: VLAN Configuration window appears.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
310 Configuring IGMP using Web-based management
IGMP: VLAN Configuration screen
3
In the fields provided in the IGMP VLAN Setting window, configure
IGMP for the VLAN. The following table outlines the fields in this
window.
IGMP VLAN Setting fields
Field
Description
VLAN
The number assigned to the VLAN when the
VLAN was created.
Snooping
Select to enable or disable the IGMP snooping
feature.
Note: This field affects only the VLAN specified
in the page’s VLAN field.
The default setting is Disabled.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring IGMP using the Web-based Management Interface 311
Field
Description
Proxy
Select to enable or disable the Proxy feature.
This feature lets the switch to consolidate
IGMP Host Membership Reports received
on its downstream ports and to generate a
consolidated proxy report for forwarding to its
upstream neighbor.
Note: This field affects only the VLAN specified
in the page’s VLAN field.
The default setting is Disabled.
Robust Value
Type the robust value in the appropriate
format. This feature lets you set the switch
to offset expected packet loss on a subnet. If
packet losses on a subnet are unacceptably
high, the Robust Value field can be increased
to a higher value.
Note: This field affects only the VLAN specified
in the page’s VLAN field.
The default setting is 2.
Query Time
Type the query time (in seconds) in the
appropriate format. This feature lets you
control the number of IGMP messages allowed
on the subnet by varying the query interval
(the interval between general queries sent by
the multicast router).
Note: This field affects only the VLAN specified
in the page’s VLAN field.
The default setting is 125 seconds.
Static Router Ports
(Version 1 and Version
2)
Select the check boxes of the router ports to
associate with the VLAN (alternatively, select
the check box to uncheck a selected router
port).
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
312 Configuring IGMP using Web-based management
Field
Description
Note: This field affects only the VLAN specified
in the page’s VLAN field.
4
Click Submit.
—End—
The VLAN Configuration screen reopens and the settings are saved.
Displaying multicast membership using the Web-based Management
Interface
Use the following procedure to display Multicast membership in the
Web-based Management Interface:
Step Action
1
Open the IGMP Multicast Group Membership window by choosing
Applications > IGMP > Multicast Group from the menu.
IGMP Multicast Group Membership window
2
3
Select the VLAN whose membership is to be viewed from the VLAN
list in the Multicast Group Membership Selection (View By)
section.
Click Submit.
—End—
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying multicast membership using the Web-based Management Interface 313
The membership information appears in the Multicast Group Membership
Table section.
The following table describes the IGMP Multicast Group Membership page
fields.
IGMP Multicast Group Membership page fields
Section
Field
Description
Multicast Group
Membership
Selection (View
By)
VLAN
Select the VLAN on which to view
configured IP addresses.
Multicast Group
Multicast Group The IP Multicast group addresses that
Membership Table Address
are currently active on the associated
port.
Port
The port numbers associated with the IP
Multicast group addresses displayed in
the IP Multicast Group Address field.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
314
Index
A
ARP 21
E
automatic router ID assignment, if router
ECMP 38
G
Global DHCP commands
B
H
I
Interface DHCP commands
C
Configuring IGMP using Web-based
management 309
IP Routing Configuration and
Management 51
D
default router ID auto assigned if router
DHCP forward path commands
M
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index 315
N
O
S
OSPF 27
Switch platforms
P
Preface 9
U
R
RIP 23
V
VRRP 37
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
316 Index
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
NN47200-503 03.01 Standard
5.1 27 August 2007
Copyright © 2005-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
Configuration-IP Routing Protocols
Copyright © 2005-2007 , Nortel Networks
All Rights Reserved.
Publication: NN47200-503
Document status: Standard
Document version: 03.01
Document date: 27 August 2007
To provide feedback, or report a problem in this document, go to http://www.nortel.com/documentfeedback.
Sourced in Canada and the United States of America.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design
or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant.
*Nortel, Nortel Networks, the Nortel logo, and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|